Daikin | REYQ_PTJU | Specifications | Daikin REYQ_PTJU Specifications

Si30 - 813
RWEYQ 8-30PY1 (50Hz)
RWEYQ10-30PYL (60Hz)
RWEYQ10-30PTL (60Hz)
Water Cooled
—Heat Pump/Heat Recovery-50/60Hz—
Si30-813
Water Cooled
Heat Pump / Heat Recovery
50/60Hz
1. Introduction ............................................................................................ vi
1.1 Safety Cautions ....................................................................................... vi
1.2 PREFACE ................................................................................................x
Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1
1. Features ..................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Design Flexibility ......................................................................................4
Easy Installation .......................................................................................6
Energy Saving ..........................................................................................7
Enhanced Usability...................................................................................8
2. Model Names of Indoor / Outside Units ................................................10
3. External Appearance.............................................................................11
3.1 Indoor Units ............................................................................................11
3.2 Outside Units..........................................................................................12
4. Combination of Outside Units ...............................................................13
5. Capacity Range.....................................................................................14
Part 2 Specifications .................................................................. 15
1. Specifications ........................................................................................16
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
50Hz .......................................................................................................16
60Hz .......................................................................................................19
BS Units .................................................................................................20
Indoor Units ............................................................................................21
Part 3 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 45
1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................46
1.1 RWEYQ8P, 10P .....................................................................................46
1.2 BS Unit Functional Parts ........................................................................48
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................49
2.1 RWEYQ8P, 10P .....................................................................................49
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................51
3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection.........................................................51
3.2 In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(One Outside Unit Installation) ...............................................................53
3.3 In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(3 Outside Units Connection) .................................................................57
Table of Contents
i
Si30-813
Part 4 Function............................................................................ 61
1. Function General...................................................................................62
1.1 Symbol ...................................................................................................62
1.2 Operation Mode......................................................................................63
1.3 Normal Operation ...................................................................................64
2. Stop.......................................................................................................65
2.1 Stopping Operation ................................................................................65
3. Standby .................................................................................................68
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................68
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control......................................................................68
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................69
4.1 Cooling Start-up Control.........................................................................69
4.2 Heating Start-up Control.........................................................................70
5. Normal Control ......................................................................................71
5.1 Compressor Control ...............................................................................71
5.2 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................73
5.3 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating Operation or
Simultaneous Cooling / Heating Operation ............................................74
6. Protection Control .................................................................................76
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................76
Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................77
Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................79
Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................80
Cooling Fan Control ...............................................................................81
7. Special Operation..................................................................................82
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................82
Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger .....................................84
Pump-down Residual Operation Control................................................85
Refrigerant Drift Prevention....................................................................87
8. Other Control.........................................................................................88
8.1 Outside Unit Rotation .............................................................................88
9. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................89
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
Drain Pump Control................................................................................89
Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt..............................................91
Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller...............................................92
Thermostat Control While in Normal Operation .....................................94
Thermostat Control in Dry Operation .....................................................94
Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................95
Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)........................................95
Heater Control ........................................................................................96
List of Swing Flap Operations ................................................................97
Freeze Prevention ..................................................................................98
Part 5 Test Operation ................................................................. 99
1. Test Operation ....................................................................................100
1.1 Procedure and Outline .........................................................................100
2. Outside Unit PC Board Layout ............................................................105
3. Field Setting ........................................................................................106
3.1 Field Setting from Remote Controller ...................................................106
3.2 Field Setting from Outside Unit ............................................................122
ii
Table of Contents
Si30-813
Part 6 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 151
1. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................154
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................154
Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller .........................................155
Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller .....................................156
Operation of the Remote Controller’s Inspection /
Test Operation Button ..........................................................................159
1.5 Remote Controller Service Mode .........................................................160
1.6 Remote Controller Self-Diagnosis Function .........................................162
2. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller ....................168
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.30
2.31
2.32
Table of Contents
“A0” Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device............................168
“A1” Indoor Unit: PC Board Defect ........................................................169
“A3” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control System (S1L) ......170
“A6” Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload...............................172
“A7” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (MA).......................179
Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................181
“A9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (20E) ........................................................182
“AF” Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit .............................................184
“AJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device ..........185
“C1” Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission
(Between Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)............................186
“C4” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger....................................................................................188
“C5” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas Pipes .........189
“C6” Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination
(Between Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)............................190
“C9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air.........191
“CC” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ....................192
“CJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in
Remote Controller ................................................................................193
“E1” Outside Unit: PC Board Defect......................................................194
“E3” Outside Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch ..........................195
“E4” Outside Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor ..........................197
“E5” Compressor Motor Lock ................................................................199
“E9” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y3E)...............................................201
“F3” Outside Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature ..................203
“F6” Refrigerant Overcharged ...............................................................204
“HJ” Malfunction of Water System.........................................................206
“J3” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor
(R3T) ....................................................................................................208
“J4” Malfunction of Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor (R4T) .........209
“J5” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Suction Pipe .........................................................................................210
“J7” Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T) .................................211
“J9” Malfunction of Sub Cooling Heat Exchanger
Outlet Thermistor (R5T) .......................................................................212
“JA” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Pressure Sensor .....213
“JC” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Suction Pipe Pressure Sensor .........214
“L4” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating
Fin Temperature Rise (R1T) ................................................................215
iii
Si30-813
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.36
2.37
2.38
2.39
2.40
2.41
2.42
2.43
2.44
2.45
2.46
2.47
2.48
2.49
2.50
2.51
2.52
“L5” Outside Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal................................216
“L8” Outside Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal .......................................217
“L9” Outside Unit: Inverter Start Up Error .............................................218
“LC” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Transmission between
Inverter and Control PC Board .............................................................219
“P1” Outside Unit: Inverter Over-Ripple Protection ...............................221
“P4” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Sensor ............................................................................222
“U0” Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure......................................................223
“U1” Reverse Phase, Open Phase ........................................................225
“U2” Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure ......................226
“U3” Check Operation not Executed......................................................228
“U4” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units.......................229
“U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Remote
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................231
“U7” Malfunction of Transmission between Outside Units.....................232
“U8” Malfunction of Transmission between Master and
Slave Remote Controllers ....................................................................234
“U9” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and
Outside Units in the Same System.......................................................235
“UA” Indoor & Outside Units and Remote Controller
Combination Failure .............................................................................237
“UC” Address Duplication of Centralized Controller...............................238
“UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................239
“UF” Refrigerant System not Set, Incompatible Wiring/Piping...............241
“UH” Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System
Address Undefined...............................................................................242
3. Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller) ..............................243
3.1 “M1” PC Board Defect ...........................................................................243
3.2 “M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control .......................................................244
3.3 “MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control...............................................................................245
3.4 “MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........................................247
4. Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)...............................................248
4.1 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................248
4.2 “M1” PC Board Defect ...........................................................................250
4.3 “M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control .......................................................251
4.4 “MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control...............................................................................252
4.5 “MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........................................254
5. Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) .............................255
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................................................255
5.2 Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Single Blink)..........................................................................257
5.3 Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Double Blink) ........................................................................260
iv
Table of Contents
Si30-813
Part 7 Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of
Switch Box ..................................................................... 267
1. Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box.........................268
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting...................................................................268
1.2 Procedure for Mounting........................................................................268
Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 271
1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................272
1.1 Outside Units........................................................................................272
1.2 BS Units ...............................................................................................273
1.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................274
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................277
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Outside Unit..........................................................................................277
Outside Unit Field Wiring......................................................................280
BS Unit .................................................................................................284
Indoor Unit............................................................................................286
3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts .................................................300
3.1 Outside Unit..........................................................................................300
3.2 Indoor Side ...........................................................................................301
4. Option List ...........................................................................................306
4.1 Optional Accessories............................................................................306
5.
6.
7.
8.
Example of Connection .......................................................................307
Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics........................309
Pressure Sensor .................................................................................311
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power Transistors and
Diode Modules ....................................................................................312
Part 9 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .................... 315
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................316
1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................316
1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................318
1.3 Service Tools........................................................................................319
Index
............................................................................................. i
Drawings & Flow Charts ................................................................ v
Table of Contents
v
Introduction
Si30-813
1. Introduction
1.1
Safety Cautions
Cautions and
Warnings
„ Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
Warning” and “
Caution”. The “
„ The caution items are classified into “
Warning”
items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not
followed closely. The “
Caution” items can also lead to serious accidents under some
conditions if they are not followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items
described below.
„ About the pictograms
This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown inside or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown inside or near the symbol.
„ After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
1.1.1 Caution in Repair
Warning
Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before
disassembling the equipment for a repair.
Working on the equipment that is connected to a power supply can cause an
electrical shock.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If the refrigerant gas discharges during the repair work, do not touch the
discharging refrigerant gas.
The refrigerant gas can cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the
welded section, release the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated
place first.
If there is a gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it can
cause injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The
refrigerant gas can generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical
components of the outside unit.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work.
A charged capacitor can cause an electrical shock.
Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the
power cable plug.
Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment can
cause an electrical shock or fire.
vi
Si30-813
Introduction
Caution
Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands can cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.
Washing the unit with water can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or
wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when cleaning
the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and cause injury.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.
The water inside the unit can spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down
sufficiently before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot can cause burns.
Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.
Using the welder in an enclosed room can cause oxygen deficiency.
1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Products after Repair
Warning
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and
appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools can cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has
sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment can fall and cause injury.
Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard
installation frame.
Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation can cause the
equipment to fall, resulting in injury.
Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on a
window frame.
If the unit is not securely mounted, it can fall and cause injury.
For integral units
only
For integral units
only
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the
technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring
regulations and the instruction manual for installation when conducting
electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work can cause an
electrical shock or fire.
vii
Introduction
Si30-813
Warning
Be sure to use the specified cable to connect between the indoor and outdoor
units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections can cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When connecting the cable between the indoor and outside units, make sure
that the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section can cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.
Damaged or modified power cable can cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable
can damage the cable.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A) in the
refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leak and repair it before
charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there is no
refrigerant leak.
If the leak cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be sure to
perform pump-down and close the service valve, to prevent the refrigerant gas
from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it can
generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan and other heaters,
stoves and ranges.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to disposed
of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the
conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of
combustible gas leaks.
If a combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it can cause a fire.
Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly.
For integral units
If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water can enter the room and only
wet the furniture and floor.
1.1.3 Inspection after Repair
Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert
the plug into a power outlet all the way.
If the plug has dust or loose connection, it can cause an electrical shock or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to
replace them.
Damaged cable and wires can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power
outlet with other electrical appliances, since it can cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
viii
Si30-813
Introduction
Caution
Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections can cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
Corroded installation platform or frame can cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.
Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded.
Improper grounding can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 Mohm or higher.
Faulty insulation can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage can cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
1.1.4 Using Icons
Icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information. The meaning of each
icon is described in the table below:
1.1.5 Using Icons List
Icon
Type of
Information
Description
Note
A “note” provides information that is not indispensable, but may
nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Caution
A “caution” is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, loose data, get
an unexpected result or has to restart (part of) a procedure.
Warning
A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Reference
A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or
in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.
Note:
Caution
Warning
ix
Introduction
1.2
Si30-813
PREFACE
Thank you for your continued patronage of Daikin products.
This is the new service manual for Daikin's water cooled VRV System.
Daikin offers a wide range of models to respond to building and office air conditioning needs.
We are confident that customers will be able to find the models that best suit their needs.
This service manual contains information regarding the servicing of water cooled VRV System.
November 2008
After Sales Service Division
x
Si30-813
Part 1
General Information
1. Features ..................................................................................................2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Design Flexibility ......................................................................................4
Easy Installation .......................................................................................6
Energy Saving ..........................................................................................7
Enhanced Usability...................................................................................8
2. Model Names of Indoor / Outside Units ................................................10
3. External Appearance.............................................................................11
3.1 Indoor Units ............................................................................................11
3.2 Outside Units..........................................................................................12
4. Combination of Outside Units ...............................................................13
5. Capacity Range.....................................................................................14
General Information
1
Features
Si30-813
1. Features
A water cooled intelligent individual
air conditioning system suitable for
tall multi-storeyed build ings.
This unique system can perform as heat pump or heat recovery to any suitable
application.
What is water cooled VRV III?
Water cooled VRV III is an individual air conditioning system
that utilises water as a heat source. In this unique system, water
is piped from a cooling tower or boiler to the VRV-WIII (which is
the equivalent of the outdoor unit of an air cooled conditioning
system) and after heat exchange, refrigerant is piped from the
VRV-WIII to each indoor unit.
What are its advantages?
Design flexibility
Easy installation
Energy saving
Enhanced usability
Cutting-edge technologies
The compact unit is packed with the latest technologies.
Water-pipe-less
internal structure
Heat exchanger
Evaporating/condensing ability
Scrolling
Reluctance DC
scroll compressor
Reluctance
DC motor
Smooth sine wave DC Inverter
By adoption of the Sine Wave which
smoothes the rotation of the motor,
operation efficiency is improved
sharply.
2
General Information
Si30-813
Features
Cooling tower
Boiler (for heating)
Water piping
To Cooling tower (Closed type), Boiler
Refrigerant piping
To Indoor units
General Information
3
Features
1.1
Si30-813
Design Flexibility
Enhanced design flexibility and cold climate capability
Water cooled VRV III uses water as its heat source, so it is optimal for large buildings, including tall,
multi-storey buildings, because the system can tolerate water pressure of up to 1.96 MPa.
Furthermore, if the currently installed heat source’s water temperature is between 10˚C and 45˚C, it
may be possible to use the existing water pipe work and heat source. This alone makes it an ideal
system solution for building refurbishment projects. Because the system is water cooled, outdoor air
temperature does not affect its heating capacity. In addition, water cooling means no defrost
operation is required, and the resultant rapid start-up time assures quick and comfortable heating,
even in cold environments.
Water piping
Refrigerant piping
Cooling tower (Closed type)
Indoor installation
VRV-WIII
Indoor installation
VRV-WIII
The system can tolerate water pressure up to 1.96 MPa.
4
General Information
Si30-813
Features
Long refrigerant piping length
Within the refrigerant piping system, a maximum of 120 m of actual piping length and 50 m*2 of
level difference between the VRV-WIII and indoor units are possible. Water piping does not
enter occupied spaces, so there is no worry of water leaking.
Multiple use
k
q
Max. 120 m
First
indoor branch
Max. 140 m
Max. 300 m
a
p
f
b
First outside branch
Single use
*The rest of indoor units are
the same as for single use.
a
g
f
r
First indoor branch
b
c
h
d
e
i
s
* Colours in the diagram above are merely for identifying pipes referenced with symbols such as a .
Actual
piping length
Equivalent
piping length
Example
120 m or less
140 m or less
a+f+g+h+i
Total extension length
300 m or less
—
a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i
Between the first indoor branch and the farthest indoor unit
90 m or less*1
—
f+g+h+i
Between the first outside branch and the last outside unit
10 m or less
13 m or less
k+p
Between the outside units (multiple use)
2 m or less
—
q
Between the indoor units
15 m or less
—
s
50 m or less*2
—
r
Refrigerant piping length
Maximum
allowable
piping length
Maximum
allowable
level difference
Between the outside units and the indoor units
*1 Maximum allowable piping length between the first indoor branch and the farthest indoor unit can be 90 m, or less depending on conditions.
*2 Max. 40 m if the outside unit is below.
• Refer to the Engineering Data for details of other requirements.
General Information
5
Features
1.2
Si30-813
Easy Installation
Compact and lightweight
Adoption of a water heat exchanger and optimisation of the refrigerant control circuit has
resulted compact and lightweight equipment. A weight of 149 kg and height of 1,000 mm make
installation possible in buildings with limited space, or where no space is available for outdoor
units. This makes the system ideal for places that have no area outside—such as underground
malls. Stacked configuration is also possible, further contributing to space savings.
* Unit is designed for indoor installation only.
1000 mm
149 kg*
(*For 8 HP)
780
780mm
mm
550
550mm
mm
Stacked-configuration in indoor installation is possible.
iping
rp
Wate
iping
rp
Wate
IN
OUT
d
Liqui
Gas
g
pipin
g
pipin
Min. 300 mm
(100–300 mm)
g
ipin
in p
Dra
6
* For illustration purposes only.
General Information
Si30-813
1.3
Features
Energy Saving
Heat recovery
Daikin offers 2-stage heat recovery operation.
The first stage of heat recovery operation is within the
refrigerant system. By controlling the BS unit that
switches cooling and heating, simultaneous cooling
and heating operation is made possible, with heat
recovery performed between indoor units.
The second stage of heat recovery operation is within
the water loop, where heat recovery is performed
between the VRV-WIII units.
This 2-stage heat recovery operation substantially
improves energy efficiency and makes the system the
ideal solution to the requirements of modern office
buildings, where some areas may require cooling
even in winter, depending on the amount of sunshine
received and the number of people in the room.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Simultaneous heating and cooling operation
within the refrigerant system.
Heat recovery operation between
the VRV-WIII units.
In mainly cooling, partly heating mode, the system recycles
heat exhausted from the cooling operation to use for heating.
In mainly heating, partly cooling mode, the system uses cooled
post-heating operation refrigerant for cooling. Efficiency
improves the more simultaneous operation is performed.
Heat recovery operation is also available between
systems connected to the same water loop, with systems
exchanging heat via water. This increases energy
efficiency.
The first stage: Between indoor units
The second stage: Between VRV-WIII units
Heat transfer
Heat radiation operation
(all cooling operation)
A
Heat
rejected
Cooling tower (Closed type), boiler
VRV-WIII
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
VRV-WIII
Heat radiation tendency
heat recovery operation
B
Heat rejected
to loop
(mainly cooling,
part heating operation)
Heat rejected
to loop
VRV-WIII
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
cooling
heating
heating
heating
heating
heating
heating
heating
VRV-WIII
Heat recovery operation
(cooling and heating operation)
Heat rejected
to loop
C
VRV-WIII
cooling
cooling
heating
heating
Heat absorption tendency
heat recovery operation
D
VRV-WIII
(mainly heating,
part cooling operation)
Heat absorption
VRV-WIII
cooling
heating
heating
heating
Heat absorption operation
Heat absorption
from loop
VRV-WIII
(all heating operation)
E
VRV-WIII
heating
heating
heating
heating
Heat absorption
from loop
Note: • Above system configurations are for illustration purposes only.
General Information
7
Features
1.4
Si30-813
Enhanced Usability
A variety of functions that realise easy installation
and improve reliability
• Features a pump interlock function that
controls the pump of the heat source
simultaneously with the starting of the
VRV-WIII unit. This significantly
simplifies operation and management.
• Employs DIII-NET to enable the shared
use of the wiring between the indoor
units, the VRV-WIII unit and the central
control wiring.
• Provides an auto address setting
function and check function that detects
connection errors in wiring and piping
for easier installation.
• Water piping goes only to the VRV-WIII
unit, with refrigerant piping run in
occupied spaces, making the system
ideal for installing in spaces such as OA
rooms, with no worry of water leakage
or corrosion.
Easily responds to simultaneous heating
and cooling needs.
BS unit
By adding suction gas piping and a BS unit (sold
separately), simultaneous heating and cooling
operation can be provided by a single system.
Standard system
(Heat pump)
Gas piping
Liquid piping
VRV-WIII unit
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
By adding suction gas piping and a BS unit...
Heat recovery
High and low
pressure gas piping
Suction gas piping
Liquid piping
VRV-WIII unit
BS unit
Indoor unit
(Heating)
BS unit
Indoor unit
(Cooling)
Indoor unit
(Cooling only)
Heat recovery operation!
Centralised interlocking function
DTA104A62
Centralised interlocking input is
possible using an external control
adaptor (DTA104A62).
Interlocking
Control wiring
(external-to-external
transmission wiring)
By using one external control
adaptor circuit board,
centralised interlocking input
to multiple units within the
same water system is possible.
8
General Information
Si30-813
Features
New BS unit for heat recovery can improve
comfortability by switching between cooling and
heating operation independently.
Originally, switching was performed by indoor
units, which lowers the operation capacities of
other indoor units. Now the switching can be
conducted on this new BS unit, successfully
reducing the effects to other indoor units when
compared to the VRV-WII system.
New
50Hz
BSVQ100PV1
BSVQ160PV1
BSVQ250PV1
60Hz
BSVQ36PVJU
BSVQ60PVJU
Equalising the pressure of only the BSVQ can switch over the operation mode.
VRV-WII Cooling
Heating
When switching from cooling to heating
with the conventional BS unit, the other
indoor units performing heating
operations also had to be stopped until
the changeover for the target indoor
unit had been completed.
Equalises the pressure
of whole system.
FAN OFF
New
Cooling
Heating
HOT START
Equalises the pressure of BSVQ only.
FAN
OFF
With the new BS unit, the
other indoor units can keep
heating while the target
indoor units are switched
from cooling to heating.
General Information
HOT
START
9
Model Names of Indoor / Outside Units
Si30-813
2. Model Names of Indoor / Outside Units
Indoor Units
Type
Power
Supply
Model Name
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type
(Round Flow)
FXFQ
—
25P
32P
40P
50P
63P
—
80P
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type
(Double Flow)
FXCQ
20M
25M
32M
40M
50M
63M
—
80M
—
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Corner Type
FXKQ
—
—
63MA
—
—
Slim Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type
25MA 32MA 40MA
100P 125P
—
—
125M
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQ-PBVE 20PB 25PB 32PB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQ-PBVET 20PB 25PB 32PB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQ-NBVE
—
—
—
40NB 50NB 63NB
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQ-NBVET
—
—
—
40NB 50NB 63NB
—
—
—
—
—
—
VE
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
FXSQ
20M
25M
32M
40M
50M
63M
—
80M
100M 125M
—
—
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
(Middle and high static pressure)
FXMQ
20P
25P
32P
40P
50P
63P
—
80P
100P 125P
—
—
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FXMQ
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
200MA
250MA
Ceiling Suspended Type
FXHQ
—
—
32MA
—
—
63MA
—
—
100MA
—
—
—
Wall Mounted Type
FXAQ
20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Floor Standing Type
FXLQ
20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Concealed Floor Standing Type
FXNQ
20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type FXUQ
—
—
—
—
—
—
71MA
—
100MA 125MA
—
—
V1
BEVQ
—
—
—
—
—
—
71MA
—
100MA 125MA
—
—
VE
Connection Unit for FXUQ
Note : FXDQ has following 2 series, as show below.
FXDQ-PBVET, NBVET: without Drain Pump (For General, Asia: except for EU, China and Australia)
FXDQ-PBVE, NBVE: with Drain Pump
BEV unit is required for FXUQ only.
MA: RoHS Directive models; Specifications, dimensions and other functions are not changed compared with
M type.
Power Supply:VE:1φ, 220V, 60Hz / 1φ, 220~240V, 50Hz V1 :1φ, 220~240V, 50Hz
BS Units
Series
Heat Recovery
Series
Model Name
BSVQ
Power Supply
100P
160P
250P
V1
36P
60P
—
VJU
Note : No compatibility between BSVQ-M.
Power Supply:V1 :1φ, 220~240V, 50Hz
VJU:1φ, 208~230V, 60Hz
Outside Units
Series
Heat Pump
Heat Recovery
Model Name
RWEYQ
Power Supply
8P
10P
16P
18P
20P
24P
26P
28P
30P
—
—
10P
—
—
20P
—
—
—
30P
—
Power Supply:Y1 : 3φ, 380~415V, 50Hz
YL : 3φ, 380V, 60Hz
Y1
YL, TL
TL :3φ, 220V, 60Hz
Combination of Outside Units (Heat Pump/Heat Recovery)
HP
8HP (50Hz)
10HP (50/60Hz)
16HP (50Hz)
18HP (50Hz)
Model name
RWEYQ18P
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ10P
RWEYQ16P
Outside unit 1
–
–
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ8P
Outside unit 2
–
–
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ10P
20HP(50/60Hz)
24HP (50Hz)
26HP (50Hz)
28HP (50Hz)
30HP(50/60Hz)
RWEYQ20P
RWEYQ24P
RWEYQ26P
RWEYQ28P
RWEYQ30P
Outside unit 1
RWEYQ10P
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ10P
Outside unit 2
RWEYQ10P
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ10P
RWEYQ10P
Outside unit 3
–
RWEYQ8P
RWEYQ10P
RWEYQ10P
RWEYQ10P
HP
Model name
10
General Information
Si30-813
External Appearance
3. External Appearance
3.1
Indoor Units
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round Flow)
FXFQ25P
FXFQ32P
FXFQ40P
FXFQ50P
FXFQ63P
FXFQ80P
FXFQ100P
FXFQ125P
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow)
FXCQ20M
FXCQ25M
FXCQ32M
FXCQ40M
FXCQ50M
FXCQ63M
FXCQ80M
FXCQ125M
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type
FXKQ25MA
FXKQ32MA
FXKQ40MA
FXKQ63MA
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FXDQ20PB
FXDQ25PB
FXDQ32PB
FXDQ40NB
FXDQ50NB
FXDQ63NB
with Drain Pump (VE)
without Drain Pump (VET)
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
FXSQ20M
FXSQ25M
FXSQ32M
FXSQ40M
FXSQ50M
FXSQ63M
FXSQ80M
FXSQ100M
FXSQ125M
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
(Middle and high static pressure)
FXMQ20P
FXMQ25P
FXMQ32P
FXMQ40P
FXMQ50P
FXMQ63P
FXMQ80P
FXMQ100P
FXMQ125P
Ceiling Suspended Type
FXHQ32MA
FXHQ63MA
FXHQ100MA
Wall Mounted Type
FXAQ20MA
FXAQ25MA
FXAQ32MA
FXAQ40MA
FXAQ50MA
FXAQ63MA
Floor Standing Type
FXLQ20MA
FXLQ25MA
FXLQ32MA
FXLQ40MA
FXLQ50MA
FXLQ63MA
Concealed Floor Standing Type
FXNQ20MA
FXNQ25MA
FXNQ32MA
FXNQ40MA
FXNQ50MA
FXNQ63MA
Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type
50Hz
FXUQ71MA + BEVQ71MA
FXUQ100MA + BEVQ100MA
FXUQ125MA + BEVQ125MA
Connection Unit
BS Units
50Hz
BSVQ100PV1
BSVQ160PV1
BSVQ250PV1
60Hz
BSVQ36PVJU
BSVQ60PVJU
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FXMQ200MA
FXMQ250MA
General Information
11
External Appearance
3.2
Si30-813
Outside Units
RWEYQ8, 10P
8, 10 HP
RWEYQ16, 18, 20P
16, 18, 20 HP
RWEYQ24, 26, 28, 30P
24, 26, 28, 30 HP
12
General Information
Si30-813
Combination of Outside Units
4. Combination of Outside Units
50Hz
System
Capacity
Number of
units
8 HP
10 HP
16 HP
18 HP
20 HP
24 HP
26 HP
28 HP
30 HP
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Module
8
●
10
●●
●
●●●
●●
●
Outside Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit (Option)
●
–
●
●●
Heat Pump: BHFP22MA56
Heat Recovery: BHFP26MA56
●
●●
●●●
Heat Pump: BHFP22MA84
Heat Recovery: BHFP26MA84
60Hz
System
Capacity
Number of
units
Module
10
Outside Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit (Option)
10 HP
1
●
–
20 HP
2
●●
30 HP
3
●●●
Heat Pump: BHFP22MA56
Heat Recovery: BHFP26MA56
Heat Pump: BHFP22MA84
Heat Recovery: BHFP26MA84
★Note : For multiple connection of 16~30 HP system, an optional Daikin Outside Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit is
required.
General Information
13
Capacity Range
Si30-813
5. Capacity Range
Outside Units
50Hz
Capacity Range
8 HP
10 HP
16 HP
18 HP
20 HP
24 HP
26 HP
28 HP
30 HP
RWEYQ
8P
10P
16P
18P
20P
24P
26P
28P
30P
Max. Number of Connectable Indoor Units.
13
16
26
29
32
36
36
36
36
Total Capacity Index of Indoor Units to be
Connected
100
~
260
125
~
325
200
~
520
225
~
585
250
~
650
300
~
780
325
~
845
350
~
910
375
~
975
60Hz
Capacity Range
10 HP
20 HP
30 HP
RWEYQ
10P
20P
30P
Max. Number of Connectable Indoor Units.
16
32
36
Total Capacity Index of Indoor Units to be
Connected
125
~
325
250
~
650
375
~
975
Indoor Units
Capacity Range
0.8 HP
1 HP
2 HP
2.5 HP
3 HP
3.2 HP
4 HP
5 HP
8 HP
10 HP
Capacity Index
20
25
1.25 HP 1.6 HP
31.25
40
50
62.5
71
80
100
125
200
250
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type
(Round Flow)
FXFQ
—
25P
32P
40P
50P
63P
—
80P
100P
125P
—
—
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type
(Double Flow)
FXCQ
20M
25M
32M
40M
50M
63M
—
80M
—
125M
—
—
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Corner
Type
FXKQ
—
25MA
32MA
40MA
—
63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQPBVE
20PB
25PB
32PB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQPBVET
20PB
25PB
32PB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQNBVE
—
—
—
40NB
50NB
63NB
—
—
—
—
—
—
FXDQNBVET
—
—
—
40NB
50NB
63NB
—
—
—
—
—
—
Slim Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type
Ceiling Mounted
Built-In Type
FXSQ
20M
25M
32M
40M
50M
63M
—
80M
100M
125M
—
—
Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type
(Middle and high
static pressure)
FXMQ
20P
25P
32P
40P
50P
63P
—
80P
100P
125P
—
—
Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type
FXMQ
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
200MA
250MA
Ceiling Suspended
Type
FXHQ
—
—
32MA
—
—
63MA
—
—
100MA
—
—
—
Wall Mounted Type
FXAQ
20MA
25MA
32MA
40MA
50MA
63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Floor Standing Type
FXLQ
20MA
25MA
32MA
40MA
50MA
63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Concealed Floor
Standing Type
FXNQ
20MA
25MA
32MA
40MA
50MA
63MA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ceiling Suspended
Cassette Type
FXUQ
—
—
—
—
—
—
71MA
—
100MA
125MA
—
—
Note : FXDQ has following 2 series, as show below.
FXDQ-PBVET, NBVET: without Drain Pump (For General, Asia: except for EU, China and Australia)
FXDQ-PBVE, NBVE: with Drain Pump
14
General Information
Si30-813
Part 2
Specifications
1. Specifications ........................................................................................16
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Specifications
50Hz .......................................................................................................16
60Hz .......................................................................................................19
BS Units .................................................................................................20
Indoor Units ............................................................................................21
15
Specifications
Si30-813
1. Specifications
1.1
50Hz
Model Name (Combination Unit)
RWEYQ8PY1
RWEYQ10PY1
RWEYQ16PY1
kcal / h
—
19,500
—
23,200
RWEYQ8PY1+RWEYQ8PY1
39,000
Btu / h
77,500
92,100
155,000
kW
22.7
27.0
45.4
kW
22.4
26.7
44.8
kcal / h
21,500
27,100
43,000
Btu / h
85,300
107,000
171,000
Y1
Model Name (Independent Unit)
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
★3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Heat
Exchanger
Comp.
Refrigerant
Connecting
Pipes
Water
Connecting
Pipes
kW
25.0
31.5
50.0
mm
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
1,000×780×550
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
1,000×780×550
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×2
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Type
Type
Piston Displacement
m³/h
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
14.61
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
14.61
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
(14.61)×2
Number of Revolutions
r.p.m
6,900
6,900
(6,900)×2
Motor Output×Number
of Units
kW
4.0
4.2
(4.0)×2
Starting Method
Liquid Pipe
Soft start
Soft start
Soft start
mm
φ9.5 (Flare)
φ9.5 (Flare)
φ12.7 (Flare)
mm
mm
φ19.1 (Brazing)
φ22.2 (Brazing)
φ28.6 (Brazing)
★5 φ15.9, ★6 φ19.1 (Brazing)
★5 φ19.1, ★6 φ22.2 (Brazing)
★5 φ22.2, ★6 φ28.6 (Brazing)
★4 Suction Gas Pipe
HP/LP gas pipe
Water inlet
Water outlet
PT1 1/4B internal thread
PT1 1/4B internal thread
Drain outlet
Machine Weight
kg
149
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
Safety Devices
PS 1/2B internal thread
150
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
149+149
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
Capacity Control
Refrigerant Name
%
23~100
R-410A
23~100
R-410A
11~100
R-410A
Refrigerant
kg
3.5
Electronic Expansion Valve
4.2
Electronic Expansion Valve
3.5+3.5
Electronic Expansion Valve
Charge
Control
Refrigerator Oil
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard Accessories
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062175
C : 4D062176
C : 4D062177
Drawing No.
Notes:
1. ★1 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / inlet water temp.: 20°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level difference: 0m.
★4 In the case of heat pump system, suction gas pipe is not used.
★5 In the case of heat recovery system.
★6 In the case of heat pump system.
2. This unit cannot be installed in the outdoors.
Install indoors (Machine room, etc).
3. Hold ambient temperature at 0~40°C and humidity at 80%RH or less
Heat rejection from the casing
: RWEYQ8PY1 / 0.64kW
: RWEYQ10PY1 / 0.71kW
16
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Model Name (Combination Unit)
RWEYQ18PY1
RWEYQ20PY1
RWEYQ24PY1
kcal / h
RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ8PY1
42,700
RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ10PY1
46,400
RWEYQ8PY1+RWEYQ8PY1+RWEYQ8PY1
58,600
Btu / h
170,000
184,000
232,000
kW
49.7
54.0
68.1
kW
49.1
53.4
67.2
Y1
Model Name (Independent Unit)
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
★3 Heating Capacity
kcal / h
48,600
54,200
64,500
Btu / h
193,000
215,000
256,000
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Heat
Exchanger
Comp.
Refrigerant
Connecting
Pipes
Water
Connecting
Pipes
kW
56.5
63.0
75.0
mm
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×2
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×2
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×3
Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Type
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Piston Displacement
m³/h
(14.61)×2
(14.61)×2
(14.61)×3
Number of Revolutions
r.p.m
(6,900)×2
(6,900)×2
(6,900)×3
Motor Output×Number
of Units
Starting Method
kW
Liquid Pipe
mm
φ15.9 (Flare)
φ15.9 (Flare)
φ15.9 (Flare)
★4 Suction Gas Pipe
mm
φ28.6 (Brazing)
φ28.6 (Brazing)
φ34.9 (Brazing) ★7
HP/LP gas pipe
mm
★5 φ22.2, ★6 φ28.6 (Brazing)
★5 φ22.2, ★6 φ28.6 (Brazing)
★5 φ28.6, ★6 φ34.9 (Brazing)
(4.2)×2
(4.0)×3
Soft start
Soft start
Water inlet
PT1 1/4B internal thread
Water outlet
PT1 1/4B internal thread
Drain outlet
Machine Weight
kg
Safety Devices
Capacity Control
Refrigerant
4.2+4.0
Soft start
%
Refrigerant Name
Charge
Control
kg
150+149
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
11~100
R-410A
4.2+3.5
PS 1/2B internal thread
150+150
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
11~100
149+149+149
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
8~100
R-410A
4.2+4.2
R-410A
3.5+3.5+3.5
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Refrigerator Oil
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard Accessories
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062178
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062179
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062180
Drawing No.
Notes:
1. ★1 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / inlet water temp.: 20°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level difference: 0m.
★4 In the case of heat pump system, suction gas pipe is not used.
★5 In the case of heat recovery system.
★6 In the case of heat pump system.
★7 Basically φ31.8, but use φ34.9 for availability of oversea market.
2. This unit cannot be installed in the outdoors.
Install indoors (Machine room, etc).
3. Hold ambient temperature at 0~40°C and humidity at 80%RH or less
Heat rejection from the casing
: RWEYQ8PY1 / 0.64kW
: RWEYQ10PY1 / 0.71kW
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
17
Specifications
Si30-813
Model Name (Combination Unit)
Y1
RWEYQ26PY1
RWEYQ28PY1
RWEYQ30PY1
Model Name (Independent Unit)
RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ8PY1+RWEYQ8PY1 RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ8PY1
kcal / h
62,300
66,000
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
Btu / h
247,000
262,000
kW
72.4
76.7
81.0
kW
71.5
75.8
80.1
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
★3 Heating Capacity
Comp.
Refrigerant
Connecting
Pipes
Water
Connecting
Pipes
70,100
75,700
81,300
Btu / h
278,000
300,000
322,000
kW
81.5
88.0
94.5
mm
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×3
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×3
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
(1,000×780×550)×3
Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Type
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Piston Displacement
m³/h
(14.61)×3
(14.61)×3
(14.61)×3
Number of Revolutions
r.p.m
(6,900)×3
(6,900)×3
(6,900)×3
Motor Output×Number
of Units
Starting Method
kW
4.2+4.0+4.0
4.2+4.2+4.0
(4.2)×3
Soft start
Soft start
Soft start
Liquid Pipe
mm
φ19.1 (Flare)
φ19.1 (Flare)
φ19.1 (Flare)
★4 Suction Gas Pipe
mm
φ34.9 (Brazing) ★7
φ34.9 (Brazing) ★7
φ34.9 (Brazing) ★7
HP/LP gas pipe
mm
★5 φ28.6, ★6 φ34.9 (Brazing)
★5 φ28.6, ★6 φ34.9 (Brazing)
★5 φ28.6, ★6 φ34.9 (Brazing)
Water inlet
PT1 1/4B internal thread
Water outlet
PT1 1/4B internal thread
Drain outlet
Machine Weight
kg
Safety Devices
Capacity Control
Refrigerant
276,000
kcal / h
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Heat
Exchanger
RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ10PY1+RWEYQ10PY1
69,700
%
Refrigerant Name
Charge
Control
kg
150+149+149
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
8~100
R-410A
4.2+3.5+3.5
PS 1/2B internal thread
150+150+149
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
8~100
150+150+150
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
8~100
R-410A
4.2+4.2+3.5
R-410A
4.2+4.2+4.2
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Refrigerator Oil
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard Accessories
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062181
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062182
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual
C : 4D062183
Drawing No.
Notes:
1. ★1 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / inlet water temp.: 20°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level difference: 0m.
★4 In the case of heat pump system, suction gas pipe is not used.
★5 In the case of heat recovery system.
★6 In the case of heat pump system.
★7 Basically φ31.8, but use φ34.9 for availability of oversea market.
2. This unit cannot be installed in the outdoors.
Install indoors (Machine room, etc).
3. Hold ambient temperature at 0~40°C and humidity at 80%RH or less
Heat rejection from the casing
: RWEYQ8PY1 / 0.64kW
: RWEYQ10PY1 / 0.71kW
18
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
1.2
Specifications
60Hz
Model Name (Combination Unit)
Model Name (Independent Unit)
YL
RWEYQ10PYL
—
RWEYQ20PYL
RWEYQ10PYL+RWEYQ10PYL
RWEYQ30PYL
RWEYQ10PYL+RWEYQ10PYL+RWEYQ10PYL
Model Name (Combination Unit)
Model Name (Independent Unit)
TL
RWEYQ10PTL
—
RWEYQ20PTL
RWEYQ10PTL+RWEYQ10PTL
RWEYQ30PTL
RWEYQ10PTL+RWEYQ10PTL+RWEYQ10PTL
kcal / h
23,200
46,400
69,700
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
Btu / h
92,100
184,000
276,000
kW
27.0
54.0
81.0
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
kW
26.7
53.4
80.1
★3 Heating Capacity
kcal / h
27,100
54,200
81,300
Btu / h
107,000
215,000
322,000
kW
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Heat
Type
Exchanger
mm
Refrigerant
Connecting
Pipes
Water
Connecting
Pipes
63.0
94.5
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
1,000×780×550
(1,000×780×550)×2
(1,000×780×550)×3
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
Stainless Steel Plate Type
m³/h
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
14.61
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
(14.61)×2
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
(14.61)×3
Number of Revolutions
Motor Output×Number
of Units
Starting Method
r.p.m
6,900
(6,900)×2
(6,900)×3
kW
4.2
(4.2)×2
(4.2)×3
Soft start
Soft start
Soft start
Liquid Pipe
mm
φ9.5 (Flare)
φ15.9 (Flare)
φ19.1 (Flare)
Type
Piston Displacement
Comp.
31.5
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
★4 Suction Gas Pipe
mm
φ22.2 (Brazing)
φ28.6 (Brazing)
φ34.9 (Brazing) ★7
HP/LP gas pipe
Water inlet
mm
★5 φ19.1, ★6 φ22.2 (Brazing)
★5 φ22.2, ★6 φ28.6 (Brazing)
★5 φ28.6, ★6 φ34.9 (Brazing)
PT1 1/4B internal thread
Water outlet
Drain outlet
PT1 1/4B internal thread
PS 1/2B internal thread
Machine Weight
kg
Safety Devices
Capacity Control
Refrigerant Name
%
Refrigerant
kg
Charge
Control
Refrigerator Oil
150
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
23~100
R-410A
150+150
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
11~100
R-410A
Drawing No.
8~100
R-410A
4.2
4.2+4.2
4.2+4.2+4.2
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Refer to the nameplate of compressor Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual, Strainer
Manual, Operation Manual, Strainer
C : 4D062118, 4D062121
C : 4D062119, 4D062122
Standard Accessories
150+150+150
High Pressure Switch, Inverter
Overload Protector, Fusible Plugs
Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Connection Pipes, Clamps, Installation
Manual, Operation Manual, Strainer
C : 4D062120, 4D062123
Notes:
1. ★1 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / inlet water temp.: 30°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
★3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / inlet water temp.: 20°C / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level difference: 0m.
★4 In the case of heat pump system, suction gas pipe is not used.
★5 In the case of heat recovery system.
★6 In the case of heat pump system.
★7 Basically φ31.8, but use φ34.9 for availability of oversea market.
2. This unit cannot be installed in the outdoors.
Install indoors (Machine room, etc).
3. Hold ambient temperature at 0~40°C and humidity at 80%RH or less
Heat rejection from the casing
: RWEYQ10PTL, PYL / 0.71kW
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
19
Specifications
1.3
Si30-813
BS Units
Model
Power Supply
Total Capacity Index of Indoor Unit
No. of Connectable Indoor Units
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
mm
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation
Material
Liquid Pipes
Indoor
Unit
Gas Pipes
Piping
Liquid Pipes
Connection
Outdoor Suction Gas Pipes
Unit
HP/LP Gas Pipes
Weight
kg
BSVQ100PV1
BSVQ160PV1
BSVQ250PV1
1 Phase 50Hz 200-240V
1 Phase 50Hz 200-240V
1 Phase 50Hz 200-240V
20 to 100
More than 100 but 160 or less
More than 160 but 250 or less
Max. 5
Max. 8
Max. 8
Galvanized steel plate
Galvanized steel plate
Galvanized steel plate
207×388×326
207×388×326
Foamed polyurethane, Flame resistant
needle felt
9.5mm C1220T (brazing connection)
15.9mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★1
9.5mm C1220T (brazing connection)
15.9mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★2
9.5mm C1220T (brazing connection)
22.2mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★3
9.5mm C1220T (brazing connection)
15.9mm C1220T (brazing connection)
12.7mm C1220T (brazing connection)
15.9mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★2
12.7mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★2
22.2mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★3
19.1mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★3
14
14
Installation manual, Attached pipe
Insulation pipe cover, Clamps
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
15
Installation manual, Attached pipe
Insulation pipe cover, Clamps
C: 4D057926
Notes:
207×388×326
Foamed polyurethane, Flame resistant
Foamed polyurethane, Flame resistant
needle felt
needle felt
9.5mm C1220T (brazing connection)
9.5mm C1220T (brazing connection) ★1
Installation manual, Attached pipe
Insulation pipe cover, Clamps
C: 4D057927
C: 4D057928
★1 When connecting with a 20 to 50 class indoor unit, connect to the attached pipe to the field pipe.
(Braze the connection between the attached and field pipe.)
★2 When connecting with an indoor unit of 150 or more and 160 or less, connect to the attached pipe to the field pipe.
(Braze the connection between the attached and field pipe.)
★3 When connecting with a 200 class, or more than 160 and less than 200 class indoor unit, connect to the attached pipe to the field pipe.
(Braze the connection between the attached and field pipe.)
Model
Power Supply
Total Capacity Index of Connectable Indoor
Unit
No. of Connectable Indoor Units
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
in
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation
Material
Liquid Pipes
Indoor
Unit
Gas Pipes
Piping
Connection
Liquid Pipes
Outdoor Suction Gas Pipes
Unit
Discharge Gas
Pipes
Mass
Lbs
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
BSVQ36PVJU
BSVQ60PVJU
1 Phase 60Hz 208~230V
1 Phase 60Hz 208~230V
Less than 36
Less than 60
Max. 5
Galvanized Steel Plate
Max. 8
Galvanized Steel Plate
8-1/8 × 15-1/4 × 12-13/16
8-1/8 × 15-1/4 × 12-13/16
Foamed Polyurethane, Frame Resisting Needle Felt
Foamed Polyurethane, Frame Resisting Needle Felt
φ 3/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection) ★1
φ 3/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection)
φ 5/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection) ★1
φ 5/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection) ★2
φ 3/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection)
φ 3/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection)
φ 5/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection)
φ 5/8 C1220T (Brazing Connection) ★2
φ 1/2 C1220T (Brazing Connection)
φ 1/2 C1220T (Brazing Connection) ★2
26
Installation Manual, Attached Pipe, Insulation Pipe Cover,
Clamps
26
Installation Manual, Attached Pipe, Insulation Pipe Cover,
Clamps
4D058233A
Notes:
4D058234A
★1 In case of connecting with a 07~18 type indoor unit, match to the size of field pipe using the attached pipe.
(Connection between the attached pipe and the field pipe must be brazed.)
★2 In case of connecting with indoor unit capacity index 54 or more and 60 or less, match to the size of the field pipe using the attached
pipe.
(Connection between the attached pipe and the field pipe must be brazed.)
20
Specifications
Si30-813
1.4
Specifications
Indoor Units
Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow) Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXFQ25PVE
FXFQ32PVE
FXFQ40PVE
kcal/h
2,500
3,200
4,000
5,000
Btu/h
9,900
12,600
16,000
19,800
kW
2.9
3.7
4.7
5.8
kW
2.8
3.6
4.5
5.6
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
kcal/h
2,800
3,400
4,300
5,400
Btu/h
10,900
13,600
17,100
21,500
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
kW
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.3
Galvanized Steel Plate
246×840×840
Galvanized Steel Plate
246×840×840
Galvanized Steel Plate
246×840×840
2×6×1.2
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
246×840×840
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×6×1.2
2×6×1.2
2×6×1.2
Face Area
m²
0.267
0.267
0.267
0.267
QTS48C15M
QTS48C15M
QTS48C15M
QTS48C15M
Turbo Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Turbo Fan
Turbo Fan
Turbo Fan
W
56×1
56×1
56×1
56×1
m³/min
13/11.5/10
13/11.5/10
15/13/11
16/13.5/11
cfm
459/406/353
Direct Drive
459/406/353
Direct Drive
530/459/388
Direct Drive
565/477/388
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Polyurethane Form
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Polyurethane Form
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Polyurethane Form
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Polyurethane Form
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Piping
Connections
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
VP25
VP25
VP25
VP25
Drain Pipe
mm
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Mass (Weight)
∗5 Sound Level (HH/H/L) (220-240V)
kg
19.5
19.5
19.5
19.5
dBA
30/28.5/27
30/28.5/27
31/29/27
32/29.5/27
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh White
Fresh White
Fresh White
Fresh White
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Model
Panel Color
Decoration
Panels
(Option)
FXFQ50PVE
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
mm
Air Filter
Weight
kg
5.5
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for
Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting.
Installation Guide.
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
5.5
5.5
Operation Manual.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for
Paper Pattern for
Installation.
Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for
Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting.
for Fitting.
Installation Guide.
Installation Guide.
C : 3D060255
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit centre. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
5.5
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for
Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting.
Installation Guide.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
21
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow) Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXFQ63PVE
FXFQ80PVE
FXFQ100PVE
FXFQ125PVE
kcal/h
6,300
8,000
10,000
12,500
Btu/h
24,900
31,700
39,600
49,500
kW
7.3
9.3
11.6
14.5
kW
7.1
9.0
11.2
14.0
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
kcal/h
6,900
8,600
10,800
13,800
Btu/h
27,300
34,100
42,700
54,600
kW
8.0
10.0
12.5
16.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
246×840×840
Galvanized Steel Plate
288×840×840
Galvanized Steel Plate
288×840×840
2×12×1.2
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
246×840×840
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×10×1.2
2×10×1.2
2×12×1.2
Face Area
m²
0.446
0.446
0.535
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo Fan
QTS48C15M
Turbo Fan
QTS48C15M
Turbo Fan
QTS48C15M
Turbo Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
W
56×1
56×1
120×1
120×1
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
m³/min
cfm
19/16.5/13.5
671/583/477
21/18/15
742/636/530
32/26/20
1,130/918/706
33/28/22.5
1,165/989/794
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Piping
Connections
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Polyurethane Form
Polyurethane Form
Polyurethane Form
Polyurethane Form
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
22
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
22
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
25
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Drain Pipe
mm
Mass (Weight)
kg
∗5 Sound Level (HH/H/L) (220-240V)
dBA
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Model
Panel Color
Decoration
Panels
(Option)
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
mm
Air Filter
Weight
kg
(
)
Drawing No.
)
(
VP25
)
36/33.5/31
Fuse
43/37.5/32
Fuse
44/39/34
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A VRV P(A) Series
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh White
Fresh White
Fresh White
Fresh White
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
5.5
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
5.5
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
5.5
50×950×950
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
5.5
Operation Manual.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for
Paper Pattern for
Installation.
Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for
Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting.
for Fitting.
Installation Guide.
Installation Guide.
C : 3D060255
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit centre. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
22
25
34/31/28
Fuse
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for
Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting.
Installation Guide.
Standard Accessories
(
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for
Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting.
Installation Guide.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double-Flow)
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXCQ20MVE
FXCQ25MVE
FXCQ32MVE
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
4,000
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
16,000
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
4.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
4.5
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
4,300
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
17,100
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
5.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×775×600
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×775×600
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×990×600
2×10×1.5
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×775×600
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×10×1.5
2×10×1.5
2×10×1.5
Face Area
m²
2×0.100
2×0.100
2×0.100
2×0.145
D17K2AA1
Sirocco Fan
D17K2AB1
Sirocco Fan
D17K2AB1
Sirocco Fan
2D17K1AA1
Sirocco Fan
W
10×1
15×1
15×1
20×1
m³/min
cfm
7/5
247/177
9/6.5
318/230
9/6.5
318/230
12/9
424/318
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Piping
Connections
FXCQ40MVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
VP25
VP25
VP25
VP25
Drain Pipe
mm
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
26
26
26
31
dBA
Safety Devices
32/27
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
34/28
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
34/28
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
34/29
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Decoration
Panels
(Option)
Model
BYBC32G-W1
BYBC32G-W1
BYBC32G-W1
BYBC50G-W1
Panel Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
mm
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,030×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,030×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,030×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,245×680
kg
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8.5
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Air Filter
Weight
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
C : 3D039413
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
23
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double-Flow)
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXCQ50MVE
FXCQ63MVE
FXCQ80MVE
FXCQ125MVE
kcal/h
5,000
6,300
8,000
12,500
Btu/h
19,800
24,900
31,700
49,500
kW
5.8
7.3
9.3
14.5
kW
5.6
7.1
9.0
14.0
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
kcal/h
5,400
6,900
8,600
13,800
Btu/h
21,500
27,300
34,100
54,600
kW
6.3
8.0
10.0
16.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×1,175×600
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×1,665×600
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×1,665×600
2×10×1.5
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
305×990×600
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×10×1.5
2×10×1.5
2×10×1.5
Face Area
m²
2×0.145
2×0.184
2×0.287
2×0.287
2D17K1AA1
Sirocco Fan
2D17K2AA1VE
Sirocco Fan
3D17K2AA1
Sirocco Fan
3D17K2AB1
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
W
20×1
30×1
50×1
85×1
m³/min
cfm
12/9
424/318
16.5/13
582/459
26/21
918/741
33/25
1,165/883
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Piping
Connections
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
VP25
VP25
VP25
VP25
Drain Pipe
mm
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
32
35
47
48
dBA
Safety Devices
34/29
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
37/32
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
39/34
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
44/38
Fuse. Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor.
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Decoration
Panels
(Option)
Model
BYBC50G-W1
BYBC63G-W1
BYBC125G-W1
BYBC125G-W1
Panel Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
mm
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,245×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,430×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,920×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
53×1,920×680
kg
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8.5
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
9.5
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
12
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
12
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation.
Washer for Hanging
Brackets. Clamp Metal.
Drain Hose. Insulation for
Fitting. Washer Fixing
Plates. Sealing Pads.
Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Air Filter
Weight
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
C : 3D039413
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
24
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXKQ25MAVE
FXKQ32MAVE
FXKQ40MAVE
kcal/h
2,500
3,200
4,000
6,300
Btu/h
9,900
12,600
16,000
24,900
kW
2.9
3.7
4.7
7.3
kW
2.8
3.6
4.5
7.1
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
kcal/h
2,800
3,400
4,300
6,900
Btu/h
10,900
13,600
17,100
27,300
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXKQ63MAVE
kW
3.2
4.0
5.0
8.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
215×1,110×710
Galvanized Steel Plate
215×1,110×710
Galvanized Steel Plate
215×1,310×710
3×11×1.75
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
215×1,110×710
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×11×1.75
2×11×1.75
2×11×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.180
0.180
0.180
0.226
3D12H1AN1V1
Sirocco Fan
3D12H1AN1V1
Sirocco Fan
3D12H1AP1V1
Sirocco Fan
4D12H1AJ1V1
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Fan
W
15×1
15×1
20×1
45×1
50
Hz
m³/min
11/9
11/9
13/10
18/15
cfm
388/318
388/318
459/353
635/530
60
Hz
m³/min
cfm
11/8.5
388/300
11/8.5
388/300
13/10
459/353
18/13
635/459
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Liquid Pipes
mm
Gas Pipes
Piping
Connections
Drain Pipe
mm
mm
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
dBA
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Polyethylene Foam
Polyethylene Foam
Polyethylene Foam
Polyethylene Foam
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
31
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
31
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
31
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
(
)
(
)
(
VP25
)
34
Safety Devices
38/33
38/33
40/34
42/37
Fuse.
Fuse.
Fuse.
Fuse.
Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor. Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor. Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor. Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor.
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Units
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Model
Decoration
Panels
(Option)
Panel Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
BYK45FJW1
BYK45FJW1
BYK45FJW1
BYK71FJW1
mm
White (10Y9/0.5)
70×1,240×800
White (10Y9/0.5)
70×1,240×800
White (10Y9/0.5)
70×1,440×800
kg
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8.5
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8.5
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
8.5
Resin Net
(with Mold Resistant)
9.5
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Screws.
Washers. Positioning Jig for
Installation. Insulation for
Hanger Bracket. Air Outlet
Blocking Pad.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Screws.
Washers. Positioning Jig for
Installation. Insulation for
Hanger Bracket. Air Outlet
Blocking Pad.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Screws.
Washers. Positioning Jig for
Installation. Insulation for
Hanger Bracket. Air Outlet
Blocking Pad.
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Screws.
Washers. Positioning Jig for
Installation. Insulation for
Hanger Bracket. Air Outlet
Blocking Pad.
C : 3D038813A
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1 m in front of the unit and 1m downward.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
White (10Y9/0.5)
70×1,240×800
Air Filter
Weight
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
25
Specifications
Si30-813
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (VE: with Drain Pump, VET without Drain Pump)
Model
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
★3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXDQ20PBVE (T)
FXDQ25PBVE (T)
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
200×700×620
Galvanized Steel Plate
200×700×620
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
200×700×620
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×12×1.5
2×12×1.5
3×12×1.5
Face Area
m²
0.126
0.126
0.126
—
Sirocco Fan
—
Sirocco Fan
—
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
W
62×1
62×1
62×1
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
m³/min
8.0/7.2/6.4
8.0/7.2/6.4
8.0/7.2/6.4
★5 External Static Pressure
Pa
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXDQ32PBVE (T)
30-10
30-10
30-10
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Foamed Polyethylene
Foamed Polyethylene
Foamed Polyethylene
Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
23
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
23
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
23
33/31/29
33/31/29
33/31/29
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
★6 Sound Pressure Level (HH/H/L)
dBA
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Standard Accessories
Operation Manual,
Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate ★7)
Drawing No.
Operation Manual,
Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate ★7)
3D060921A
Operation Manual,
Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate ★7)
Notes:
★1 Indoor temp.: 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
★2
★3
4
★5
★6
★7
26
difference: 0m.
Indoor temp.: 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
Indoor temp.: 20°CDB / outdoor temp.: 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level difference:
0m.
Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
External static pressure is changeable to set by the remote controller. This pressure means “High static
pressure - Standard static pressure”. (Factory setting is 10 Pa.)
The operation sound levels are the conversion values in anechoic chamber. In practice, the sound tend to
be larger than the specified values due to ambient noise or reflections.
When the place of suction is changed to the bottom suction, the sound level will increase by approx.
5dBA.
FXDQ20 / 25 / 32PBVE only.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (VE: with Drain Pump, VET without Drain Pump)
Model
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
★3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXDQ40NBVE(T)
FXDQ50NBVE(T)
kcal/h
4,000
5,000
6,300
Btu/h
16,000
19,800
24,900
kW
4.7
5.8
7.3
kW
4.5
5.6
7.1
kcal/h
4,300
5,400
6,900
Btu/h
17,100
21,500
27,300
kW
5.0
6.3
8.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
200×900×620
Galvanized Steel Plate
200×1100×620
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
200×900×620
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×12×1.5
3×12×1.5
3×12×1.5
Face Area
m²
0.176
0.176
0.227
—
Sirocco Fan
—
Sirocco Fan
—
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
W
62×1
130×1
130×1
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
m³/min
10.5/9.5/8.5
12.5/11.0/10.0
16.5/14.5/13.0
★5 External Static Pressure
Pa
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXDQ63NBVE(T)
44-15
44-15
44-15
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
Foamed Polyethylene
Foamed Polyethylene
Foamed Polyethylene
Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
27
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
28
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
31
34/32/30
35/33/31
36/34/32
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
★6 Sound Pressure Level (HH/H/L)
dBA
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve
Standard Accessories
Operation Manual,
Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate ★7)
Drawing No.
Operation Manual,
Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate ★7)
3D060921A
Operation Manual,
Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate ★7)
Notes:
★1 Indoor temp.: 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
★2
★3
4
★5
★6
★7
Specifications
difference: 0m.
Indoor temp.: 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
Indoor temp.: 20°CDB / outdoor temp.: 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level difference:
0m.
Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
External static pressure is changeable to set by the remote controller. This pressure means “High static
pressure - Standard static pressure”. (Factory setting is 15 Pa.)
The operation sound levels are the conversion values in anechoic chamber. In practice, the sound tend to
be larger than the specified values due to ambient noise or reflections.
When the place of suction is changed to the bottom suction, the sound level will increase by approx.
5dBA.
FXDQ40 / 50 / 63NBVE only.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
27
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXSQ20MVE
FXSQ25MVE
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×550×800
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×550×800
3×14×1.75
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×550×800
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.75
3×14×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.088
0.088
0.088
D18H3A
Sirocco Fan
D18H3A
Sirocco Fan
D18H3A
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Fan
FXSQ32MVE
W
50×1
50×1
50×1
50
Hz
m³/min
9/6.5
9/6.5
9.5/7
cfm
318/230
318/230
335/247
60
Hz
m³/min
cfm
9/6.5
318/230
9/6.5
318/230
9.5/6.5
335/230
50
Hz
60
Hz
Pa
88-39-20
88-39-20
64-39-15
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
∗4 External Static
Pressure
Pa
73-24-10
73-24-10
86-42-10
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Air Filter
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Drive
Temperature Control
Liquid Pipes
Piping
Gas Pipes
Connections
Drain Pipe
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗6 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
mm
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
kg
30
30
30
dBA
37/32
37/32
38/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Decoration
Panel
(Option)
Model
BYBS32DJW1
BYBS32DJW1
BYBS32DJW1
Panel Color
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
55×650×500
3
55×650×500
3
55×650×500
3
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Weight
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
mm
kg
C : 3D039431
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable to change over the connectors inside electrical box, this pressure
means “High static pressure-Standard -Low static pressure”.
5 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an additional for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗6 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. These
values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
28
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXSQ40MVE
FXSQ50MVE
kcal/h
4,000
5,000
6,300
Btu/h
16,000
19,800
24,900
kW
4.7
5.8
7.3
kW
4.5
5.6
7.1
kcal/h
4,300
5,400
6,900
Btu/h
17,100
21,500
27,300
kW
5.0
6.3
8.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×700×800
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,000×800
3×14×1.75
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×700×800
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.75
3×14×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.132
0.132
0.221
D18H2A
Sirocco Fan
D18H2A
Sirocco Fan
2D18H2A
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Motor Output × Number of
Units
Fan
W
65×1
85×1
125×1
50
Hz
m³/min
11.5/9
15/11
21/15.5
cfm
406/318
530/388
741/547
60
Hz
m³/min
cfm
11.5/9
406/318
15/11
530/388
21/14
741/494
50
Hz
Pa
88-49-20
88-59-29
88-49-20
60
Hz
Pa
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
∗4
External Static
Pressure
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Liquid Pipes
Piping
Gas Pipes
Connections
Drain Pipe
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗6 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
88-29-10
88-41-10
122-66-10
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
mm
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
kg
30
31
41
dBA
38/32
41/36
42/35
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Decoration
Panel
(Option)
FXSQ63MVE
Model
BYBS45DJW1
BYBS45DJW1
BYBS71DJW1
Panel Color
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
55×800×500
3.5
55×800×500
3.5
55×1,100×500
4.5
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Weight
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
mm
kg
C : 3D039431
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable to change over the connectors inside electrical box, this pressure
means “High static pressure-Standard -Low static pressure”.
5 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an additional for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗6 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. These
values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
29
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXSQ80MVE
FXSQ100MVE
FXSQ125MVE
kcal/h
8,000
10,000
12,500
Btu/h
31,700
39,600
49,500
kW
9.3
11.6
14.5
kW
9.0
11.2
14.0
kcal/h
8,600
10,800
13,800
Btu/h
34,100
42,700
54,600
kW
10.0
12.5
16.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,400×800
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,400×800
3×14×1.75
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,400×800
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.75
3×14×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.338
0.338
0.338
3D18H2A
Sirocco Fan
3D18H2A
Sirocco Fan
3D18H2A
Sirocco Fan
225×1
Model
Type
Motor Output × Number of
Units
Fan
W
225×1
225×1
50
Hz
m³/min
27/21.5
28/22
38/28
cfm
953/759
988/777
1,341/988
60
Hz
m³/min
cfm
27/20.5
953/724
28/21
988/741
38/27
1,341/953
50
Hz
60
Hz
Pa
113-82
107-75
78-39
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
∗4 External Static
Pressure
Pa
147-92
136-83
78-20
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Air Filter
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Drive
Temperature Control
Liquid Pipes
Piping
Gas Pipes
Connections
Drain Pipe
Machine Weight (Mass)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
mm
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
mm
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
mm
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
VP25
(External Dia. 32 Internal Dia. 25)
kg
51
51
52
dBA
43/37
43/37
46/41
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Model
BYBS125DJW1
BYBS125DJW1
BYBS125DJW1
Panel Color
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
55×1,500×500
6.5
55×1,500×500
6.5
55×1,500×500
6.5
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washers.
∗6 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Decoration
Panel
(Option)
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Weight
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
mm
kg
C : 3D039431
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable to change over the connectors inside electrical box, this pressure
means “High static pressure-Standard”.
5 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an additional for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗6 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. These
values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
30
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXMQ20PVE
FXMQ25PVE
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×550×700
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×550×700
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×550×700
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×16×1.75
3×16×1.75
3×16×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.098
0.098
0.098
Model
—
—
—
Type
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Fan
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
W
90×1
90×1
90×1
m³/min
9/7.5/6.5
9/7.5/6.5
9.5/8/7
External Static
Pressure
cfm
318/265/230
318/265/230
335/282/247
Pa
Standard 50 (100-30 ∗4)
Standard 50 (100-30 ∗4)
Standard 50 (100-30 ∗4)
Drive
Temperature Control
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXMQ32PVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
∗5
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
∗5
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
∗5
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
VP25
VP25
VP25
Drain Pipe
mm
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Mass (Weight)
∗7 Sound Level (HH/H/L)
dBA
kg
25
25
25
220V
33/31/29
33/31/29
34/32/30
240V
33/31/29
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
33/31/29
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
34/32/30
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation Manual.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Washers. Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation Manual.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Washers. Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
C : 3D060388A
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation Manual.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Washers. Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable in 13 or 14 stages within the ( ) range by remote controller.
∗5 Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its
colorimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
6 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗7 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit centre. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
31
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXMQ40PVE
FXMQ50PVE
FXMQ63PVE
kcal/h
4,000
5,000
6,300
8,000
Btu/h
16,000
19,800
24,900
31,700
kW
4.7
5.8
7.3
9.3
kW
4.5
5.6
7.1
9.0
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
kcal/h
4,300
5,400
6,900
8,600
Btu/h
17,100
21,500
27,300
34,100
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
kW
5.0
6.3
8.0
10.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,000×700
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,000×700
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,000×700
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×700×700
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×16×1.75
3×16×1.75
3×16×1.75
3×16×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.148
0.249
0.249
0.249
Model
—
—
—
—
Type
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Fan
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
W
140×1
350×1
350×1
350×1
m³/min
16/13/11
18/16.5/15
19.5/17.5/16
25/22.5/20
External Static
Pressure
cfm
565/459/388
635/582/530
688/618/565
883/794/706
Pa
Standard 100 (160-30 ∗4)
Standard 100 (200-50 ∗4)
Standard 100 (200-50 ∗4)
Standard 100 (200-50 ∗4)
Drive
Temperature Control
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXMQ80PVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
∗5
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
∗5
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
∗5
Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating
∗5
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
VP25
VP25
VP25
VP25
Drain Pipe
mm
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
Mass (Weight)
∗7 Sound Level (HH/H/L)
dBA
kg
28
36
36
36
220V
39/37/35
41/39/37
42/40/38
43/41/39
240V
39/37/35
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload
Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
41/39/37
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload
Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
42/40/38
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload
Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
43/41/39
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload
Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Washers.
Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Washers.
Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Washers.
Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Drain
Hose. Clamp Metal.
Insulation for Fitting. Sealing
Pads. Clamps. Washers.
Screws. Air Discharge
Flange. Air Suction Flange.
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
C : 3D060388A
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable in 13 or 14 stages within the ( ) range by remote controller.
∗5 Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its
colorimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
6 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗7 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit centre. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
32
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXMQ100PVE
FXMQ125PVE
kcal/h
10,000
12,500
Btu/h
39,600
49,500
kW
11.6
14.5
kW
11.2
14.0
kcal/h
10,800
13,800
Btu/h
42,700
54,600
kW
12.5
16.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,400×700
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
300×1,400×700
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×16×1.75
3×16×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.383
0.383
Model
—
—
Type
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Fan
Air Flow Rate (HH/H/L)
W
350×1
350×1
m³/min
32/27/23
39/33/28
External Static
Pressure
cfm
1,130/953/812
1,377/1,165/988
Pa
Standard 100 (200-50 ∗4)
Standard 100 (200-50 ∗4)
Drive
Temperature Control
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
Liquid Pipes
Gas Pipes
mm
mm
Drain Pipe
mm
Mass (Weight)
∗7 Sound Level (HH/H/L)
dBA
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for Cooling and Heating
∗5
∗5
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
VP25
External Dia. 32
Internal Dia. 25
Dia. 32
( External
Internal Dia. 25 )
(
VP25
)
kg
46
46
220V
43/41/39
44/42/40
240V
43/41/39
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload Protector.
44/42/40
Fuse.
Fan Driver Overload Protector.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation Manual. Drain Hose. Clamp
Metal. Insulation for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Washers. Screws. Air Discharge Flange. Air Suction
Flange.
Operation Manual. Installation Manual. Drain Hose. Clamp
Metal. Insulation for Fitting. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Washers. Screws. Air Discharge Flange. Air Suction
Flange.
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
C : 3D060388A
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable in 13 or 14 stages within the ( ) range by remote controller.
∗5 Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its
colorimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
6 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗7 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit centre. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
33
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXMQ200MAVE
FXMQ250MAVE
kcal/h
19,800
24,800
Btu/h
78,500
98,300
kW
23.0
28.8
kW
22.4
28.0
kcal/h
21,500
27,100
Btu/h
85,300
107,500
kW
25.0
31.5
Galvanized Steel Plate
470×1,380×1,100
3×26×2.0
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
470×1,380×1,100
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×26×2.0
Face Area
m²
0.68
0.68
D13/4G2DA1×2
D13/4G2DA1×2
Model
Type
Sirocco Fan
Sirocco Fan
W
380×2
380×2
m³/min
58/50
72/62
cfm
2,047/1,765
2,542/2,189
Pa
221-132 ∗4
270-147 ∗4
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Fan
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
External Static
Pressure 50Hz
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
Microprocessor Thermostat for Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber
∗5
∗5
mm
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Piping
Connections Gas Pipes
Drain Pipe
mm
φ19.1(Brazing Connection)
φ22.2 (Brazing Connection)
mm
PS1B
PS1B
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
137
137
dBA
48/45
48/45
Safety Devices
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Air Filter
Liquid Pipes
∗7 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Operation Manual. Installation Manual. Sealing Pads.
Operation Manual. Installation Manual. Sealing Pads.
Connection Pipes. Screws. Clamps.
Connection Pipes. Screws. Clamps.
C : 3D038814A
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗4 External static pressure is changeable to change over the connectors inside electrical box, this pressure
means "High static pressure-Standard".
∗5 Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its
colorimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
6 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗7 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. These
values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
34
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Ceiling Suspended Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXHQ32MAVE
FXHQ63MAVE
FXHQ100MAVE
kcal/h
3,200
6,300
10,000
Btu/h
12,600
24,900
39,600
kW
3.7
7.3
11.6
kW
3.6
7.1
11.2
kcal/h
3,400
6,900
10,800
Btu/h
13,600
27,300
42,700
kW
4.0
8.0
12.5
White (10Y9/0.5)
195×1,160×680
White (10Y9/0.5)
195×1,400×680
3×12×1.75
mm
White (10Y9/0.5)
195×960×680
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×12×1.75
3×12×1.75
Face Area
m²
0.182
0.233
0.293
3D12K1AA1
Sirocco Fan
4D12K1AA1
Sirocco Fan
3D12K2AA1
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
W
62×1
62×1
130×1
m³/min
cfm
12/10
424/353
17.5/14
618/494
25/19.5
883/688
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Wool
Glass Wool
Glass Wool
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
kg
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
24
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
28
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
33
dBA
36/31
39/34
45/37
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Clamps. Washers.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Clamps. Washers.
C : 3D038815A
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Paper Pattern for Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Insulation
for Fitting. Clamps. Washers.
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220-240V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1 m in front of the unit and 1 m downward.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
35
Specifications
Si30-813
Wall Mounted Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXAQ20MAVE
FXAQ25MAVE
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
White (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
290×795×230
White (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
290×795×230
2×14×1.4
mm
White (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
290×795×230
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×14×1.4
2×14×1.4
Face Area
m²
0.161
0.161
0.161
QCL9661M
Cross Flow Fan
QCL9661M
Cross Flow Fan
QCL9661M
Cross Flow Fan
W
40×1
40×1
40×1
m³/min
cfm
7.5/4.5
265/159
8/5
282/177
9/5.5
318/194
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXAQ32MAVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene
Resin Net (Washable)
Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene
Resin Net (Washable)
Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene
Resin Net (Washable)
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
VP13
(External Dia. 18 Internal Dia. 13)
VP13
(External Dia. 18 Internal Dia. 13)
VP13
(External Dia. 18 Internal Dia. 13)
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220-240V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
kg
11
11
11
dBA
35/29
36/29
37/29
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Installation Panel. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Insulation
Tape. Clamps. Screws.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Installation Panel. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Insulation
Tape. Clamps. Screws.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Installation Panel. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Insulation
Tape. Clamps. Screws.
C : 3D039370B
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length :7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1 m in front of the unit and 1 m downward.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
36
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Wall Mounted Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXAQ40MAVE
FXAQ50MAVE
kcal/h
4,000
5,000
6,300
Btu/h
16,000
19,800
24,900
kW
4.7
5.8
7.3
kW
4.5
5.6
7.1
kcal/h
4,300
5,400
6,900
Btu/h
17,000
21,500
27,300
kW
5.0
6.3
8.0
White (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
290×1,050×230
White (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
290×1,050×230
2×14×1.4
mm
White (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
290×1,050×230
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
2×14×1.4
2×14×1.4
Face Area
m²
0.213
0.213
0.213
QCL9686M
Cross Flow Fan
QCL9686M
Cross Flow Fan
QCL9686M
Cross Flow Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
W
43×1
43×1
43×1
m³/min
cfm
12/9
424/318
15/12
530/424
19/14
671/494
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXAQ63MAVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene
Resin Net (Washable)
Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene
Resin Net (Washable)
Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene
Resin Net (Washable)
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
VP13
(External Dia. 18 Internal Dia. 13)
VP13
(External Dia. 18 Internal Dia. 13)
VP13
(External Dia. 18 Internal Dia. 13)
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220-240V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
kg
14
14
14
dBA
39/34
42/36
46/39
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
Fuse
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Installation Panel. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Insulation
Tape. Clamps. Screws.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Installation Panel. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Insulation
Tape. Clamps. Screws.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Installation Panel. Paper
Pattern for Installation. Insulation
Tape. Clamps. Screws.
C : 3D039370B
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1 m in front of the unit and 1 m downward.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
37
Specifications
Si30-813
Floor Standing Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
FXLQ20MAVE
FXLQ25MAVE
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
600×1,000×222
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
600×1,140×222
3×14×1.5
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
mm
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
600×1,000×222
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.5
3×14×1.5
Face Area
m²
0.159
0.159
0.200
D14B20
Sirocco Fan
D14B20
Sirocco Fan
2D14B13
Sirocco Fan
W
15×1
15×1
25×1
m³/min
cfm
7/6
247/212
7/6
247/212
8/6
282/212
Model
Type
Fan
FXLQ32MAVE
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Liquid Pipes
Piping
Connections Gas Pipes
Drain Pipe
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
mm
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
Machine Weight (Mass)
kg
25
25
30
dBA
35/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
35/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
35/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
C : 3D038816A
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
38
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Floor Standing Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXLQ40MAVE
FXLQ50MAVE
kcal/h
4,000
5,000
6,300
Btu/h
16,000
19,800
24,900
kW
4.7
5.8
7.3
kW
4.5
5.6
7.1
kcal/h
4,300
5,400
6,900
Btu/h
17,100
21,500
27,300
kW
5.0
6.3
8.0
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
600×1,420×222
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
600×1,420×222
3×14×1.5
mm
Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
600×1,140×222
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.5
3×14×1.5
Face Area
m²
0.200
0.282
0.282
2D14B13
Sirocco Fan
2D14B20
Sirocco Fan
2D14B20
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
W
25×1
35×1
35×1
m³/min
cfm
11/8.5
388/300
14/11
494/388
16/12
565/424
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXLQ63MAVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
kg
30
36
36
dBA
38/33
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
39/34
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
40/35
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
C : 3D038816A
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
39
Specifications
Si30-813
Concealed Floor Standing Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXNQ20MAVE
FXNQ25MAVE
kcal/h
2,000
2,500
3,200
Btu/h
7,800
9,900
12,600
kW
2.3
2.9
3.7
kW
2.2
2.8
3.6
kcal/h
2,200
2,800
3,400
Btu/h
8,500
10,900
13,600
kW
2.5
3.2
4.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
610×930×220
Galvanized Steel Plate
610×1,070×220
3×14×1.5
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
610×930×220
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.5
3×14×1.5
Face Area
m²
0.159
0.159
0.200
D14B20
Sirocco Fan
D14B20
Sirocco Fan
2D14B13
Sirocco Fan
W
15×1
15×1
25×1
m³/min
cfm
7/6
247/212
7/6
247/212
8/6
282/212
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXNQ32MAVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
kg
19
19
23
dBA
35/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
35/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
35/32
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
C : 3D038817A
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
40
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
Concealed Floor Standing Type
Model
∗1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
∗2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
∗3 Heating Capacity
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
FXNQ40MAVE
FXNQ50MAVE
kcal/h
4,000
5,000
6,300
Btu/h
16,000
19,800
24,900
kW
4.7
5.8
7.3
kW
4.5
5.6
7.1
kcal/h
4,300
5,400
6,900
Btu/h
17,100
21,500
27,300
kW
5.0
6.3
8.0
Galvanized Steel Plate
610×1,350×220
Galvanized Steel Plate
610×1,350×220
3×14×1.5
mm
Galvanized Steel Plate
610×1,070×220
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
mm
3×14×1.5
3×14×1.5
Face Area
m²
0.200
0.282
0.282
2D14B13
Sirocco Fan
2D14B20
Sirocco Fan
2D14B20
Sirocco Fan
Model
Type
Fan
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
W
25×1
35×1
35×1
m³/min
cfm
11/8.5
388/300
14/11
494/388
16/12
565/424
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Air Filter
Piping
Connections
FXNQ63MAVE
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Glass Fiber / Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber / Urethane Foam
Glass Fiber / Urethane Foam
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ6.4 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ12.7 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
φ21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
kg
23
27
27
dBA
38/33
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
39/34
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
40/35
Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Electronic Expansion Valve
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
C : 3D038817A
R-410A P(A) Series
Operation Manual. Installation
Manual. Insulation for Fitting. Drain
Hose. Clamps. Screws. Washers.
Level Adjustment Screw.
Machine Weight (Mass)
∗5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V)
Safety Devices
Refrigerant Control
Connectable Outdoor Unit
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Notes:
∗1
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗2 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp. : 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
∗3 Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp. : 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
∗5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
41
Specifications
Si30-813
Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type
Model
Indoor Unit
FXUQ71MAV1
FXUQ100MAV1
FXUQ125MAV1
Connection Unit
BEVQ71MAVE
BEVQ100MAVE
BEVQ125MAVE
kcal/h
7,100
10,000
12,500
Btu/h
28,300
39,600
49,500
kW
8.3
11.6
14.5
kW
8.0
11.2
14.0
kcal/h
7,700
10,800
12,000
Btu/h
30,700
42,700
47,700
kW
9.0
12.5
14.0
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
White (10Y9/0.5)
165×895×895
3×6×1.5
230×895×895
3×8×1.5
230×895×895
3×8×1.5
★1 Cooling Capacity (19.5°CWB)
★2 Cooling Capacity (19.0°CWB)
★3 Heating Capacity (Max.)
Casing Color
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
Rows×Stages×Fin Pitch
Coil (Cross
Fin Coil)
Face Area
mm
mm
m²
Model
Fan
Type
Motor Output × Number
of Units
Air Flow Rate (H/L)
0.353
0.353
QTS50B15M
QTS50B15M
Turbo Fan
Turbo Fan
Turbo Fan
W
45×1
90×1
90×1
m³/min
19/14
29/21
32/23
cfm
Drive
Temperature Control
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material
Piping
Connections
0.265
QTS48A10M
671/494
1,024/741
1,130/812
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Direct Drive
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating
Heat Resistant Foamed Polyethylene,
Regular Foamed Polyethylene
Heat Resistant Foamed Polyethylene,
Regular Foamed Polyethylene
Heat Resistant Foamed Polyethylene,
Regular Foamed Polyethylene
Liquid Pipes
mm
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
φ9.5 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes
mm
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
φ15.9 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe
mm
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
Machine Weight
★5 Sound Level (H/L) (230V)
Safety Devices
kg
25
31
31
dBA
40/35
43/38
44/39
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Operation Manual, Installation
Manual, Drain Hose, Clamp Metal,
Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Pads,
Clamps, Screws, Washers, Holding
Plate.
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Operation Manual, Installation
Manual, Drain Hose, Clamp Metal,
Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Pads,
Clamps, Screws, Washers, Holding
Plate.
C : 4D045395A
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Operation Manual, Installation
Manual, Drain Hose, Clamp Metal,
Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Pads,
Clamps, Screws, Washers, Holding
Plate.
Notes:
★1 Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.5°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
★2
★3
4
★5
42
difference: 0m.
Indoor temp. : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB / outdoor temp.: 35°CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m.
Indoor temp. : 20°CDB / outdoor temp.: 7°CDB, 6°CWB / Equivalent piping length; 7.5m, level difference;
0m. (Heat pump only)
Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an additional for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5m downward from the unit center. These
values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW×860
Btu/h=kW×3412
cfm=m³/min×35.3
Specifications
Si30-813
Specifications
BEV Units
Model
Power Supply
Casing
Dimensions: (H×W×D)
mm
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation
Material
Piping
Connection
Liquid Pipes
Gas Pipes
Indoor
Unit
Outdoor Liquid Pipes
Unit
Suction Gas Pipes
Machine Weight (Mass)
BEVQ71MAVE
BEVQ100MAVE
BEVQ125MAVE
1 Phase 50Hz 220~240V
1 Phase 50Hz 220~240V
1 Phase 50Hz 220~240V
Galvanized Steel Plate
100×350×225
Galvanized Steel Plate
100×350×225
Galvanized Steel Plate
100×350×225
Flame and Heat Resistant Foamed
Polyethylene
Flame and Heat Resistant Foamed
Polyethylene
Flame and Heat Resistant Foamed
Polyethylene
9.5mm (Flare Connection)
15.9mm (Flare Connection)
9.5mm (Flare Connection)
15.9mm (Flare Connection)
9.5mm (Flare Connection)
15.9mm (Flare Connection)
9.5mm (Flare Connection)
9.5mm (Flare Connection)
9.5mm (Flare Connection)
15.9mm (Flare Connection)
15.9mm (Flare Connection)
15.9mm (Flare Connection)
3.0
Installation manual, Gas piping
connections, Insulation for fitting,
Sealing material, Clamps
3.0
Installation manual, Gas piping
connections, Insulation for fitting,
Sealing material, Clamps
3.5
Installation manual, Gas piping
connections, Insulation for fitting,
Sealing material, Clamps
4D045387A
4D045387A
4D045388A
kg
Standard Accessories
Drawing No.
Connection Example
Control
Wiring
1. Wiring Work
•The connecting line between SkyAir Indoor Unit
– BEV Unit : 3 cores…like a Transmission Line
•BEV Unit’s power supply line;
Single phase 2 line…like a VRV Indoor unit
•BEV Unit – other VRV indoor unit or outdoor unit –
: 2 cores…DIII network wiring (super wiring)
2. Piping work
SkyAir side,Outdoor Unit Side,They are both flare
connection.
Transmission
line
Power
supply
line
BRC1C62
Consideration matter
- When connecting centralized-control device, it is necessary to install an interface
adaptor for SkyAir series in an indoor unit.
- Distance between indoor unit and –BEV unit must be within 5m.
Outline figure
Terminal block
Gas pipe (With Thermistor,
Insulation pipe cover)
Piping part cover
PC board
SW.BOX cover
Hanger
(Wall surface attachment is also possible)
Liquid pipe
Electric valve drive part
Installation pattern / maintenance
1. Level installation (It hangs by two hangers)
Hanger bolt
Liquid pipe
Service
space*2
2. Vertical Installation
(Wall Surface Mounted)
Gas pipe
100 or more
Installation
space
150 or more
Service space*1
Screw fixed
(x2 Screws x2 place)
Service access panel (450 x 450 )
*1; Service space for switch box.
(Service access panel is required for the bottom side. When there is nothing, 350 or more spaces are required. )
*2; For electric valve drive part’s maintenance. (a control box is removed)
Specifications
43
Specifications
44
Si30-813
Specifications
Si30-813
Part 3
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................46
1.1 RWEYQ8P, 10P .....................................................................................46
1.2 BS Unit Functional Parts ........................................................................48
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................49
2.1 RWEYQ8P, 10P .....................................................................................49
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................51
3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection.........................................................51
3.2 In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(One Outside Unit Installation) ...............................................................53
3.3 In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(3 Outside Units Connection) .................................................................57
Refrigerant Circuit
45
Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813
1. Refrigerant Circuit
1.1
RWEYQ8P, 10P
No. in
refrigerant Symbol
system
diagram
A
M1C
Name
Inverter compressor (INV)
E
Y1E
Electronic expansion valve (Main: EV1)
G
Y3E
Electronic expansion valve (Subcool: EV3)
H
Y1S
Solenoid valve (Hot gas: SVP)
I
Y2S
Solenoid valve (Oil return of water heat
exchanger: SVE)
J
Y3S
Solenoid valve (Receiver gas charging:
SVL)
K
Y4S
Solenoid valve (Receiver gas discharging:
SVG)
M
Y5S
4-way selector valve (Main: 20S1)
O
Y6S
Solenoid valve (Non-operating unit liquid
pipe closing: SVSL)
P
Y7S
4-way selector valve (Sub: 20S2)
Major Function
Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 52 Hz and 230
Hz by using the inverter. The number of operating steps is as follows.
RWEYQ8P, 10P: 22 steps
In cooling operation: High pressure control
In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating operation:
When the heat exchanger is used as the evaporator : SH control
When the heat exchanger is used as the condenser : High pressure
control
PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat exchanger constant.
Used to prevent the low pressure from transient falling.
Used to collect the refrigerant oil from water heat exchanger.
Used to maintain high pressure while in cooling operation at low water
temperature. And also used to prevent the accumulation of refrigerant in
non-operating outside units in the case of multiple-outside-unit system.
Used to collect refrigerant to receiver.
Changes the operation into cooling, heating or simultaneous cooling/
heating operation.
Used to prevent the accumulation of refrigerant in non-operating outside
units in the case of multiple-outside-unit system.
Changes the water heat exchanger into condenser or evaporator.
Used to detect high pressure.
Q
S1NPH High pressure sensor
R
S2NPL Low pressure sensor
S
S1PH
V
Used to detect low pressure.
HP pressure switch (For INV compressor)
In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when a malfunction
occurs, this switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to
stop the compressor operation.
–
Fusible plug
In order to prevent the increase of pressure when abnormal heating is
caused by fire or others, the fusible part of the plug is molten at a
temperature of 70 to 75°C to release the pressure into the atmosphere.
W
–
Pressure regulating valve 1 (Liquid pipe to
discharge pipe)
This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa or more for prevention of
pressure increase, thus resulting in no damage of functional parts due to
the increase of pressure in transportation or storage.
2
R2T
Thermistor (Suction pipe: Ts)
Used to detect suction pipe temperature, keep the suction superheated
degree constant in heating operation, and others.
3
R3T
Thermistor (INV discharge pipe: Tdi)
Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature
protection control of compressor, and others.
6
R4T
Thermistor (Heat exchanger gas pipe: Tg)
7
R5T
Thermistor (Sub-cooling heat exchanger
outlet pipe: Tsh)
Used to detect gas pipe temperature on the evaporation side of subcooling heat exchanger, keep the superheated degree at the outlet of
sub-cooling heat exchanger constant, and others.
8
R6T
Thermistor (Receiver outlet liquid pipe: Tl)
Used to detect receiver outlet liquid pipe temperature, prevent the drift
between outdoor units while in heating operation in the case of multipleoutside-unit system, and others.
Used to detect gas pipe temperature of water heat exchanger.
46
Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813
Refrigerant Circuit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
K
V
8
E
I
G
O
7
W
M
6
P
J
Q
S
3
H
R
A
2
4D048290C
Refrigerant Circuit
47
Refrigerant Circuit
1.2
Si30-813
BS Unit Functional Parts
BSVQ100, 160, 250PV1
BSVQ36, 60PVJU
No.
Name
Symbol
1
Electronic expansion valve (EVH)
Y4E
2
Electronic expansion valve (EVL)
Y5E
3
Electronic expansion valve (EVHS)
Y2E
4
Electronic expansion valve (EVLS)
Y3E
5
Electronic expansion valve (EVSC)
Y1E
6
Capillary tube
Function
Opens while in heating operation or all indoor units are in cooling
operation. (Max : 760pls)
Opens while in cooling operation. (Max : 760pls)
Opens while in heating operation or all indoor units are in cooling
operation. (Max : 480pls)
Opens while in cooling operation. (Max : 480pls)
In simultaneous cooling and heating operation, it is used to subcool
liquid refrigerants when an indoor unit downstream of this BS unit is in
heating operation.(Max : 480pls)
Used to bypass high pressure gas to low pressure side to protect
“Refrigerant accumulation” in high and low pressure gas pipes.
Note : Factory set of all EV opening : 60pls
Liquid
Liquid
Dual Pressure
Indoor
side
Outdoor
side
Gas
Suction
48
Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813
Functional Parts Layout
2. Functional Parts Layout
2.1
RWEYQ8P, 10P
2.1.1 Functional Parts Layout (Solenoid Valve etc.)
Electronic expansion
valve (Y3E)
Solenoid valve (Y3S)
4way Valve (20S1, Y5S)
Solenoid valve
(Y6S)
Stop valve
(Liquid side)
4way Valve (20S2, Y7S)
Stop valve
(Discharge gas side)
Stop valve
(Suction gas side)
High Pressure Sensor (S1NPH)
Gauge port
High Pressure Switch (S1PH)
Electronic expansion valve (Y1E)
Solenoid valve (Y1S)
Solenoid valve (Y2S)
Plate heat exch.assy
Oil separator
Receiver
Compressor
Low pressure sensor
(S1NPL)
Refrigerant Circuit
49
Functional Parts Layout
Si30-813
2.1.2 Sensors
Plan
R4T Thermistor
(Heat-exchanger gas pipe)
R3T Thermistor
(M1C, Discharge pipe)
Front View
R5T Thermistor
(Sub cooling heat-exchanger)
R6T Thermistor
(Receiver liquid pipe)
R2T Thermistor (Suction pipe)
50
Refrigerant Circuit
To other indoor units
Fan ON
Refrigerant Circuit
Filter
Cooling
" ON "
Fan ON
Indoor unit
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Filter
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
(0 pls)
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Cooling
"ON"
oreration
" OFF"
Indoor unit (Thermostat "OFF ")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
(0 pls)
Fan
Indoor unit
operation
To other outside units
Suction gas pipe (No pipe connection)
Discharge gas pipe
Liquid pipe
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
E3 control
Outside unit 1
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
3.1
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Si30-813
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
In Case of Heat Pump Connection
A. Cooling Operation
51
Oil
separator
To other indoor units
52
Fan ON
Filter
Heating
" ON "
Fan ON
Indoor unit
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Filter
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Heating
" ON "
oreration
" OFF"
Indoor unit (Thermostat "OFF")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
operation
To other outside units
Suction gas pipe (No pipe connection)
Discharge gas pipe
Liquid pipe
E3 control
Outside unit 1
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
Si30-813
B. Heating Operation
Refrigerant Circuit
Oil
separator
Refrigerant Circuit
Filter
Capillary
tube
Solenoid valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Capillary
tube
Capillary tube Check valve
Solenoid valve
Bs unit
Filter
Bs unit
Solenoid valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Capillary
tube
Three way
valve
Three way
valve
Three way
valve
Fan ON
Filter
Cooling
" ON "
Fan ON
Fan ON
Filter
Filter
Cooling
" ON "
Operation
" OFF "
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit (Thermostat "OFF")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
operation
Suction gas pipe
Discharge gas pipe
Liquid pipe
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
E3 control
Outside unit
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
3.2
Filter
Bs unit
To other indoor units
Si30-813
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(One Outside Unit Installation)
A. Cooling Operation
53
Oil
separator
54
Filter
Capillary
tube
Solenoid valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Capillary
tube
Capillary tube Check valve
Solenoid valve
Bs unit
Filter
Capillary
tube
Capillary tube Check valve
Solenoid valve
Bs unit
Filter
Bs unit
Three way
valve
Three way
valve
Three way
valve
Fan ON
Filter
Fan ON
Filter
Fan ON
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Heating
" ON "
Cooling
" ON "
" ON "
Cooling
Indoor unit
operation
Suction gas pipe
Discharge gas pipe
Liquid pipe
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
E3 control
Outside unit
Oil
separator
To other indoor units
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
Si30-813
B. Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation (When the outdoor water cooled heat exchanger is
used as condenser.)
Refrigerant Circuit
Refrigerant Circuit
Filter
Capillary
tube
Solenoid valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Capillary
tube
Capillary tube Check valve
Solenoid valve
Bs unit
Filter
Capillary
tube
Capillary tube Check valve
Solenoid valve
Bs unit
Filter
Bs unit
Three way
valve
Three way
valve
Three way
valve
Fan ON
Filter
Fan ON
Filter
Fan ON
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Fan
Heat exchanger
Indoor unit
Heating
" ON "
Heating
" ON "
" ON "
Cooling
Indoor unit
operation
Suction gas pipe
Discharge gas pipe
Liquid pipe
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
E3 control
Outside unit
Oil
separator
To other indoor units
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
Si30-813
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
C. Heating and simultaneous cooling heating operation mode (When the outdoor water cooled heat exchanger
is used as evaporator.)
(In case there are indoor units operating with cooling thermostat "ON".)
55
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
56
Si30-813
Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813
3.3
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
In Case of Heat Recovery Connection (3 Outside Units Connection)
A. Cooling Operation
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
To other indoor units
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Fan ON
Outside unit 2
Outside unit 3
Capillary tube Check valve
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Receiver
Receiver
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Receiver
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Filter
Outside unit 1
E3 control
E3 control
E3 control
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Fan OFF
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Operation
" OFF "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Indoor unit
operation
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Fan ON
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Oil
separator
Indoor unit
Oil
separator
Bs unit
Oil
separator
Indoor unit
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Refrigerant Circuit
57
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
Si30-813
B: Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation mode (When the outdoor water cooled heat exchangers are used only as condenser.)
To other indoor units
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Outside unit 2
Outside unit 3
Capillary tube Check valve
Electronic
expansion valve
Receiver
Solenoid valve
(SVSL) "OFF"
E3 control
Solenoid valve
Filter
Receiver
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Receiver
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Filter
Outside unit 1
Fan ON
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Fan ON
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Indoor unit
operation
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Heating
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Oil
separator
Fan ON
Oil
separator
Indoor unit
Bs unit
Oil
separator
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
Electronic
expansion valve
Compressor
stop
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
58
Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
C: Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation mode (When the outdoor water cooled heat exchangers are used as condenser and evaporator mixed.)
To other indoor units
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Outside unit 2
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
Outside unit 3
Capillary tube Check valve
Solenoid valve
(SVSL) "OFF"
Receiver
Solenoid valve
(SVSL) "OFF"
Receiver
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Receiver
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Filter
Outside unit 1
Fan ON
Electronic
expansion valve
E3 control
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Indoor unit
Bs unit
Fan ON
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Indoor unit
operation
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "OFF")
Fan ON
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Heating
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Oil
separator
Indoor unit
Oil
separator
Bs unit
Oil
separator
ON-OFF control by
receiver pressurerising
control
Electronic
expansion valve
Compressor
stop
Compressor
stop
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Refrigerant Circuit
59
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
Si30-813
D: Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation mode (When the outdoor water cooled heat exchangers are used only as evaporator.)
High temperature, high pressure gas
High temperature, high pressure liquid
Low temperature, low pressure liquid or gas
To other indoor units
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Fan ON
Outside unit 2
Outside unit 3
Capillary tube Check valve
Electronic
expansion valve
Filter
E3 control
E3 control
E3 control
Solenoid valve
Receiver
Receiver
Heating
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Receiver
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Filter
Outside unit 1
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
Bs unit
Indoor unit
Fan ON
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Cooling
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Indoor unit
operation
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Fan ON
Oil
separator
Indoor unit
Oil
separator
Bs unit
Oil
separator
Indoor unit (Thermostat "OFF")
Heat exchanger
Capillary
tube
Heating
" ON "
Fan
Three way
valve
Capillary tube Check valve
Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
Solenoid valve
Filter
Filter
Indoor unit (Thermostat "ON")
60
Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813
Part 4
Function
1. Function General...................................................................................62
1.1 Symbol ...................................................................................................62
1.2 Operation Mode......................................................................................63
1.3 Normal Operation ...................................................................................64
2. Stop.......................................................................................................65
2.1 Stopping Operation ................................................................................65
3. Standby .................................................................................................68
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................68
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control......................................................................68
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................69
4.1 Cooling Start-up Control.........................................................................69
4.2 Heating Start-up Control.........................................................................70
5. Normal Control ......................................................................................71
5.1 Compressor Control ...............................................................................71
5.2 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................73
5.3 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating Operation or
Simultaneous Cooling / Heating Operation ............................................74
6. Protection Control .................................................................................76
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................76
Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................77
Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................79
Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................80
Cooling Fan Control ...............................................................................81
7. Special Operation..................................................................................82
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................82
Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger .....................................84
Pump-down Residual Operation Control................................................85
Refrigerant Drift Prevention....................................................................87
8. Other Control.........................................................................................88
8.1 Outside Unit Rotation .............................................................................88
9. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................89
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
Function
Drain Pump Control................................................................................89
Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt..............................................91
Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller...............................................92
Thermostat Control While in Normal Operation .....................................94
Thermostat Control in Dry Operation .....................................................94
Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................95
Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)........................................95
Heater Control ........................................................................................96
List of Swing Flap Operations ................................................................97
Freeze Prevention ..................................................................................98
61
Function General
Si30-813
1. Function General
1.1
Symbol
Symbol
Electric symbol
Description or function
20S1
Y5S
Four way valve (Main)
20S2
Y7S
Four way valve (For heat exchanger)
DSH
–
Discharge pipe superheat
DSHi
–
Discharge pipe superheat of inverter compressor
EV
(Y1E, Y3E)
Opening of electronic expansion valve
EV1
Y1E
Electronic expansion valve for water heat exchanger
EV3
Y3E
Electronic expansion valve for sub-coolig heat exchanger
–
Value of INV compressor discharge pie temperature (R3T) compensated with outdoor
air temperature
HTDi
Pc
S1NPH
Value detected by high pressure sensor
Pe
S1NPL
Value detected by low pressure sensor
SH
–
Evaporator outlet superheat
SHS
–
Target evaporator outlet superheat
SVG
Y4S
Solenoid valve for discharging gas from receiver
SVL
Y3S
Solenoid valve for gas charging to receiver
SVE
Y2S
Solenoid valve for oil collection from water heat exchanger
SVP
Y1S
Solenoid valve for hot gas bypass
SVSL
Y6S
Solenoid valve for non-operating unit liquid pipe closing
Tc
–
High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TcS
–
Target temperature of Tc (Condensing temperature)
Te
–
Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TeS
–
Target temperature of Te (Evaporating temperature)
Tfin
R1T
Inverter fin temperature
Ts
R2T
Suction pipe temperature detected by R2T (Suction pipe)
Tsh
R5T
Temperature detected by R5T-gas pipe temperature of sub-cooling heat exchanger
gas side (outlet temperature)
Tp
–
Calculated value of compressor port temperature
Tdi
R3T
Discharge temperature detected by thermistor located the inverter compressor
discharge pipe
Tl
R6T
Liquid pipe temperature
Tg
R4T
The gas pipe temperature of water heat exchanger
62
Function
Si30-813
1.2
Function General
Operation Mode
System stopping function
(2.1)
Thermostat ON
• Restart standby (3.1)
• Clankcase heater control (3.2)
NO
YES
Startup control
•Cooling startup control (4.1)
•Heating startup control (4.2)
•Pressure equalization
startup control (4.3)
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
• Cooling operation (1.3)
• Heating operation (1.3)
• Cooling/Heating simultaneous
operation (1.3)
• BS unit & Indoor unit operation (1.4)
• Slave unit stopping function (2.1)
• Compressor control (5.1)
• Electronic expansion valve control
(5.2)
• Heat exchanger mode control (5.3)
Protection control
• High pressure protection control (6.1)
• Low pressure protection control (6.2)
• Discharge pipe protection control
(6.3)
• Inverter protection control (6.4)
• Refrigerant drift prevention (7.4)
YES
NO
Malfunction stop
condition
Determination
• Malfunction
stop (2.2)
• Outside unit rotation (8.1)
• Pump-down residual operation (7.3)
NO
Cooling/Heating
mode change
YES
• Pressure equalization control
(4.3)
IN
Oil return operation
• Cooling oil return operation (7.1)
• Heating oil return operation (7.1)
IN
• Water heat exchanger oil
return operation (7.2)
NO
Oil return
condition
NO
Water heat
exchanger oil return
condition
NO
∗ Figures in the parentheses indicate the description Nos. of functional operation shown in the following
pages.
Function
63
Function General
1.3
Si30-813
Normal Operation
Actuator function
Normal heating or normal cooling/
Normal cooling
heating simultaneous operation
PI control, High pressure protection, PI control, High pressure protection,
Low pressure protection, Discharge
Low pressure protection, Discharge
pipe temperature protection control,
pipe temperature protection control,
Inverter protection control
Inverter protection control
Inverter cooling fan control
Inverter cooling fan control
OFF
ON
Heat exchanger mode control
OFF
(In case of heating and simultaneous
cooling/heating operation)
Symbol
Electrical
symbol
—
(M1C)
Inverter cooling fan
4 way valve (Main)
—
20S1
(M1,2F)
(Y5S)
4 way valve (for
heat exchanger)
20S2
(Y7S)
EV1
(Y1E)
Heat exchanger mode control
(In case of cooling operation)
Heat exchanger mode control
(In case of heating and simultaneous
cooling/heating operation)
EV3
(Y3E)
EV3 control
EV3 control
SVP
(Y1S)
Protection control
Protection control
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return
control
SVL
(Y3S)
Receiver pressurising control
Receiver pressurising control and
drift protection control
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
Drift protection control
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
ON
—
—
EV
—
Parts name
Compressor
Main heat
exchanger
electronic exp.
valve
Sub-cooling
electronic exp.
valve
Hot gas bypass
solenoid valve
Water heat exch. oil
return solenoid
valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid
valve
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid
valve
Non-operation unit
liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
Indoor unit fan
Indoor unit
expansion valve
BS unit
64
Refer to following page for detail.
Refer to following page for detail.
(BS unit & Indoor unit operation mode (BS unit & Indoor unit operation mode
detail)
detail)
Function
Si30-813
Stop
2. Stop
2.1
Stopping Operation
This operation is used to define the operation of the actuator while the system stops.
2.1.1 When System is in Stop Mode
Parts name
Compressor
Inverter cooling fan
4 way valve 1
4 way valve 2
Main heat exchanger electronic exp. valve
Sub-cooling electronic exp. valve
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve
Water heat exch. oil return solenoid valve
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop solenoid valve
Ending conditions
Function
Symbol
—
—
20S1
20S2
EV1
EV3
SVP
SVE
SVL
SVG
SVSL
—
Electrical
symbol
(M1C)
(M1,2F)
(Y5S)
(Y7S)
(Y1E)
(Y3E)
(Y1S)
(Y2S)
(Y3S)
(Y4S)
(Y6S)
—
Actuator function
OFF
OFF
Holding
Holding
0 pulse
0 pulse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Indoor unit thermostat ON
65
Stop
Si30-813
2.1.2 Stopping Operation of Slave Units During Master Unit is in Operation
with Multi-Outside-Unit System
This operation is used to make adjustments of required refrigerant amount with non-operating
slave units while the master unit is in operation.
In cooling operation : The system operates in mode A or mode B listed in the table below.
Parts name
Symbol
Compressor
Inverter cooling fan
4 way valve (Main)
4 way valve (for heat exchanger)
Main heat exchanger electronic exp.
valve
Sub-cooling electronic exp. valve
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve
Water heat exch. oil return solenoid valve
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
—
—
20S1
20S2
Electrical
symbol
(M1C)
(M1,2F)
(Y5S)
(Y7S)
EV1
Mode A operation (∗1)
Mode B operation (∗1)
OFF
OFF
Holding
Holding
OFF
OFF
Holding
Holding
(Y1E)
150 to 300 pulse
0 pulse
EV3
SVP
SVE
SVL
SVG
(Y3E)
(Y1S)
(Y2S)
(Y3S)
(Y4S)
0 pulse
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
0 pulse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SVSL
(Y6S)
OFF
ON
To Mode B when No gas To Mode A when gas
shortage signal is sent
shortage signal is sent
from indoor unit
from indoor unit
Slave units are required to operate.
Mode transition conditions
Ending conditions
∗1 Mode A or B operation
Master
unit
Slave
unit
 Mode A : Master unit collects refrigerant.

 Mode B : Slave unit storage refrigerant.
The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required refrigerant amount varies
depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.
66
Function
Si30-813
Stop
In heating operation or simultaneously in cooling / heating operation :
The system operates in mode A or mode B listed in the table below.
Parts name
Symbol
Electrical
symbol
Mode A operation
Mode B operation
Compressor
—
(M1C)
OFF
OFF
Inverter cooling fan
—
(M1,2F)
OFF
OFF
4 way valve (Main)
20S1
(Y5S)
Holding
Holding
4 way valve (for heat exchanger)
20S2
(Y7S)
Holding
Holding
Main heat exchanger electronic exp.
valve
EV1
(Y1E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
Sub-cooling electronic exp. valve
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve
SVP
(Y1S)
OFF
OFF
Water heat exch. oil return solenoid valve
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve
SVL
(Y3S)
ON
OFF
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
SVSL
(Y6S)
OFF
ON
Mode transition conditions
To Mode B when No gas
shortage signal is sent
from indoor unit
Ending conditions
Slave units are required to operate.
Master
unit
∗ Mode A or B operation
To Mode A when gas
shortage signal is sent
from indoor unit
Slave
unit
 Mode A : Master unit collects refrigerant.

 Mode B : Slave unit storage refrigerant.
The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required refrigerant amount varies
depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.
2.1.3 Abnormal Stop
In order to protect compressors, if any of the following items has an abnormal value, the system
will make "stop with thermostat OFF" and the malfunction will be determined according to the
number of retry times.
Item
1. Low pressure abnormal
2. High pressure abnormal
3. Discharge temperature
abnormal
4. Power supply abnormal
5. Inverter current abnormal
6. Radiation fin temperature
abnormal
Function
Judgement value
0.07 MPa
3.71MPa
Retry number
3 times in 60 minutes
2 times in 30 minutes
Malfunction code
E4
E3
135°C
2 times in 100 minutes
F3
Reverse phase
17A for 5 sec. (380V power supply)
25.1A for 260 sec. (220V power supply)
No retry
U1
3 times in 60 minutes
L8
3 times in 60 minutes
L4
89°C
67
Standby
Si30-813
3. Standby
3.1
Restart Standby
Forced standby is performed to prevent frequent repetition of ON/OFF of the compressor, and
to equalize pressure in the refrigerant system.
Parts name
Symbol
Compressor
Inverter cooling fan
4 way valve (Main)
4 way valve (for heat exchanger)
Main heat exchanger electronic exp.
valve
Sub-cooling electronic exp. valve
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve
Water heat exch. oil return solenoid valve
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
Indoor cooling unit fan
Indoor cooling unit expansion valve
Indoor heating unit fan
Indoor heating unit expansion valve
BS unit
Ending condition
—
—
20S1
20S2
Electrical
symbol
(M1C)
(M1,2F)
(Y5S)
(Y7S)
EV1
(Y1E)
0 pulse
EV3
SVP
SVE
SVL
SVG
(Y3E)
(Y1S)
(Y2S)
(Y3S)
(Y4S)
0 pulse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
—
EV
—
EV
(M1, 2F)
(Y1E)
(M1, 2F)
(Y1E)
Remote controller setting
All indoor EV 0 pulse
Indoor unit control
All indoor EV 0 pulse
Holding
4 minutes
3.2
Actuator function
0 Hz
OFF
Holding
Holding
Crankcase Heater Control
In order to prevent the refrigerant from dwelling in the compressor in the stopped mode, this
mode is used to control the crankcase heater.
Discharge pipe temp.<70˚C
Crankcase heater
OFF
Crankcase heater
ON
Discharge pipe temp.>75˚C
68
Function
Si30-813
Startup Control
4. Startup Control
This startup control is used to provide the following control to reduce the compressor load
resulting from liquid return or else during compressor startup, and also determine the position of
four way valves.
4.1
Cooling Start-up Control
Both master and slave units operate same time for changing 4 way valve position → Normal
Thermostat ON
operation after completion.
Symbol
Electrical
symbol
Pressure equalization
control before start-up
Starting control
Compressor
—
(M1C)
0 Hz
52Hz
+2 steps/20 sec.
(until Pc-Pe >0.49
MPa)
Inverter cooling fan
—
(M1,2F)
OFF
Inverter cooling fan
control
4 way valve (Main)
20S1
(Y5S)
Holding
OFF
4 way valve (for heat exchanger)
20S2
(Y7S)
Holding
OFF
Main heat exchanger electronic exp. valve
EV1
(Y1E)
0 pulse
2000 pulse
Sub-cooling electronic exp. valve
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve
SVP
(Y1S)
OFF
ON
Water heat exch. oil return solenoid valve
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
ON
Indoor unit fan
—
(M1,2F)
Indoor unit control
Indoor unit control
Indoor unit expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
0 pulse
0 pulse → Initial
opening
1 minute
Max. 5 minutes
Parts name
Ending condition
Function
69
Startup Control
4.2
Si30-813
Heating Start-up Control
Both master and slave units operate same time for changing 4 way valve position → Normal
operation after completion.
Thermostat ON
Symbol
Electrical
symbol
Pressure equalization
control before start-up
Starting control
Compressor
—
(M1C)
0 Hz
52Hz
+2 steps/20 sec.
(till Pc-Pe >0.49 MPa)
Inverter cooling fan
—
(M1,2F)
OFF
Inverter cooling fan
control
4 way valve (Main)
20S1
(Y5S)
Holding
ON
4 way valve (for heat exchanger)
20S2
(Y7S)
Holding
OFF
Parts name
Main heat exchanger electronic exp. valve
EV1
(Y1E)
0 pulse
180 pulse
Sub-cooling electronic exp. valve
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve
SVP
(Y1S)
OFF
ON
Water heat exch. oil return solenoid valve
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
ON
Indoor unit fan
—
(M1,2F)
Indoor unit control
Indoor unit control
Indoor unit expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
0 pulse
Indoor unit control
1 minute
Max. 6 minutes 40 sec.
Ending condition
70
Function
Si30-813
Normal Control
5. Normal Control
5.1
Compressor Control
5.1.1 Compressor Control
Compressor PI Control
Carries out the compressor capacity PI control to maintain Te at constant during cooling
operation and Tc at constant during heating operation to ensure stable unit performance.
[Cooling operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to achieve target value (TeS).
Te setting
L
M (Normal)
(factory
setting)
3
6
H
7
8
9
10
11
Te : Low pressure equivalent
saturation temperature (°C)
TeS : Target Te value
(Varies depending on Te
setting, operating frequency,
etc.)
[Heating operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Tc to achieve target value (TcS).
Tc setting
Tc : High pressure equivalent
saturation temperature (°C)
L
M (Normal)
H
TcS : Target Tc value
(factory
(Varies depending on Tc setting,
setting)
operating frequency, etc.)
43
46
49
[Cooling/Heating simultaneous operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to achieve target value (TeS) and Tc to achieve target
value (TcS) at the same time.
Te setting
L
M (Normal)
(factory
setting)
3
6
H
7
8
9
10
11
Te : Low pressure equivalent
saturation temperature (°C)
TeS : Target Te value
(Varies depending on Te
setting, operating frequency,
etc.)
Tc setting
Function
L
M (Normal)
(factory
setting)
H
43
46
49
Tc : High pressure equivalent
saturation temperature (°C)
TcS : Target Tc value
(Varies depending on Tc setting,
operating frequency, etc.)
71
Normal Control
Si30-813
5.1.2 Compressor Operation Frequency Steps
1. One outside
unit installation
Step
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
2. Two outside units connection installation
A : 1 Compressor operation
Master
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
156Hz
168Hz
177Hz
189Hz
202Hz
210Hz
216Hz
230Hz
Step
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Start-up
Master
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
3. Three outside units connection installation
A : 1 Compressor operation
Step
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Master
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
Step
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Master Slave 1
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
92Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
156Hz
168Hz
177Hz
189Hz
202Hz
210Hz
216Hz
230Hz
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
92Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
156Hz
168Hz
177Hz
189Hz
202Hz
210Hz
216Hz
230Hz
Start-up
B : 2 Compressor operation
Step
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Master Slave 1
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
92Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
92Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
∗ Depending on operational conditions, operation
pattern may be different from the description
above.
72
B : 2 Compressor operation
C : 3 Compressor operation
Step
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
65Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
156Hz
168Hz
177Hz
189Hz
202Hz
210Hz
216Hz
230Hz
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
65Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
156Hz
168Hz
177Hz
189Hz
202Hz
210Hz
216Hz
230Hz
52Hz
57Hz
62Hz
65Hz
68Hz
71Hz
74Hz
81Hz
88Hz
96Hz
104Hz
110Hz
112Hz
120Hz
130Hz
141Hz
156Hz
168Hz
177Hz
189Hz
202Hz
210Hz
216Hz
230Hz
Start-up
Function
Si30-813
5.2
Normal Control
Electronic Expansion Valve Control
Main Electronic Expansion Valve EV1 Control
Carries out the electronic expansion valve (Y1E) PI control to maintain the evaporator outlet
superheated degree (SH) at constant during heating operation to make maximum use of the
outside unit heat exchanger (evaporator).
SH = Ts - Te
SH : Evaporator outlet superheated degree (°C)
Ts : Suction pipe temperature detected by thermistor
R2T (°C)
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
(°C)
The optimum initial value of the evaporator outlet superheated degree is 5°C, but varies
depending on the discharge pipe superheated degree of inverter compressor.
Sub-cooling Electronic Expansion Valve EV3 Control
[Cooling operation]
Makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree of the
outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the sub-cooling heat exchanger.
SH = Tsh -Te
SH : Outlet superheated degree of evaporator (°C)
Tsh : Suction pipe temperature detected with the
thermistor R5T (°C)
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
(°C)
[Heating operation]
To lower the discharge temperature when the discharge temperature is over 95°C, makes PI
control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree of the outlet gas
pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the sub-cooling heat exchanger. (When the
discharge temperature is lower than 95°C, EV3 opening is 0 pulse.)
SH = Tsh -Te
SH : Outlet superheated degree of evaporator (°C)
Tsh : Suction pipe temperature detected with the
thermistor R5T (°C)
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
(°C)
Function
73
Normal Control
5.3
Si30-813
Heat Exchange Mode in Heating Operation or
Simultaneous Cooling / Heating Operation
In heating or simultaneous cooling / heating operation, a target condensing and evaporating
temperature can be secured by switching the water heat exchanger of the outside unit into
evaporator or condenser with load.
One outside unit installation
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
∆GR<0
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
Note 1: ∆GR=Target of heat exchange capacity balance
– Actual measurement of heat balance
∆GR>0: Insufficient evaporation
(Excessive condensation)
∆GR<0: Insufficient condensation
(Excessive evaporation)
2: Control of heat exchange capacity balance
Control the electronic expansion valve so that Te or Tc
will obtain the target value.
Two outside units installation
Master unit
Slave unit 1
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
OFF
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
(Condenser)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
∆GR<0
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
∆GR>0
Slave unit 1
ON
(Evaporator)
0 pulse
∆GR<0
Master unit
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
Slave unit 1
ON
(Evaporator)
0 pulse
∆GR<0
Master unit
Slave unit 1
Four-way changeover valve for
ON
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Evaporator)
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
74
Function
Si30-813
Normal Control
Three outside units installation
Note 1: ∆GR=Target of heat exchange
Master unit
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
capacity balance – Actual
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
OFF
OFF
measurement of heat
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
(Condenser)
(Condenser)
application of heat exchanger)
balance
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
∆GR>0: Insufficient evaporation
capacity balance
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
(Excessive condensation)
∆GR>0
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
OFF
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
(Condenser)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
∆GR>0
OFF
(Condenser)
0 pulse
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
ON
(Evaporator)
ON
(Evaporator)
0 pulse
0 pulse
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
Slave unit 2
∆GR<0: Insufficient condensation
(Excessive evaporation)
2: Control of heat exchange capacity
balance
Control the electronic expansion
valve so that Te or Tc will obtain
the target value.
Slave unit 2
ON
(Evaporator)
0 pulse
∆GR<0
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
OFF
ON
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Condenser)
(Evaporator)
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
OFF
(Condenser)
OFF
(Condenser)
0 pulse
0 pulse
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
ON
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Evaporator)
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
∆GR>0
Slave unit 2
ON
(Evaporator)
0 pulse
∆GR<0
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
Master unit
Four-way changeover valve for
ON
ON
ON
heat exchanger [Y7S] (For the
(Evaporator)
(Evaporator)
(Evaporator)
application of heat exchanger)
Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
Content of the control of
capacity balance
capacity balance
electronic expansion valve [Y1E] capacity balance
Function
75
Protection Control
Si30-813
6. Protection Control
6.1
High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due
to abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient
increase of high pressure.
[In cooling operation]
Normal operation
Pc > 2.95 MPa
Pc: HP pressure sensor detection value
for each outside unit
Pc < 2.74 MPa
Comp. upper limit 216 Hz
Pc > 3.5MPa
INV upper limit frequency = 216 Hz
Frequency control
Pc < 3.23 MPa
INV upper limit up 1 step/30 sec.
Comp. upper limit down 3 steps/10 sec.
Pc > 3.5 MPa
Comp. 52Hz
Pc ≥ 3.63 MPa
Less than
2 times within 30 min.
High pressure standby
When occurring 3 times within
30 min., HPS is activated without high
pressure standby, thus outputting the
malfunction code “E3”.
[In heating operation or simultaneous cooling/heating operation]
Normal operation
Pc > 2.94 MPa
Pc < 2.74 MPa
Upper limit 216 Hz
Pc < 2.99 MPa
Pc > 3.36 MPa
Frequency control
Compressor down 7 steps/10 sec.
Pc > 3.5 MPa
Master unit : 52Hz
Slave unit : stop
Pc ≥ 3.63 MPa
Less than 2 times
within 30 min.
76
High pressure standby
When occurring 3 times within
30 min., HPS is activated without high
pressure standby, thus outputting the
malfunction code “E3” .
Function
Si30-813
6.2
Protection Control
Low Pressure Protection Control
This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient
decrease of low pressure.
[In cooling operation]
Normal operation
Pe > 0.39 MPa
Pe < 0.34 MPa
∗1 Pe: LP pressure sensor detection
value for master unit
∗2 This frequency control is carried
out in whole system.
Compressor 52Hz
Pe < 0.24 MPa
Pe > 0.34 MPa
Hot gas solenoid valve (Y1S)
ON
Hot gas solenoid valve (Y1S)
OFF
Pe < 0.24 MPa
Pe < 0.07 MPa
When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,
the malfunction code “ E4 ” is output.
Low pressure standby
Less than 3 times
within 60 min.
[In heating or cooling/heating simultaneous operation] (When the outside unit heat
exchanger is used as evaporator.)
Normal control
Pe < 0.63 MPa
Pe > 0.71 MPa
∗1 Pe: LP pressure sensor detection
value for each outside unit.
∗2 This frequency control is carried
out in each outside unit.
Pe > 0.68 MPa
Comp. upper limit down
1 step/10 sec.
Comp. upper limit up
1 step/20 sec.
Pe < 0.63 MPa
Pe < 0.55 MPa
Compressor 52Hz
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby
Less than 3 times
within 60 min.
Function
When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,
the malfunction code “E4” is output.
77
Protection Control
Si30-813
[In heating or cooling/heating simultaneous operation] (When the outside unit heat
exchanger is used as condenser.)
Normal operation
Pc < 0.44 MPa
∗1 Pe: LP pressure sensor detection
value for each outside unit.
∗2 This frequency control is carried
Compressor upper limit out in each outside unit.
frequency = 216Hz
Pe > 0.49 MPa
Comp. upper limit up 1 step/20 sec.
Comp. upper limit down 3 steps/10 sec.
Pe < 0.44 MPa
Pe < 0.34 MPa
Compressor 52 Hz
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby
Less than 3 times
within 60 min.
78
When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,
the malfunction code “E4” is output.
Function
Si30-813
6.3
Protection Control
Discharge Pipe Protection Control
This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against a malfunction or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
∗Discharge pipe protection control is carried out in each outside unit.
[INV compressor]
Normal operation
HTdi :Value of INV compressor discharge pipe
temperature (Tdi) compensated with
outdoor air temperature
HTdi < 100˚C
HTdi > 115˚C
HTdi < 110˚C
Compressor upper limit up 1 step/20 sec.
Compressor upper limit down 1 step/30 sec.
HTdi > 115˚C
or
HTdi>130˚C
HTdi>120˚C
for 5 min.
Compressor 62Hz
or
Less than 2 times within
100 min.
Function
HTdi > 135˚C
HTdi > 120˚C for 10 min. or more.
Discharge pipe
temp.control standby
When occurring 3 times within 100 minutes,
the malfunction code “F3” is output.
79
Protection Control
6.4
Si30-813
Inverter Protection Control
Inverter current protection control and inverter fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to a malfunction, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
∗This control is carried out in each outside unit.
[Inverter overcurrent protection control]
Not limited
380-V unit 220-V unit
Ia
13.5 A
24.0 A
Invertercurrent > Ia
&
Invertercurrent < Ia
INV upper limit frequency = 230 Hz
Inverter current < Ia
continues for 3 min. or more
Comp. upper limit up 1 step/20 sec.
Comp. upper limit down 1 step/15 sec.
Inverter current > Ia
Inverter current
> 17A for 5 sec. (380V unit)
> 25.1A for 260 sec. (220V unit)
Less than 2 times
within 60 min.
• When occurring 3 times within 60 min.,
the malfunction code “L8 ” is output.
Inverter current standby
[Inverter fin temperature control]
Tfin : Inverter fin temperature
Normal operation
Tfin > 50˚C
Tfin < 30˚C
Cooling fan for electric
component box
> 84˚C
Tfin =
&
Tfin < 81˚C
Compressor up limit frequency = 230 Hz
Tfin <
= 81˚C
for continues 3 min.
Comp. upper limit up 1 step/1 min.
Comp. upper limit down 1 step/15 sec.
> 84˚C
Tfin =
Tfin > 98˚C
Less than 2 times
within 60 min.
80
Fin temp. standby
• When occurring 3 times within 60 min.,
the malfunction code “L4” is output.
Function
Si30-813
6.5
Protection Control
Cooling Fan Control
his function is used for ON-OFF control of the cooling fan to cool the inverter. This cooling fan
operates only when the temperature of the inverter fan is high, in order to reduce the operating
time of the fan.
[Details]
Control the cooling fan by each outside unit.
· 52C1=ON
&
· T fin > 50˚C
Cooling fan OFF
Cooling fan ON
· 52C1=OFF
OR
· T fin < 30˚C
Function
81
Special Operation
Si30-813
7. Special Operation
7.1
Oil Return Operation
In order to prevent the running-out of refrigerating machine oil in the compressor, the oil flowing
out from the compressor to the system side is collected through the oil return operation.
7.1.1 Oil Return Operation in Cooling Operation
[Starting conditions]
Start oil return operation in cooling operation referring to the following conditions.
* Cumulative oil return amount
* Timer
Cumulative compressor operating time after power supply turns on exceeds 2 hours and the
time after the completion of previous oil return operation exceeds 8 hours.
Furthermore, the cumulative oil return is calculated according to Tc, Te, and compressor load.
Cooling oil return
Parts name
Compressor
Electrical
Symbol symbol
During oil return
operation
After oil return
operation
(M1C)
104 Hz
52 Hz
(Y5S)
OFF
OFF
20S2
(Y7S)
OFF
OFF
EV1
(Y1E)
2000 pulse
2000 pulse
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
SVP
(Y1S)
ON
ON
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
OFF
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
ON
—
4 way valve (Main) 20S1
4 way valve
(for heat exchanger)
Main heat
exchanger
electronic
expansion valve
Sub-cooling
electronic
expansion valve
Hot gas bypass
solenoid valve
Water heat exch.
oil return solenoid
valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid
valve
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid
valve
Liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
Same as normal
cooling operation
Thermostat on/Stop :
Indoor unit control
Thermostat off :
OFF
Stop/thermostat off:
200 pls
Thermostat ON:
Indoor unit control
Indoor cooling unit
fan
—
(M1,2F)
Indoor cooling unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
Indoor heating unit
fan
—
(M1,2F)
—
—
(Y1E)
—
—
Max.8 min.
Max. 3min.
Indoor heating unit
EV
expansion valve
Ending condition
82
Preperation
20 sec.
Normal control
Normal control
Function
Si30-813
Special Operation
7.1.2 Oil Return Operation in Heating or Cooling/Heating simultaneous
Operation
[Starting conditions]
Start oil return operation in heating operation referring to the following conditions.
Cumulative compressor operating time after power supply turns on exceeds 2 hours and the
time after the completion of previous oil return operation exceeds 8 hours. And cumulative oil
return is calculated based on Tc, Te compressor load.
Heating & Cooling/heating simultaneous operation oil return
Parts name
Electrical
Symbol symbol
During oil return
operation
After oil return
operation
—
(M1C)
104 Hz
74 Hz
4 way valve 1
20S1
(Y5S)
OFF
ON
4 way valve 2
20S2
(Y7S)
OFF
Heat exchanger mode
EV1
(Y1E)
2000 pulse
20S2=OFF : 2000 pulse
20S2=ON : 180 pulse
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
SVP
(Y1S)
ON
ON
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
OFF
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
ON
Indoor cooling unit
fan
—
(M1,2F)
Thermostat on/Stop :
Indoor unit control
Thermostat off :
OFF
Normal control
Indoor cooling unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
320 pulse
Normal control
Indoor heating unit
fan
—
(M1,2F)
OFF
Indoor unit control
(Y1E)
320 pulse
Normal control
Max.8 min.
Max.3 min.
Compressor
Main heat
exchanger
electronic
expansion valve
Sub-cooling
electronic
expansion valave
Hot gas bypass
solenoid valve
Water heat exch.
oil return solenoid
valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid
valve
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid
valve
Liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
Indoor heating unit
EV
expansion valve
Ending condition
Function
Preperation
Same as normal
heating operation
2 min.
83
Special Operation
7.2
Si30-813
Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger
[Oil return operation of Water heat exchanger]
When the water heat exchanger is used as evaporator during heating or simultaneous cooling/
heating operation, the operation that the oil accumulated in the water heat exchanger is
returned to compressor is conducted.
[IN condition]
After a certain continuous period of time has passed under the following conditions, oil return
operation starts.
• 20S2 = 1 (Water heat exchanger is an evaporator.)
& • Tg – Te > 10°C
• Elapse of a certain period of time
Water heat exchanger oil return control
Electrical
Symbol symbol
Parts name
—
(M1C)
52 Hz
20S1
(Y5S)
ON
(Y7S)
OFF
(Y1E)
300 pulse
EV3
(Y3E)
180 pulse
SVP
(Y1S)
ON
SVE
(Y2S)
ON
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
SVSL
(Y6S)
ON
—
(M1,2F)
Indoor cooling unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
Indoor heating unit
fan
—
(M1,2F)
Indoor heating unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
Compressor
4 way valve (Main)
4 way valve
(for heat exchanger) 20S2
Main heat exchanger
electronic expansion EV1
valve
Sub-cooling
electronic expansion
valve
Hot gas bypass
solenoid valve
Water heat exch. oil
return solenoid valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid
valve
Non-operation unit
liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve
Indoor cooling unit
fan
Ending condition
84
Water heat exchanger oil return control
Normal control
Tharmostat on : Normal control
Tharmostat off/Stop : 500 pulse
Max.90 sec.
Function
Si30-813
7.3
Special Operation
Pump-down Residual Operation Control
If any liquid refrigerant remains in the heat exchanger during compressor startup, the liquid
refrigerant will enter the compressor, resulting in the dilution of the refrigerating machine oil in
the compressor and the degradation of lubricating capacity.
Therefore, before the compressor stops, pump-down operation is performed to collect the
refrigerant in the heat exchanger.
7.3.1 Cooling Operation Mode
Parts name
Symbol
Electrical
symbol
Master unit operation
Slave unit operation
Compressor
—
(M1C)
Current step
OFF
Inverter cooling fan
—
(M1,2F)
Inverter cooling fan control
Inverter cooling fan control
4 way valve (Main)
20S1
(Y5S)
OFF
OFF
4 way valve
(for heat exchanger)
20S2
(Y7S)
OFF
OFF
Main heat exchanger
electronic exp. valve
EV1
(Y1E)
2000 pulse
0 pulse
Sub-cooling electronic
exp. valve
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pls
0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid
valve
SVP
(Y1S)
ON
OFF
Water heat exch. oil return
solenoid valve
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas charging
solenoid valve
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas discharge
solenoid valve
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
Non-operation unit liquid
pipe stop solenoid valve
SVSL
(Y6S)
OFF
ON
Indoor cooling unit fan
—
(M1,2F)
No instruction
Indoor cooling unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
Ending condition
Function
All
0 pulse
Max. 5 min.
85
Special Operation
Si30-813
7.3.2 Heating & Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Mode
Symbol
Electrical
symbol
Master unit operation
Slave unit operation
Compressor
—
(M1C)
Current step
OFF
Inverter cooling fan
—
(M1,2F)
Inverter cooling fan control
Inverter cooling fan control
4 way valve 1
20S1
(Y5S)
ON
ON
4 way valve 2
20S2
(Y7S)
Holding
Holding
Parts name
Main heat exchanger
electronic exp. valve
(Y1E)
20S2=OFF: 2000 pulse
0 pulse
20S2=ON :
EV1
0 pulse
Sub-cooling electronic
exp. valve
EV3
(Y3E)
0 pulse
0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid
valve
SVP
(Y1S)
ON
OFF
Water heat exch. oil return
solenoid valve
SVE
(Y2S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas charging
solenoid valve
SVL
(Y3S)
OFF
OFF
Receiver gas discharge
solenoid valve
SVG
(Y4S)
OFF
OFF
Non-operation unit liquid
pipe stop solenoid valve
SVSL
(Y6S)
OFF
ON
Indoor cooling unit fan
—
(M1,2F)
No instruction
Indoor cooling unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
Indoor heating unit fan
—
(M1,2F)
Indoor heating unit
expansion valve
EV
(Y1E)
Ending condition
86
All
0 pulse
No instruction
All
500 pulse
Max. 5 min.
Function
Si30-813
7.4
Special Operation
Refrigerant Drift Prevention
“Refrigerant drift prevention control” is carried out, in order to prevent refrigerant drift among
outside units during heating operation using outside multiple connection. Excessively charged
refrigerant in outside units are collected and transferred to other outside units that are running
out of gas by controlling the solenoid valve.
(1) In case of cooling/heating changeover connection
When the superheated at the evaporator outlet degree is large, open the solenoid valve (SVG)
for venting receiver gas of the outside units that are running out of gas.
When the superheated
degree at the evaporator
outlet is large
Normal operation
(SVG=OFF)
SVG=ON
When the superheated
degree at the evaporator
outlet is small
(2) In case of cooling/heating simultaneous connection
When the superheated degree at the evaporator outlet is large, open the solenoid valve (SVG)
for venting receiver gas of the outside units that are running out of gas and the solenoid valve
(SVL) for pressurizing the receiver of the excessively charged outside units.
Normal operation
(SVG=OFF)
(SVL=OFF)
Function
When the superheated
degree at the evaporator
outlet is large
SVG=ON
SVL=ON
When the superheated
degree at the evaporator
outlet is small
87
Other Control
Si30-813
8. Other Control
8.1
Outside Unit Rotation
In the case of multi-outside-unit system, this outside unit rotation is used to prevent the
compressor from burning out due to unbalanced oil level between outside units.
[Details of outside unit rotation]
In the case of multi-outside-unit system, each outside unit is given an operating priority for the
control.
Outside unit rotation makes it possible to change the operating priority of outside units.
Thus, the system becomes free of compressors that stop over an extended period of time at the
time of partial loading, preventing unbalanced oil level.
[Timing of outside unit rotation]
•
After oil return operation
•
At the beginning of the starting control
Example) The following diagram shows outside unit rotation in combination of 3 outside units.
Starting
control
Oil return operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit
rotation
Priority
1
Priority
2
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit
rotation
Priority
3
Priority
3
Priority
1
Priority
2
Oil return operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Priority
3
Priority
1
Priority
2
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit
rotation
Priority
2
Priority
3
Priority
1
* “Master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave unit 2” in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from “master unit” and “slave unit” for control.)
The outside unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit
Consequently, The LED display on the main PC board for “master unit”, “slave unit 1” and
“slave unit 2” do not change. (Refer to the page 101.)
88
Function
Si30-813
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
9. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
9.1
Drain Pump Control
1. The drain pump is controlled by the ON/OFF buttons (4 button (1) - (4) given in the figure
below).
9.1.1 When the Float Switch is Tripped While the Cooling Thermostat is
ON:
∗1. (Normal operation):
The objective of residual operation is to completely drain any moisture adhering to the fin of the
indoor unit heat exchanger when the thermostat goes off during cooling operation.
∗2. (Malfunction residual):
The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop in 5
minutes if the float switch is turned OFF while the cooling thermo is ON.
9.1.2 When the Float Switch is Tripped During Cooling OFF by
Thermostat:
*3. (Malfunction residual):
The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop if
the float switch is turned OFF and not turned ON again within 5 minutes while the cooling
thermo is OFF.
Function
89
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
Si30-813
9.1.3 When the Float Switch is Tripped During Heating Operation:
During heating operation, if the float switch is not reset even after the 5 minutes operation, 5
seconds stop, 5 minutes operation cycle ends, operation continues until the switch is reset.
9.1.4 When the Float Switch is Tripped and “AF” is Displayed on the
Remote Controller:
*4. (Malfunction residual):
If the float switch is tripped five times in succession, a drain malfunction is determined to have
occurred. “AF” is then displayed as operation continues.
*5. (Malfunction residual):
The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop if
the float switch is OFF for more than 5 minutes in the case of *4.
90
Function
Si30-813
9.2
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt
We have added a control feature that allows you to select the range of in which air direction can
be adjusted in order to prevent the ceiling surrounding the air discharge outlet of ceiling
mounted cassette type units from being soiled. (This feature is available on double flow, multiflow and corner types.)
Existing position
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
Ceiling soiling prevention
position
Standard Setting
position
Draft prevention position
(Not for Multi flow type)
P0
P0
P1
P1
P3
P4
P4
P4'
P0
P1
P2
P2
P0'
P1'
P2'
P2
Draft
prevention
position
P0
P4
P3'
P3
P4
P0''
P1''
P2''
P4'' P3''
Same as existing position
Range of direction adjustment
Standard
position
Prohibited
P0'
P1'
P2'
P3'
P4'
Separated into 5 positions
(P1 - 4)
Range of direction adjustment
Dirt
prevention
position
Prohibited
P0''
P1''
P2''
P3''
P4''
Separated into 5 positions
(P2 - 4)
The factory set position is standard position.
Function
91
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
9.3
Si30-813
Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller
Temperature is controlled by both the thermostat sensor in remote controller and air suction
thermostat in the indoor unit. (This is however limited to when the field setting for the thermostat
sensor in remote controller is set to “Use.” )
Cooling
If there is a significant difference in the preset temperature and the suction temperature, fine
adjustment control is carried out using a body thermostat sensor, or using the sensor in the
remote controller near the position of the user when the suction temperature is near the preset
temperature.
„ Ex: When cooling
Assuming the preset temperature in the figure above is 24°C, and the suction
temperature has changed from 18°C to 30°C
(This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, the VRV system is off, and
that temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.)
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18°C to 23°C (A → C).
Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23°C to 27°C (C → E).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 27°C to 30°C (E → F).
And, assuming suction temperature has changed from 30°C to 18°C (F → A):
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 30°C to 25°C (F → D).
Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25°C to 21°C (D → B).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 21°C to 18°C (B → A).
92
Function
Si30-813
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
Heating
When heating, the hot air rises to the top of the room, resulting in the temperature being lower
near the floor where the occupants are. When controlling by body thermostat sensor only, the
unit may therefore be turned off by the thermostat before the lower part of the room reaches the
preset temperature. The temperature can be controlled so the lower part of the room where the
occupants are doesn’t become cold by widening the range in which thermostat sensor in remote
controller can be used so that suction temperature is higher than the preset temperature.
„ Ex: When heating
Assuming the preset temperature in the figure above is 24°C, and the suction
temperature has changed from 18°C to 28°C (A → D):
(This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, the VRV system is off, and
that temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.)
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18°C to 25°C (A → C).
Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25°C to 28°C (C → D).
And, assuming suction temperature has changed from 28°C to 18°C (D → A):
Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 28°C to 23°C (D → B).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23°C to 18°C (B → A).
Function
93
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
9.4
Si30-813
Thermostat Control While in Normal Operation
VRV multi systems are set at factory to thermostat control mode using the remote controller.
While in normal thermostat differential control mode (i.e., factory set mode), the thermostat
turns OFF when the system reaches a temperature of -1°C from the set temperature while in
cooling operation or of +1°C from that while in heating operation.
Cooling operation:
Tr < Set temperature -1ºC
Normal
Thermostat OFF
operation
Heating operation:
Tr > Set temperature +1ºC
Normal
Thermostat OFF
operation
Tr: Temperature detected with the suction
air thermistor (R1T)
While in a single remote controller group control, the body thermostat is only used fro this
control.
Furthermore, while in heating operation, cassette-mounted indoor units conduct the thermostat
control by a value compensated by -2°C for the value detected with the body thermostat.
(Through field settings, the thermostat differential setting can be changed from 1°C to 0.5°C.
For details on the changing procedure, refer to information on page onward.)
9.5
Thermostat Control in Dry Operation
While in dry operation, the thermostat control is conducted according to a suction temperature
at the time of starting the dry operation.
Assuming that the suction air temperature at the time of starting the dry operation is Tro and the
suction air temperature in operation is Tr,
Tr < Tro - 1ºC
when Tro ≤ 24.5ºC:
In dry operation
Thermostat OFF
Tro: Suction air temperature at the
time of starting the dry operation
Tr < Tro - 1.5ºC
when Tro > 24.5ºC:
In dry operation
Thermostat OFF
Tr: Temperature detected with the
suction air thermistor (R1T)
Furthermore, while in dry operation mode, fans operate at L flow rate, stops for a period of six
minutes while the thermostat is OFF, and then return to operation at L flow rate. (This control is
used to prevent a rise in indoor temperature while in thermostat OFF mode.)
94
Function
Si30-813
9.6
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
Electronic Expansion Valve Control
• Electronic expansion Valve Control
In cooling, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (evaporator), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(SH) will become constant.
In heating, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (condenser), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(Condenser outlet subcooled degree) will become constant.
Cooling SH=TH1-TH2
SH : Evaporator outlet superheated degree
(Heating SC=TC-TH1)
TH1: Temperature (°C) detected with the liquid thermistor
TH2: Temperature (°C) detected with the gas thermistor
SC : Condenser outlet subcooled degree
TC : High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Furthermore, the default value of the optimal evaporator outlet superheated degree (condenser
outlet subcooled degree) is 5 deg. However, this default value varies with the operating
performance.
9.7
Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)
At startup with thermostat ON or after the completion of defrosting in heating operation, the
indoor unit fan is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out and ensure startup capacity.
[Detail of operation]
Defrost ending or oil return ending
or Thermostat ON
Hot start control
Hot start ending conditions
· lapse of 3 minutes
OR · [TH2]>34˚C
· "Tc">52˚C
Hot start in progress
Normal control
Fan
H/L remote
controller setting
LL
Louver
OFF
Remote controller
setting
The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL
The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF
Normal control
Po (Horizontal)
TH2 : Temperature (°C) detected with the gas thermistor
TC : High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Function
95
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
9.8
Si30-813
Heater Control
The heater control is conducted in the following manner.
[Normal control]
While in heating operation, the heater
ON
control (ON/OFF) is conducted as
shown on the right.
[Overload control]
Set temperature
OFF
2ºC
When the system is overloaded in
heating operation, the heater will
ON
43ºC
be turned OFF in the following two
manners.
(1) The heater control (ON/OFF) is
conducted through the liquid
pipe temperature (R2T) of the
indoor unit.
(2) The heater control (ON/OFF)
ON
50ºC
is conducted by converting
the heater temperature into
the condensing pressure
equivalent saturated
temperature (Tc) according to
the temperature detection
through the high pressure sensor (SINPH) of the outside unit.
2ºC
50ºC Liquid pipe temperature
OFF
60ºC
Condensing pressure
equivalent saturated
temperature
OFF
[Fan residual operation]
While the heater turns OFF, in order to prevent the activation of the thermal protector, the fan
conducts residual operation for a given period of time after the heater turns OFF. (This
operation is conducted regardless of with or without heater equipped.)
Residual operation time = 100 seconds on ceiling suspended type or 60 seconds on other types
96
Function
Si30-813
9.9
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
List of Swing Flap Operations
Swing flaps operate as shown in table below.
Flap
Fan
FXAQ
OFF
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Wind direction set OFF
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Swing
OFF
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Wind direction set OFF
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Swing
LL
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Wind direction set LL
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
LL
Hot start from thermostat Swing
OFF mode (for prevention
of cold air)
Wind direction set LL
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
OFF
Horizontal
Horizontal
Totally closed
Wind direction set OFF
Horizontal
Horizontal
Totally closed
Swing
Swing
Swing
Wind direction set L*1
Set
Set
Set
Swing
Swing
Swing
Swing
Set
Set
Set
Swing
Swing
Swing
Wind direction set Set
Set
Set
Set
Swing
Horizontal
Horizontal
Totally closed
Wind direction set OFF
Set
Horizontal
Totally closed
Swing
Swing
Swing
Swing
Set
Set
Set
Hot start from defrosting
operation
Swing
FXCQ
FXHQ
FXKQ
FXFQ
Defrosting operation
Heating Thermostat OFF
Swing
Stop
Thermostat ON in dry
operation using micro
computer
Thermostat OFF in dry
operation using micro
computer
Cooling Thermostat OFF in
cooling
Swing
L*1
OFF or L
Wind direction set
Swing
Set
OFF
Stop
Micro computer control
(including cooling
operation)
L
Wind direction set L
*1. L or LL only on FXFQ models
Function
97
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
Si30-813
9.10 Freeze Prevention
Freeze
Prevention by Off
Cycle (Indoor
Unit)
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor (R2T) of the indoor unit
heat exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze prevention operation in accordance with
the following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below.
Conditions for starting freeze prevention: Temperature is –1°C or less for total of 40 min., or
temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 min.
Conditions for stopping freeze prevention: Temperature is +7°C or more for 10 min.
continuously
Ex: Case where temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 min.
98
Function
Si30-813
Part 5
Test Operation
1. Test Operation ....................................................................................100
1.1 Procedure and Outline .........................................................................100
2. Outside Unit PC Board Layout ............................................................105
3. Field Setting ........................................................................................106
3.1 Field Setting from Remote Controller ...................................................106
3.2 Field Setting from Outside Unit ............................................................122
Test Operation
99
Test Operation
Si30-813
1. Test Operation
1.1
Procedure and Outline
Follow the following procedure to conduct the initial test operation after installation.
1.1.1 Check Work Prior to Turn Power Supply On
Check the below items.
• Power wiring
• Control transmission wiring
between units
• Operation signal to heat
source pump and interlock
wiring from pump
• Interlock circuit
• Earth wire
Check on refrigerant piping, water
piping and piping insulation
Check on air tight test and
vaccume drying
Check on amount of additional
refrigerant charge
Check on stop valves opening
{ Is the wiring performed as specified?
{ Are the designated wires used?
{ Is the grounding work completed?
Use a 500V megger tester to measure the insulation.
• Do not use a megger tester for other circuits than 200V (or
240V) circuit.
{ Are the setscrews of wiring not loose?
{ Is pipe size proper? (The design pressure of this product is
4.0MPa.)
{ Are pipe insulation materials installed securely?
Liquid and gas pipes need to be insulated. (Otherwise causes
water leak.)
{ Is refrigerant piping carried out correctly as per installation
manual?
(Special care is required for multi-outside unit installation.)
{ Is the air tight test and vaccume drying carried out as per
installation manual?
{ Is refrigerant charged up to the specified amount?
If insufficient, charge the refrigerant from the service port of stop
valve on the liquid side with outside unit in stop mode after turning
power on.
{ If the specified amount of refrigerant can not be charged in stop
mode, charge the required refrigerant as per "Additional refrigerant
charge mode" in operation. (Refer page 142)
{ Has the amount of refrigerant charge been recorded on “Record
Chart of Additional Refrigerant Charge Amount”?
{ Check to make sure the all stop valves on outside units are open.
1.1.2 Turn Power On
100
Turn outside unit, indoor unit,
BS unit and heat source water
pump power on.
{ Be sure to turn the power on 6 hours before starting operation to
protect compressors. (to power on clankcase heater)
Confirm LED display on
outside unit's PC board
{ Make sure the display is normal.
Following table shows correct display.
Carry out field setting on
outside unit PC board
{ For field settings, refer to “Field Settings” on and after P122.
After the completion of field settings, set to “Setting mode 1”.
In case of multi-outside unit connection, carry out the field settings
on master unit. (The setting on slave unit is not effective.)
Test Operation
Si30-813
Test Operation
k ON
h OFF
l Blink
Micro
CH selection
computer MODE TEST
Low
normal
noise Demand Multi
LED display (Factory set)
IND
Master Slave
monitor
HAP
H1P
H2P
H3P
H4P
H5P
H6P
H7P
H8P
l
h
h
k
h
h
h
h
h
1 outside unit installation
master
l
h
h
k
h
h
h
h
k
outside unit
multi
slave1
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
installation(*)
slave2
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
* The outside unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit. The other outside unit not connected the control wires will be slave
unit.
1. When Turning On Power First Time
The unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the master power and address
(indoor-outside unit address, etc.).
Status
Outside unit
Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Can also be set during operation described above.
Indoor unit
If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the “UH”
malfunction indicator blinks.
(Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete.)
2. When Turning On Power the Second Time and Subsequent
Tap the RESET button on the outside unit PC board. Operation becomes possible for about 2
minutes. If you do not push the RESET button, the unit cannot be run for up to 10 minutes to
automatically set master power.
Status
Outside unit
Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Can also be set during operation described above.
Indoor unit
If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the operation lamp
lights but the compressor does not operate. (Returns to normal when
automatic setting is complete.)
3. When an Indoor Unit or Outside Unit Has Been Added, or Indoor or Outside Unit PC
Board Has Been Changed
Be sure to push and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds. If not, the addition cannot be
recognized. In this case, the unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the
address (indoor-outside unit address, etc.)
Status
Outside unit
Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Can also be set during operation described above.
Indoor unit
If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the “UH” or “U4”
malfunction indicator blinks. (Returns to normal when automatic setting is
complete.)
Caution When the 400 volt power supply is applyed to "N" phase by mistake,
replace Inverter PC board (A2P) and control transformer (T1R, T2R) in
switch box together.
Test Operation
101
Test Operation
Si30-813
1.1.3 Check Operation
(For the operation to be done for the first time after installation, you need to perform a checking
operation according to this guideline without fail. Otherwise, Abnormal Code “U3” appears and
normal operation cannot be carried out.)
(1) Check the connection of interlock circuit
The outside unit cannot be operated if the
interlock circuit has not been connected.
(2) As necessary, configure the system settings Always perform configuration after turning ON the
onsite by using the dip switch (DS1) and push power. To learn the setting method, refer to the
button switches (BS1 to 5) on the outside unit [Service Precautions] label attached at the cover
PC board (A1P).
of electrical box shown in the figure 27.
Remember, the actual set-tings you have made
After this, close the cover of electrical box.
must be recorded on the [Service Precautions]
label.
(3) Turn ON the power to the outside units and
indoor units.
(4) Start the heat source water pump and fill the
heat source water in the outside unit.
Make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before
starting the operation. This is necessary to warm
the crankcase by the electric heater.
The outside unit cannot be operated if the heat
source water pump is not running.
(5) Make sure that the temperature of heat
The outside unit cannot be operated at a
source water is kept within the operation
temperature outside the operation range.
range (10 - 45°C).
(6) Check the LED on the PC board (A1P) in the outside unit to see if the data transmission is
performed normally.
LED display
(Default status
before delivery)
Microcomputer Page Ready/ Cooler/heater changeover
Low
Error
Bulk
Bulk
Demand
operation
Individual (parent) (child) noise
monitor
HAP
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
Multi
H8P
One outside unit installed
When multiple Master station
outside unit Sub station 1
installed (∗) Sub station 2
LED display:
OFF
ON
Blinking
(∗) The master unit is the outside unit to which the transmission wiring for the
indoor units is connected. The other outside units are sub units.
102
(7) • Using the push button switches (BS1 - 5) on
the P-panel (A1P) of outside unit, carry out a
local setting, if necessary.
• In case of an installation of multiple outside
units, carry out the setting on the master
unit.
(Setting on the slave unit becomes invalid.)
Always carry out the setting only after the power
supply has been applied.
For the method of setting, refer to the label of
“Points to be noted when providing services”
attached to the cover of electrical box (shown in
the figure 27) of the outside unit.(After setting,
record the details of that setting to the label of
“Points to be noted when providing services”
without fail.)
(8) Check all shutoff valve is opened.
If some shutoff valve is closed, open them.
(Refer to “9-10 Shutoff valve operation
procedure”.)
[CAUTION]
Do not leave any shutoff valve closed.
Otherwise the compressor will fail.
For Heat recovery system of cooling and heating:
Open all stop valves on the suction side,
discharge gas side and liquid side.
For cooling and heating switching operation
system:
Open the stop valves on discharge gas side and
liquid side. (Keep the stop valve on suction
side fully closed.)
(9) Perform the check operation following the
instructions printed on the [Service
Precautions] label.
If you push the test run button (BS4) on the Ppanel (A1P) of the outside unit.
for 5 seconds, the test run starts.
If you want to interrupt the test run, push the
RETURN button (BS3) on P-panel (A1P) of the
outside unit. The system continues residual
operation for about 1 minute (maximum 10
minutes) and then stops.
(During test run, you cannot stop it by a command
from a remote controller.)
You need to perform the above settings on the
PC board by accessing the PC board through
the inspection cover on the switch box cover.
Test Operation
Si30-813
Test Operation
Electrical box
Cover of electrical box
Cover for servicing
Inspection cover
Points to be noted when providing services
figure 27
<Cautions for check operation>
z If operated within about 12 minutes after power supply has been applied to the indoor unit
and outside unit, H2P will turn ON but the compressor does not start running. Before start
operation, make sure that the LED display is correct referring to the table (6) of “1.1.3 Check
operation”.
z The system may require up to 10 minutes until it can start the compressor after an operation
start. This is a normal operation to equalize the refrigerant distribution.
z The check operation does not provide any means of checking the indoor units individually.
For that purpose, perform normal operation using the remote controller after the check
operation.
z Check operation is not possible in other modes such as collection mode.
z If the setting of indoor remote controller is changed before the check operation, it may not be
performed correctly and malfunction code “UF” may be displayed.
Remote controller displays malfunction code
Malfunction
Installation error
code
E3
E4
F3
The shutoff valve of an outside unit is left
F6
closed.
UF
U2
U1
U3
Test Operation
The phases of the power to the outside
units are reversed.
The check operation is not completed.
U1
U2
U4
No power is supplied to an outdoor or
indoor unit (including phase interruption).
UF
Incorrect transmission between units
Remedial action
Open the shutoff valve.
Exchange two of the three phases (L1, L2,
L3) to make a positive phase connection.
Complete the check operation.
Check if the power wiring for the outside
units are connected correctly.
(If the power wire is not connected to L2
phase, no malfunction display will appear
and the compressor will not work.)
Check if the refrigerant piping line and the
unit transmission wiring are consistent with
each other.
Recalculate the required amount of
refrigerant from the piping length and
correct the refrigerant charge level by
recovering any excessive refrigerant with a
refrigerant recovery machine.
• Check if the additional refrigerant charge
has been finished correctly.
• Recalculate the required amount of
refrigerant from the piping length and
add an adequate amount of refrigerant.
E3
F6
UF
U2
Refrigerant overcharge
E4
F3
Insufficient refrigerant
U7
UF
UF
E4
If an outdoor multi terminal is connected
when there is one outside unit installed
The operation mode on the remote
controller was changed before the check
operation.
Set the operation mode on all indoor unit
remote controllers to “cooling.”
HJ
The heat source water is not circulating.
Make sure that the water pump is running.
Remove the line from the outdoor multi
terminals (Q1 and Q2).
103
Test Operation
Si30-813
1.1.4 Check of Normal Operation
After the check operation is completed, operate the unit normally.
(Heating is not possible if the outdoor temperature is 24°C or higher. Refer to the Operation
manual.)
Check the below items.
z Make sure the indoor and outside units are operating normally (If a knocking sound can be
heard in the liquid compression of the compressor, stop the unit immediately and then
energize the heater for a sufficient length of time before restarting the operation.)
z Run each indoor unit one at a time and make sure the corresponding outside unit is also
running.
z Check if cold (or hot) air is coming out of the indoor unit.
z Press the fan direction and fan strength buttons on the indoor unit to check if they operate
properly.
Caution
104
<Cautions for normal operation check>
z Once stopping, the compressor will not restart in about 5 minutes even if the Run/Stop
button of an indoor unit in the same system is pressed.
z When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller, the outside units may
continue operating for further 5 minutes at maximum.
z If the system has not undergone any check operation by the test operation button since it
was first installed, an malfunction code “U3” is displayed. In this case, perform check
operation referring to “1.1.3 Check Operation”.
z After the test run, when handing the unit over to the customer, make sure the EL. COMPO.
BOX cover, the inspection door, and the unit casing are all attached.
Test Operation
Si30-813
Outside Unit PC Board Layout
2. Outside Unit PC Board Layout
Outside unit PC board
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor
HAP
(2) Set mode display (LED)
(3) Mode setting switch
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
BS1
BS2
BS3
BS4
BS5
MODE
SET
RETURN
TEST
RESET
H8P
1
2
DS3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1
DS2
(4) Local setting switch
Connection terminal for transmission use
A
B
C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2
Switch cool/heat
Indoor −
Outside unit
Outside −
Outside unit
Multi
outside unit
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor
This monitor blinks while in normal operation, and turns on or off when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Set mode display (LED)
LEDs display mode according to the setting.
(3) Mode setting switch
Used to change mode.
(4) Local setting switch
Used to make local settings.
Test Operation
105
Field Setting
Si30-813
3. Field Setting
3.1
Field Setting from Remote Controller
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the local setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause malfunction.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
3.1.1 Wired Remote Controller <BRC1C61, 62>
UNIT NO.
MODE NO.
SECOND
CODE NO.
.
FIRST
CODE NO.
.
FIELD
SET
MODE
UNIT NO.
SETTING
3
4
.
1 7
TEST
6
5
2
1. When in the normal mode, press the “
” button for a minimum of four seconds, and the
FIELD SET MODE is entered.
2. Select the desired MODE NO. with the “
” button ().
3. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22 and 23 have been
selected), push the “
” button () and select the INDOOR UNIT NO to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
4. Push the “
” upper button () and select FIRST CODE NO.
5. Push the “
” lower button () and select the SECOND CODE NO.
6. Push the “
” button () once and the present settings are SET.
7. Push the “
” button () to return to the NORMAL MODE.
(Example)
If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER CONTAMINATION,
HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to “10” FIRST CODE NO. to “0”, and SECOND CODE NO. to “02”.
106
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
3.1.2 Wireless Remote Controller - Indoor Unit
BRC7C type
BRC7E type
BRC4C type
1. When in the normal mode, push the
button for 4 seconds or more, and operation
then enters the “field set mode.”
2. Select the desired “mode No.” with the
button.
3. Pushing the
button, select the first code No.
4. Pushing the
button, select the second code No.
5. Push the timer
button and check the settings.
6. Push the
button to return to the normal mode.
(Example)
When setting the filter sign time to “Filter Dirtiness-High” in all group unit setting, set the Mode
No. to “10”, Mode setting No. to “0” and setting position No. to “02”.
Test Operation
107
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.1.3 Simplified Remote Controller
BRC2A51
BRC2C51
1. Remove the upper part of remote controller.
2. When in the normal mode, press the [BS6] BUTTON () (field set), and the FIELD SET
MODE is entered.
3. Select the desired MODE No. with the [BS2] BUTTON () (temperature setting ▲) and the
[BS3] BUTTON () (temperature setting ▼).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been
selected), push the [BS8] () BUTTON (unit No.) and select the INDOOR UNIT NO. to be
set. (This operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
5. Push the [BS9] BUTTON () (set A) and select FIRST CODE NO.
6. Push the [BS10] BUTTON () (set B) and select SECOND CODE NO.
7. Push the [BS7] BUTTON () (set/cancel) once and the present settings are SET.
8. Push the [BS6] BUTTON () (field set) to return to the NORMAL MODE.
9. (Example) If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER
CONTAMINATION - HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to “10”, FIRST CODE NO. to “0”, and
SECOND CODE NO. to “02”.
108
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
3.1.4 Setting Contents and Code No. – VRV Indoor Unit
Mode Setting
No. Switch
Note 2 No.
0
10
(20)
1
2
3
11
(21)
3
4
5
6
04
Details
No.
—
—
(1)
—
—
(2)
Long life filter
Use
No use
—
—
(3)
Display
No display
—
—
(4)
OFF
Completion of
airflow
adjustment
Start of airflow
adjustment
—
(5)
Indoor unit turned
ON by thermostat
—
Malfunction
output
(6)
Forced OFF
ON/OFF control
Operation
output
External protection
device input
—
(7)
1°C
0.5°C
—
—
(8)
LL
Set fan speed
—
—
(9)
Light
01:0
02:1
03:2
04:3
05:4
06:5
07:6
08:7
(10)
Not equipped
LL airflow
Equipped
Preset airflow
—
—
—
—
(11)
(12)
N
H
S
—
(13)
F (4 directions)
T (3 directions)
W (2 directions)
—
(14)
Equipped
Not equipped
—
—
(15)
Field set airflow position setting
Draft prevention
Standard
Ceiling Soiling
prevention
—
(16)
5
Setting of the Static Pressure
Selection
6
External Static Pressure Settings
1
Thermostat OFF excess humidity
Direct duct connection
(when the indoor unit and heat
reclaim ventilation unit are
connected by duct directly.) ∗Note 6
Drain pump humidifier interlock selection
Field set selection for individual
ventilation setting by remote controller
High static
—
—
pressure
01:30
02:50
03:60
04:70 05:80 06:90 07:100 08:110
09:120 10:130 11:140 12:150 13:160 14:180 15:200
*7
Not equipped
Equipped
—
—
0
1
2
3
5
Notes :
Test Operation
Thermostat sensor in remote
controller
Display time to clean air filter calculation
(Set when filter sign is not to be displayed.)
Optional accessories output selection (field
selection of output for adaptor for wiring)
ON/OFF input from outside (Set when ON/
OFF is to be controlled from outside.)
Thermostat differential changeover
(Set when remote sensor is to be used.)
OFF by thermostat fan speed
Automatic mode differential
(automatic temperature differential
setting for VRV system heat
recovery series cool/heat)
Power failure automatic reset
Airflow When Cooling Thermostat is OFF
High air outlet velocity
(Set when installed in place with
ceiling higher than 2.7 m.)
Selection of airflow direction (Set when a
blocking pad kit has been installed.)
Airflow direction adjustment (Set at
installation of decoration panel.)
4
15
(25)
Long life filter type
03
Approx.
5,000
hrs.
Approx.
Heavy 1,250
hrs.
Approx.
100 hrs.
Super long life
filter
Standard
filter
0
3
13
(23)
Long life
filter
02
Approx.
10,000
hrs.
Approx.
2,500
hrs.
Approx.
200 hrs.
Super
long life
filter
Airflow adjustment
2
12
(22)
Filter contamination
heavy/light (Setting for
display time to clean air
filter)
(Sets display time to clean
air filter to half when there
is heavy filter
contamination.)
01
7
1
VRV
system
indoor
unit
settings
Second Code No.(Note 3)
Setting Contents
Standard
(17)
(18)
(19)
Not equipped
Equipped
—
—
(20)
Not equipped
Equipped
—
—
(21)
Not equipped
Equipped
—
—
(22)
1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so
they cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Marked
are factory set.
4. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
5. “88” may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the
normal mode.
6. If the setting mode to “Equipped”, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
7. • The FXMQ50·63·80·100·125PVE cannot be set to 30Pa.
• The FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200Pa.
109
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.1.5 Applicable range of Field setting
Ceiling mounted cassette Slim
type
Ceiling
mounted
Round Double Corner duct
flow
flow
type
type
Ceiling
mounted
built-in
type
Ceiling
Mounted
duct type
(Middle
and high
static
pressure)
Ceiling Ceiling
Wall
Floor
mounted suspended mounted standing
duct
type
type
type
type
FXSQ FXMQ-P FXMQ-MA FXHQ
Concealed
Floor
standing
type
New
Details
Ceiling
No.
suspended
cassette
type
FXAQ
FXLQ
FXNQ
FXUQ
{
{
{
{
{
(1)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(2)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
(3)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
(9) (12)
—
—
{
—
—
—
—
—
—
(5)
—
—
—
—
—
{
—
—
—
{
(13)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
{
(14)
—
—
{
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(15)
Airflow direction
adjustment range
{
{
{
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(16)
Field set fan speed
selection
{
—
—
{∗1
—
{∗1
—
{
—
—
—
—
(17)
(18)
FXFQ
FXCQ
FXKQ
FXDQ
Filter sign
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Ultra long life filter
sign
{
{
—
—
—
—
Remote controller
thermostat sensor
{
{
{
{
{
Set fan speed when
thermostat OFF
{
{
{
{
Airflow auto
adjustment
—
—
—
Airflow adjustment
Ceiling height
{
—
Airflow direction
{
Airflow direction
adjustment
(Down flow
operation)
∗1 Static pressure selection
110
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
3.1.6 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes
(1) Filter Sign Setting
If switching the filter sign ON time, set as given in the table below.
Set Time
Filter Specs.
Setting
Standard
Long Life
Ultra Long Life Filter
Contamination Light
Contamination Heavy
200 hrs.
100 hrs.
2,500 hrs.
1,250 hrs.
10,000 hrs.
5,000 hrs.
(2) Ultra-Long-Life Filter Sign Setting
When a Ultra-long-life filter is installed, the filter sign timer setting must be changed.
Setting Table
Mode No.
Setting Switch No.
Setting Position No.
01
Setting
Long-Life Filter
10 (20)
1
02
03
Ultra-Long-Life Filter (1)
—
(3) Selection of Thermistor
Select the thermistor to control room temperature.
Mode No.
First Code No.
10 (20)
2
Second Code No. Thermistor that controls room temperature
Indoor air thermistor for remote controller
01
and suction air thermistor for indoor unit
02
03
Suction air thermistor for indoor unit
Thermistor for remote controller
The factory setting for the Second Code No. is "01" and room temperature is controlled by the
indoor unit suction air thermistor and remote controller thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "02", room temperature is controlled by the suction air
thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "03", room temperature is controlled by the remote
controller thermistor.
(4) "Filter Cleaning" Displayed or Not Displayed
Whether or not to display "Filter Cleaning" after operation of certain duration can be selected.
Test Operation
Mode No.
First Code No.
10 (20)
3
Second Code No.
01
"Filter Cleaning" display
Display
02
No display
111
Field Setting
Si30-813
(5) Airflow Adjustment (AUTO)
External Static Pressure Settings
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below.
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated
quantity.
(b) Select External Static Pressure with Remote Controller Check that 01 (OFF) is set for the
“SECOND CODE NO.” in “MODE NO. 21” for airflow adjustment on an indoor unit basis in
Table 4. The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 01 (OFF) at factory set. Change the “SECOND
CODE NO.” as shown in Table according to the external static pressure of the duct to be
connected.
Mode No.
First Code No.
Second Code No.
7
01
02
OFF
Completion of airflow adjustment
03
Start of airflow adjustment
11 (21)
Airflow adjustment
(6) Optional Output Switching
Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals K1 and K2 of "customized wiring adaptor," an optional
accessory.
Mode No.
First Code No.
Second Code No.
01
12 (22)
03
0
04
Remarks
Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is
provided.
Output linked with "Start/Stop" of remote
controller is provided.
In case of "Malfunction Display" appears
on the remote controller, output is
provided.
(7) External ON/OFF Input
This input is used for "ON / OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T1 terminal of the operation terminal block (X1A) in the electric
component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced stop
Input A
Setting Table
Mode No.
Setting
Switch No.
Setting
Position No.
01
12 (22)
1
02
03
112
Operation by input of the signal A
ON: Forced stop (prohibition of using the remote
controller)
OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
OFF → ON: Permission of operation
ON → OFF: Stop
ON: Operation
OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit
indicates "A0". The other indoor units indicate "U9".
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
(8) Thermostat Switching
Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed. (For details, refer to "9.4
Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation" on page 94.)
Mode No.
First Code No.
12(22)
2
Second Code No.
01
Differential value
1ºC
02
0.5ºC
(9) Airflow Setting When Heating Thermostat is OFF
This setting is used to set airflow when heating thermostat is OFF.
∗ When thermostat OFF airflow volume up mode is used, careful consideration is required
before deciding installation location. During heating operation, this setting takes precedence
over "(7) Fan Stop When Thermostat is OFF."
Mode No.
First Code No.
12 (22)
3
Second Code No.
01
Contents
LL airflow
02
Preset airflow
(10) Setting of Operation Mode to "AUTO"
This setting makes it possible to change differential values for mode selection while in automatic
operation mode.
Mode No.
Setting switch No.
12 (22)
4
01
02
Setting position No.
03
04
05
06
0°C
1°C
2°C
3°C
4°C
5°C
07
08
6°C
7°C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.
(11) Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset
For the air conditioners with no setting for the function (same as factory setting), the units will be
left in the stop condition when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset
or the main power supply is turned on again after once turned off. However, for the air
conditioners with the setting, the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the
main power supply turned on again (return to the same operation condition as that of before
power failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize “Auto restart function after power
failure reset”, utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution 1. The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
the main power supply turned on again. Consequently, the user might be
surprised (with question for the reason why).
2. In the service work, for example, turning off the main power switch during
the unit is in operation, and turning on the switch again after the work is
completed start the unit operation (the fan rotates).
(12) Airflow When Cooling Thermostat is OFF
This is used to set airflow to "LL airflow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
Test Operation
Mode No.
First Code No.
12 (22)
6
Second Code No.
01
Contents
LL airflow
02
Preset airflow
113
Field Setting
Si30-813
(13) Setting of Normal Airflow
Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The setting position No. is set to “01”
at the factory.
„ In the Case of FXAQ
Mode No.
Setting Switch
No.
13(23)
0
Setting Position
Setting
No.
01
Wall-mounted type: Standard
02
03
Wall-mounted type: Slight increase
Wall-mounted type: Normal increase
„ In the Case of FXHQ
Mode No.
First code No.
Second code
No.
Ceiling height (m)
13(23)
0
01
02
2.7 or less
2.7-3.5
„ In the Case of FXFQ25~80 (All round outlet)
Mode
No.
First Second
code
code
No.
No.
0
Ceiling height (m)
02
Standard • All
round outlet
High Ceiling (1)
2.7-3
03
Higher Ceiling (2)
3-3.5
01
13 (23)
Setting
≤2.7
„ In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (All round outlet)
Mode
No.
First Second
code
code
No.
No.
0
Ceiling height (m)
02
Standard • All
round outlet
High Ceiling (1)
3.2-3.6
03
Higher Ceiling (2)
3.6-4.2
01
13 (23)
Setting
≤3.2
„ In the Case of FXFQ25~80 (*24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)
Mode
No.
13 (23)
First Second
code
code
Setting
No.
No.
01
Standard (N)
0
02
03
Ceiling height
4-way Outlets
3-way Outlets
2-way Outlets
Lower than 3.1 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.3 m Lower than 3.8 m
Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
—
„ In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (*24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)
Mode
No.
13 (23)
First Second
code
code
No.
No.
0
Ceiling height
Setting
4-way Outlets
3-way Outlets
01
02
Standard (N)
High Ceiling (H)
03
Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.5 m Lower than 4.2 m
2-way Outlets
Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.6 m Lower than 4.2 m
Lower than 3.9 m Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 4.2 m
—
*1 “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an
individual unit, set the internal mode number in parentheses.
*2 The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for four-direction
(part of corner closed off), three-direction and two-direction outlets, see the installation
manual and technical guide supplied with the separately sold closure material kit.
114
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
„ In the Case of FXUQ71~125
First Second
code
code
Setting
No.
No.
01
Standard (N)
Mode
No.
13 (23)
0
02
03
Ceiling height
4-way Outlets
3-way Outlets
2-way Outlets
Lower than 2.7 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m Lower than 3.8 m
Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 3.5 m Lower than 3.8 m
—
(14) Airflow Direction Setting
Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when optional air outlet
blocking pad has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to “01.”
Setting Table
Mode No.
13 (23)
First Code No.
Second Code
No.
1
01
02
F : 4-direction airflow
T : 3-direction airflow
03
W : 2-direction airflow
Setting
(15) Operation of Downward Flow Flap: Yes/No
Only the model FXKQ has the function.
When only the front-flow is used, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
Setting Table
Mode No.
First Code No.
Second Code No.
Setting
13 (23)
3
01
02
Down-flow operation: Yes
Down-flow operation: No
(16) Setting of Airflow Direction Adjustment Range
Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
Setting Table
Mode No.
13 (23)
First Code No.
Second Code No.
Setting
01
Upward (Draft
prevention)
Standard
4
02
03
Downward (Ceiling
soiling prevention)
∗ Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
(17) Setting of the Static Pressure Selection
„ In the Case of FXDQ20~32PB, FXDQ40~63NB
Test Operation
Model No.
First Code No.
13 (23)
5
Second Code No.
01
External static pressure
Standard (10Pa)
02
High static pressure (30Pa)
115
Field Setting
Si30-813
(18) External Static Pressure Settings (for FXMQ-P model)
MODE NO.
13 (23)
FIRST CODE NO.
06
SECOND CODE NO.
External Static Pressure
01
02
30Pa (*1)
50Pa
03
04
60Pa
70Pa
05
06
80Pa
90Pa
07
08
100Pa
110Pa
09
10
120Pa
130Pa
11
12
140Pa
150Pa
13
14
160Pa
180Pa (*2)
15
200Pa (*2)
The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 07 (an external static pressure of 100 Pa) at factory set.
*1 The FXMQ50 · 63 · 80 · 100 · 125PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa.
*2 The FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
(19) Humidification When Heating Thermostat is OFF
Setting to "Humidification Setting" turns ON the humidifier if suction temperature is 20ºC or
above and turns OFF the humidifier if suction temperature is 18ºC or below when the heating
thermostat is OFF.
Mode No.
First Code No.
Second Code No.
Setting
15 (25)
1
01
02
—
Setting of humidifier
(20) Setting of Direct Duct Connection
This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries
out residual operation for one minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of
preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.)
Mode No.
15 (25)
First Code No.
Second Code No.
Contents
01
Without direct duct
connection
With direct duct
connection equipped
with fan
2
02
(21) Interlocked Operation between Humidifier and Drain Pump
This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Mode No.
15 (25)
First Code No.
Second Code No.
Contents
01
Individual operation of
humidifier
Interlocked operation
between humidifier and
drain pump
3
02
116
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
(22) Individual Setting of Ventilation
This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote controller/
central unit when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
Test Operation
Mode No.
First Code No.
15 (25)
5
Second Code No.
01
Contents
—
02
Individual operation of
ventilation
117
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.1.7 Centralized Control Group No. Setting
BRC1C Type
In order to conduct the central remote control using the central remote controller and the unified
ON/OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating remote
controller.
Make Group No. settings for central remote control using the operating remote controller.
1. While in normal mode, press and hold the
switch for a period of four seconds or
more to set the system to “Field Setting Mode”.”
” button.
2. Select the MODE No. “00” with the “
3. Use the “
” button to select the group No. for each group.
(Group numbers increase in the order of 1-00, 1-01, ... 1-15, 2-00, ... 4-15.)
4. Press “
” to set the selected group No.
5. Press “
” to return to the NORMAL MODE.
MODE NO.
GROUP NO.
UNIT NO.
FIELD SET
MODE
SETTING
TEST
5
4
3
2,6
Note:
„ For simplified remote controller, see the following.
„ For setting group No. of HRV and wiring adaptor for other air conditioners, etc., refer to the
instruction manual attached.
NOTICE
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the attached installation table.
Be sure to keep the installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
118
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
„ Group No. setting by wireless remote controller for centralized control
1. When in the normal mode, push
button for 4 seconds or more, and operation then
enters the “field set mode.”
2. Set mode No. “00” with
button.
3. Set the group No. for each group with
button (advance/backward).
4. Enter the selected group numbers by pushing
button.
5. Push
button and return to the normal mode.
BRC7C Type
BRC7C Type
Group No. Setting
Example
Indoor/Outside Outside/Outside
Centralized Remote
Controller
Indoor/Outside Outside/Outside
F1 F2
F1 F2
F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
1-00
F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Controller
1-03
Caution
Test Operation
F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2
Main RC
RC Sub
1-01
F1 F2 P1 P2
F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2
F1 F2 P1 P2
Group Control by Remote Contoller
(autmatic unit address)
F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
1-04
When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation while "88" is
displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal
display. This is not an operative fault.
119
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.1.8 Setting of Operation Control Mode from Remote Controller
(Local Setting)
The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information in the table below.)
Centralized controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor is
connected)
3.1.9 Contents of Control Modes
Twenty modes consisting of combinations of the following five operation modes with
temperature and operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by
operation modes 0 through 19.
‹ ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn on/off by central remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned on/off by remote controller.)
‹ OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn on by central remote controller only, and off by remote controller
only.
‹ Centralized
Used when you want to turn on by central remote controller only, and turn on/off freely by
remote controller during set time.
‹ Individual
Used when you want to turn on/off by both central remote controller and remote controller.
‹ Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn on/off by remote controller during set time and you do not want
to start operation by central remote controller when time of system start is programmed.
120
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Selection of
Control Mode
No.
Select whether to accept or to reject the operation from the remote controller regarding the operation,
stop, temperature setting and operation mode setting, respectively, and determine the particular
control mode from the rightmost column of the table below.
(Example)
Operation by remote
controller (at time of
unified operation by
centralized control)
Operation by remote
controller (at time of
unified operation by
centralized control)
Temperature
control by
remote
controller
Stop by
remote
controller
Operation
mode setting
by remote
controller
The control
mode is “ 1 ”.
[Rejection]
[Rejection]
[Rejection]
[Acceptance]
[Acceptance]
Control by remote controller
Operation
Operation
mode
Unified operation,
individual operation by Unified stop, individual
central remote
stop by central remote
controller, or operation controller, or timer stop
controlled by timer
Stop
Temperature Operation
control
mode setting
Rejection
ON/OFF control
impossible by
remote controller
Rejection
(Example)
Rejection
(Example)
Rejection
Rejection
(Example)
Only OFF control
possible by remote
controller
Acceptance
(Example)
Acceptance
Rejection
Centralized
Acceptance
Acceptance
Acceptance
Rejection
Individual
Acceptance
Acceptance
Timer operation
possible by remote
controller
Acceptance
(During timer at
ON position only)
Rejection
(During timer at OFF
position)
Rejection
Acceptance
Acceptance
Rejection
Control
mode
0
10
Acceptance
1 (Example)
(Example)
Rejection
Acceptance
11
2
Rejection
Acceptance
12
3
Rejection
Acceptance
13
4
Rejection
Acceptance
14
5
Rejection
Acceptance
15
6
Rejection
Acceptance
16
7
Rejection
Acceptance
17
8
Rejection
Acceptance
18
9
Rejection
19
C : 3P171361-1
Test Operation
121
Field Setting
3.2
Si30-813
Field Setting from Outside Unit
3.2.1 Field Setting from Outside Unit
„ Setting by dip switches
The following field settings are made by dip switches on PC board.
Dipswitch
No.
DS1-1
Caution
Setting
ON
OFF (Factory set)
ON
DS1-2
~DS1-4
OFF (Factory set)
DS2-1
~4
DS3-1,
2
Setting item
Description
Cool/Heat select Used to set cool/heat select by remote controller
equipped with outside unit.
Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
ON
OFF (Factory set)
Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
ON
OFF (Factory set)
Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
DIP switch Setting after changing the main PC board (A1P) to spare parts PC board
When you change the main PC board (A1P) to spare parts PC board, please carry out the
following setting.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
DS1
1 2 3 4
DS2
DIP Switch Detail
DS No.
Item
Contents
DS1-1
—
—
DS1-2 Domestic/Overseas
setting
ON
Domestic Japan 200V (Mainly for domestic Japan)
OFF Overseas
400V (Mainly for overseas)
DS1-3
—
—
DS1-4
—
—
DS2-1 Domestic/Overseas
setting
DS2-2 HP setting
(Horse power)
DS2-3
DS2-4
ON
Overseas
OFF Domestic Japan
DS2-2
DS2-3
DS2-4
8
ON
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
ON
OFF
Refer “DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting detail” on next page.
122
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
“Detail of DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting” (for Overseas general)
Unit
Heat Pump / Recovery
(8HP)
RWEYQ8PY1
Heat Pump / Recovery
(10HP)
RWEYQ10PY1
RWEYQ10PYL
Heat Pump / Recovery
(10HP)
RWEYQ10PTL
Setting method (
ON
Set DS2-1 and DS2-2 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4
Set DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4
BSVQ250PV1
BSVQ250PV13
BSVQ250PV18(A)(B)
BSVQ250PV19
Test Operation
1 2 3 4
ON
Set DS1-2, DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4
Setting method (
Unit
BSVQ160PV1
BSVQ160PV13
BSVQ160PV18(A)(B)
BSVQ160PV19
BSVQ60PVJU
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
BSVQ100PV1
BSVQ100PV13
BSVQ100PV18(A)(B)
BSVQ100PV19
BSVQ36PVJU
represents the position of switches)
represents the position of switches)
ON
Set DS1-3 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
Set DS1-4 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
Set DS1-3 and DS1-4 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
123
Field Setting
Si30-813
„ Setting by push button switches
The following settings are made by push button switches on PC board.
In case of multi-outside unit system, various items should be set with the master unit.
(Setting with the slave unit is disabled.)
The master unit and slave unit can be discriminated with the LED indication as shown below.
H1P
H2P
H3P
H4P
H5P
H6P
H7P
H8P
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
l
h
Master unit
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
(Factory setting)
BS1
BS2
BS3
BS4
BS5
MODE
SET
RETURN
TEST
RESET
There are the following three setting modes.
c Setting mode 1 (H1P off)
Initial status (when normal) : Used to select the cool/heat setting. Also indicates during
“abnormal”, “low noise control” and “demand control”.
d Setting mode 2 (H1P on)
Used to modify the operating status and to set program addresses, etc. Usually used in
servicing the system.
e Monitor mode (H1P blinks)
Used to check the program made in Setting mode 2.
„ Mode changing procedure
Using the MODE button, the modes can be changed as follows.
Setting mode 2
(Normal)
Push and hold the BS1
(MODE button) for 5 seconds.
Setting mode 1
Push the BS1(MODE button)
one time.
Monitor mode
Push the BS1(MODE button) one time. MODE
MODE
On
MODE
Blinking
Off
H1P
H1P
H1P
(Set): Select mode with BS2 (SET button) in each selection step.
Press BS1 (MODE button) for more than 5 sec.
Setting mode 2
Setting item selection (Set)
Press BS3
(RETURN button).
Setting condition
selection (Set)
Press BS3
(RETURN button).
Setting mode 1
(Initial condition)
Press BS1(MODE button).
Monitor mode
Check item selection (Set)
Press BS3
(RETURN button).
Contents display
Press BS3
(RETURN button).
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press BS3
(RETURN button).
Press BS1
(MODE button).
Press BS1
(MODE button).
124
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
a. “Setting mode 1”
“Normally, “Setting mode 1” is set.
In case of other status, push MODE
button (BS1) one time and set to
“Setting mode 1”.
<Selection of setting items>
Push the SET button (BS2) and set
LED display to a setting item you
want.
z Regarding setting item No. 1,5 only
the present status is displayed. For
the respective description, refer to
the table shown on lower right.
z The cool/heat selection setting can
be changed on setting item 2, 3, 4.
→ After setting, push the RETURN
button (BS3) and decide the
item.
No.
Setting (displaying) item
1
Display for malfunction /
preparing / test run
2
C/H selector (individual)
3
C/H selector (Master)
4
C/H selector (Slave)
5
Demand operation
∗
∗
LED display example
H1P
H2P
H3P
H4P
H5P
H6P
H7P
h
h
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
h
h
k
h
k
h
h
h
h
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
∗ Setting No. 1, 5, 6 are the present status display only.
Display for malfunction/preparing/test-run
Normal
Malfunction
Preparing/Test-run
h
h
h
h
k
l
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
Display during demand operation
Normal
During demand operation
When the RETURN button (BS3) is
pushed, the status becomes the initial
status of “Setting mode 1”.
h
h
H3P to H5P LED
display changes
depending on
setting No. 2, 3, 4.
k : ON
h : OFF
l : Blinking
Test Operation
125
Field Setting
b. “Setting mode 2”
Push and hold the MODE button
(BS1) for 5 seconds and set to
“Setting mode 2”.
Si30-813
No.
1
2
4
Sets address for cool/heat unified operation.
demand address
Address for demand operation
Number of units for
sequential starting Sets the number of units for sequential starting.
Allows forced operation of indoor unit fan while unit is
stopped. (H tap)
6
8
9
Te setting
Tc setting
Target evaporation temperature for cooling
Target condensation temperature for heating
<Selection of setting items>
12
13
20
21
26
<Selection of setting conditions>
Push the SET button (BS2) and set
to the setting condition you want.
↓
Push the RETURN button (BS3) and
decide the condition.
Description
Indoor unit forced
fan H
Indoor unit forced
operation
5
Push the SET button (BS2) and set
the LED display to a setting item
shown in the table on the right.
↓
Push the RETURN button (BS3) and
decide the item. (The present setting
condition is blinked.)
Setting item
Cool/heat unified
address
28
External low noise
setting / Demand
setting
AIRNET address
Additional
refrigerant charge
operation setting
Refrigerant
collection mode
setting
Interlock abnormal
display setting
Power transistor
check mode
∗Check after
disconnection of
compressor wires
30
Demand setting 1
32
Normal demand
setting
Allows forced operation of indoor unit.
Reception of external low noise or demand signal
Set address for AIRNET.
Carries out additional refrigerant charge operation.
Sets to refrigerant collection mode.
Used for trouble diagnosis of DC compressor. Since the
waveform of inverter is output without wiring to the
compressor, it is convenient to probe whether the trouble
comes from the compressor or PC board.
Changes target value of power consumption when
demand control 1 is input.
Normally enables demand control 1 without external
input. (Effective to prevent a problem that circuit breaker
of small capacity is shut down due to large load.)
Push the RETURN button (BS3) and
set to the initial status of “Setting
mode 2”.
∗ If you become unsure of how to
proceed, push the MODE button
(BS1) and return to setting mode 1.
126
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
No.
Setting item
38
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
master unit
operation
prohibition in multioutside-unit
system)
39
40
Test Operation
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
slave unit 1
operation
prohibition in multioutside-unit
system)
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
slave unit 2
operation
prohibition in multioutside-unit
system)
Description
Used to temporarily prohibit the applicable outside unit
from operating should there be any faulty part in multioutside-unit system. Since the comfortable environment
is extremely impaired, prompt replacement of the part is
required.
127
Field Setting
Si30-813
Setting item display
No.
1
Setting item
Cool / Heat
Unified address
MODE
H1P
k
TEST
H2P
h
IND
H3P
h
C/H selection
Master Slave
H4P
H5P
h
h
Low
noise
H6P
h
Setting condition display
Demand
H7P
k
Address
0
Binary number
1
(6 digits)
~
31
2
Low noise/demand
address
k
h
h
h
h
k
h
Address
0
Binary number
1
(6 digits)
1 unit
Number of units for
sequential starting
k
h
h
h
k
h
h
2 units
3 units
5
6
Indoor forced fan H
Indoor forced
operation
k
h
h
h
k
h
k
Normal operation
k
h
h
h
k
k
h
Normal operation
Indoor forced fan H
Indoor forced operation
Low (Level L)
Normal (Level M)
High 8
Te setting
k
h
h
k
h
h
h
High High (Level H)
High High Low
9
Tc setting
k
h
h
k
h
h
k
Normal (factory setting)
High
External low noise/
12 demand setting
13 Airnet address
k
k
h
h
h
h
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
k
External low noise/demand:
NO
External low noise/demand:
YES
Address
0
Binary number
1
(6 digits)
Additional refrigerant
20 operation setting
k
h
k
h
k
h
h
Refrigerant charging: OFF
Refrigerant recovery
21 mode setting
k
h
k
h
k
h
k
Refrigerant recovery: OFF
26 Interlock abnormal
display setting
k
h
k
k
h
k
h
OFF
128
Refrigerant charging: ON
Refrigerant recovery: ON
khkkkkk
khhhhhk
khhhhkh
khhhhkk
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhk
khhhhkh ∗
khhhhkk
khhhkhh
khhhkhk
khhhkkh
khhhkkk
khhhhhk
khhhhkh ∗
khhhkhh
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhh ∗
khhhhhk
~
63
ON
khkkkkk
khhhhhh ∗
khhhhhk
~
31
4
∗ Factory set
khhhhhh ∗
khhhhhk
khkkkkk
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Setting item display
No.
Setting item
Power transistor
28 check mode
MODE
H1P
TEST
H2P
k
h
IND
H3P
k
C/H selection
Master
Slave
H4P
H5P
k
k
Low
noise
H6P
Demand
H7P
h
h
Setting condition display
OFF
ON
60 % demand
30 Demand setting 1
k
h
k
k
k
k
h
70 % demand
80 % demand
Continuous demand
32 setting
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
Emergency
operation
(Master unit with
38 multi-outside-unit
system is inhibited to
operate.)
k
k
h
h
k
k
h
Emergency
operation
(Slave unit 1 with
39 multi-outside-unit
system is inhibited to
operate.)
k
Emergency
operation
(Slave unit 2 with
40 multi-outside-unit
system is inhibited to
operate.)
k
Test Operation
OFF
ON
OFF
k
k
h
h
h
k
k
h
k
h
∗ Factory set
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhk
khhhhkh ∗
khhhkhh
khhhhhk ∗
khhhhkh
khhhhhk ∗
Master unit operation:
Inhibited
khhhhkh
OFF
khhhhhk ∗
Slave unit 1 operation:
Inhibited
khhhhkh
OFF
khhhhhk ∗
Slave unit 2 operation:
Inhibited
khhhhkh
k
h
129
Field Setting
Si30-813
c. Monitor mode
No.
To enter the monitor mode, push the
MODE button (BS1) when in
“Setting mode 1”.
Push the RETURN button (BS3) and
switches to the initial status of
“Monitor mode”.
∗ Push the MODE button (BS1) and
returns to “Setting mode 1”.
H2P
H4P
H5P
H6P
Data display
H7P
l h h h h h h
1
C/H unified address
2
Low noise/demand address
4
Airnet address
5
Number of connected indoor units
6
Number of connected BS units
l
l
l
l
l
7
Number of connected zone units
(excluding outdoor and BS unit)
l h h h k k k
8
Number of outside units
l h h k h h h
9
Number of connected BS units
l h h k h h k
Lower 4 digits:
upper
10
Number of connected BS units
l h h k h k h
Lower 4 digits:
lower
11
Number of zone units (excluding
outdoor and BS unit)
l h h k h k k
Lower 6 digits
12
Number of terminal blocks
l h h k k h h
Lower 4 digits:
upper
13
Number of terminal blocks
l h h k k h k
Lower 4 digits:
lower
14
Contents of malfunction (the
latest)
l h h k k k h
Malfunction
code table
15
Contents of malfunction
l h h k k k k
Refer page
166.
16
Contents of malfunction
20
Contents of retry (the latest)
21
Contents of retry (1 cycle before)
22
Contents of retry (2 cycle before)
(1 cycle before)
(2 cycle before)
l
l
l
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
k
k
h
k
k
k
h
k
h
h
k
h
h
h
k
k
h
h
k
h
See below
Lower 6 digits
h
h
k
h
Setting item 0 Display contents of “Operation/backup operation setting,
and others”
Operation /backup operation
setting
ON
Te setting
L
OFF
M
H ~
Tc setting
L
M
H
130
H3P
Operation/backup operation
setting
<Confirmation on setting contents>
Push the RETURN button (BS3) to
display different data of set items.
LED display
H1P
0
<Selection of setting item>
Push the SET button (BS2) and set
the LED display to a setting item.
Setting item
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
k
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Push the SET button and match with the LEDs No. 1 - 15, push the RETURN button, and
enter the data for each setting.
★ Data such as addresses and number of units is expressed as binary numbers; the two
ways of expressing are as follows:
The No. 1 cool/heat unified address is expressed as a binary
number consisting of the lower 6 digits. (0 - 63)
16
32
4
8
1
2
In c the address is 010110 (binary number), which translates to
16 + 4 + 2 = 22 (base 10 number). In other words, the address is
22.
64 16
No.12 128 32
4
No.13
8
1
2
The number of terminal blocks for No. 12 and 13 is expressed as
an 8-digit binary number, which is the combination of four upper,
and four lower digits for No. 12 and 13 respectively. (0 - 128)
In d the address for No. 12 is 0101, the address for No. 13 is
0110, and the combination of the two is 01010110 (binary
number), which translates to 64 + 16 + 4 + 2 = 86 (base 10
number). In other words, the number of terminal block is 86.
★ See the preceding page for a list of data, etc. for No. 0 - 22.
Test Operation
131
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.2.2 Cool / Heat Mode Switching (In case of heating and simultaneous
cooling / heating) operation connection
Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each BS Unit by Cool/Heat Selector.
(1) Before turning on the power of the BS unit, set the DIP switch (DS1-1) on the BS unit PC
board as following.
(2) Then, connect the COOL/HEAT selector to the terminal A, B and C of the terminal block
X2M on the BS unit PC board.
1
2
ON
X2M
A
OFF
B C
DS1
COOL/HEAT selector
<Note>
This setting is read into the micro controller when turning on the power supply.
Be sure to make the setting before turning on the power supply.
Moreover, be sure to close the lid of the switch box after setting.
•
•
•
EXAMPLE OF TRANSMISSION LINE CONNECTION
• Example of connecting transmission wiring.
Connect the transmission wirings as shown in the Fig. 1.
In case of the indoor unit connect as the cool-only unit, it wire
he terminal F1 F2 of the last BS unit.
OUT/D.BS
F1 F2
IN/D
F1 F2
OUT/D.BS
Final BS unit
To the indoor unit where
the selection of heating
and cooling is available.
Use 2-core wires.
(There is no polarity.)
TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
F1 F2 F1 F2
F1
F1 F2
F1 F2
OUT/D.BS
COOL/HEAT
selector
B
C
F1 F2
F1
F2
IN/D
F1 F2
OUT/D.BS
Final BS unit
COOL/HEAT
selector
Fig. 1
132
Cooling only
A
BS unit B
BS unit A
F1 F2
F2
IN/D
C
Final unit
F1 F2
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
A
B
1st unit
Use 3-core wires.
(Keep in mind the polarity.)
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
F1 F2 F1 F2
IN/D
OUT/D.BS
F1 F2
Cool/heat selector remote
control wiring
Branch wiring
Outside unit
F1 F2
A
B
C
F1 F2
F1 F2
COOL/HEAT
selector
Indoor unit for cooling
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
3.2.3 Cool / Heat Mode Switching (In case of heat pump connection)
There are the following 5 cool/heat switching modes.
c Set cool/heat separately for each outside unit system by indoor unit remote controller.
d Set cool/heat separately for each outside unit system by cool/heat switching remote
controller.
e Set cool/heat for more than one outside unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outside unit by indoor unit remote controller.
f Set cool/heat for more than one outside unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outside unit by cool/heat switching remote controller.
c Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each Outside System by Indoor Unit Remote Controller
‹ It does not matter whether or not there is outside - outside unit wiring.
‹ Set outside unit PC board DS1-1 to “indoor” (factory set).
‹ Set cool/heat switching to “individual” for “Setting mode 1” (factory set).
Test Operation
133
Field Setting
Si30-813
d Set Cool / Heat Separately for Each Outside Unit System by Cool/Heat Switching Remote Controller
‹ It does not matter whether or not there is outside - outside unit wiring.
‹ Set outside unit PC board DS1-1 to “outside” (factory set).
‹ Set cool/heat switching to “individual” for “Setting mode 1” (factory set).
134
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
e Set Cool / Heat for More Than One Outside Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified
Master Outside Unit by Indoor Unit Remote Controller
‹ Install the outside unit external control adaptor on either the outside unit-outside unit, indooroutside, or transmission line.
‹ Set outside unit PC board DS1-1 to “Indoor” (factory set).
‹ In setting mode 1, set the outside unit you want to give cool/heat selection permission to as
the group master, and set the other outside units as group slave units.
‹ Set the outside unit external control adaptor SS1 to Unified (factory set) or Cool, and SS2 to
No (factory set).
Multi outside units connection
Test Operation
135
Field Setting
Si30-813
f Set Cool / Heat for More Than One Outside Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified
Master Outside Unit by Cool/Heat Switching Remote Controller
‹ Add and change the following items to e.
★ Install cool/heat switching remote controller on the group master outside unit.
★ Set SS1 on the group master outside unit PC board.
Supplementation on e and f.
When switching cool/heat for each adaptor PC board with the use of more than one adaptor PC
board, set the address of the adaptor PC board DS1 and DS2 so that it matches the unified
cool/heat address of outside unit PC board.
136
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Address setting for e and f (Set lower 5 digits with binary number.) [No.0 to No.31]
Address
No.
Adaptor PC board
Outside unit PC board LED
Set with setting mode 2
DS2
DS1
No 0
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
No 1
No 2
No 3
No 4
~
~
~
No 30
30
30
31
31
No 31
k ON
h OFF
Upper position (ON)
Lower position (OFF)
(The shaded part shows knob)
Test Operation
137
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.2.4 Setting of Demand Operation
In order to save the power consumption, the capacity of outside unit is saved with control
forcibly by using “Demand 1 Setting” or “Demand 2 Setting”.
To operate the unit with this mode, additional setting of “Normal Demand Setting” or
external input by external control adaptor is required.
[Demand 1 setting]
Setting
Standard for upper limit of power consumption
Demand 1 setting 1
Demand 1 setting 2 (factory setting)
Approx. 60%
Approx. 70%
Demand 1 setting 3
Approx. 80%
[Demand 2 setting]
Setting
Demand 2 setting 2 (factory setting)
Standard for upper limit of power consumption
Approx. 40%
★ Other protection control functions have precedence over the above operation.
138
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Setting of Demand Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the outside unit external control
adaptor (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external instructions (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outside unit).
1. While in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 12 (Setting of external
low noise/demand operation) to "YES".
2. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1
level) and then set the setting condition to targeted mode.
B. When the normal demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control
adaptor for outside unit is not required.)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", make setting of the set item No. 32 (Setting of normal demand) to
"ON".
2. While in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1 level) and then
set the setting condition to targeted mode.
Test Operation
139
Field Setting
Si30-813
Image of operation in the case of A
Power consumption
Rated power consumption
80 % of rated power consumption
70 % of rated power consumption
60 % of rated power consumption
Demand level 1 instructing Demand level 2 instructing Demand level 3 instructing
Power consumption set by
"Demand 1 level setting".
40 % of rated power consumption
Forced thermostat OFF
(Fan operation)
The power
consumption during
the demand level 1
instructing can be
set with the
"Demand 1 level
setting".
("70 % of rated
power consumption"
has been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption
Rated power consumption
80 % of rated power consumption
70 % of rated power consumption
60 % of rated power consumption
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting".
When the "Normal
demand setting" is
set to ON ("OFF"
has been set at
factory.) , the power
consumption can be
set with the
"Demand 1 level
setting". ("70 % of
rated power
consumption" has
been set at factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B
The power
consumption can be
set with the
"Demand 1 level
setting". ("70 % of
rated power
consumption" has
been set at factory.)
Power consumption
Rated power consumption
80 % of rated power consumption
70 % of rated power consumption
60 % of rated power consumption
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting".
40 % of rated power consumption
Forced thermostat OFF
(Fan operation)
140
+Demand level 2 instructing +Demand level 3 instructing
+During continuous demand operation,
when the external demand instruction is
received repeatedly, the instruction with
higher demand level has the precedence.
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Detailed Setting Procedure and Demand Control
1. Setting mode 1 (H1P off)
c In setting mode 2, push the BS1 (MODE button) one time. → Setting mode 1 is entered and
H1P lights off.
During the setting mode 1 is displayed, “In low noise operation” and “In demand control” are
displayed.
2. Setting mode 2 (H1P on)
c In setting 1, push and hold the BS1 (MODE button) for more than 5 seconds. → Setting
mode 2 is entered and H1P lights.
d Push the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the Setting No.
you want.
e Push the BS3 (RETURN button) one time, and the present setting content is displayed.
→ Push the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting
content (as shown below) you want.
f Push the BS3 (RETURN button) two times. → Returns to c.
g Push the BS1 (MODE button) one time. → Returns to the setting mode 1 and turns H1P off.
d
c
Setting
No.
Setting
contents
e
Setting No. indication
Setting No. indication
Setting
contents
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
12
30
32
External
low noise /
Demand
setting
{
Demand
setting 1
{
Normal
demand
setting
{
Setting mode indication section
Test Operation
z
z
z
z
{
z
{
{
z
{
{
z
z
{
z
Setting No. indication section
z
z
z
Setting contents indication (Initial setting)
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
NO
(Factory
set)
{
z
z
z
z
z
l
YES
{
z
z
z
z
l
z
60 % of
rated power
consumption
{
z
z
z
z
z
l
70 % of
rated power
consumption
(Factory
setting)
{
z
z
z
z
l
z
80 % of
rated power
consumption
{
z
z
z
l
z
z
OFF
(Factory
setting)
{
z
z
z
z
z
l
Continuous
demand 1
fixed
{
z
z
z
z
l
z
Set contents indication section
141
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.2.5 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging Operation
When additional refrigerant is not charged all with outside unit in stop mode, operate the outside
unit and charge the liquid refrigerant from the service port of liquid stop value. The additional
charging operation is activated by pushbutton switch on the outside unit PC board.
[Additional refrigerant charge total flow]
STEP 1
Confirm DISCHARGE,
SUCTION and LIQUID Stop
valves closed.
Additional
charge
Turn off the power.
without
Compressor
operation
Charge through Service port of
LIQ. Stop valve.
Is all refrigerant charged?
YES
Open DISCHARGE GAS,
LIQUID, SUCTION GAS Stop
valve.
STEP 2
Additional
charge
Open DISCHARGE & SUCTION GAS Stop valve.
LIQUID side stop valve:
1. Fully open the liquid side stop valve.
2. After ten minutes, fully close liquid line stop
valve and then, open the valve by turning
180º.
Note: The stop valve operations are different
from heat pump and heat recovery
connection, refer following page for
detail.
with
END of charge method.
Compressor
operation
Disconnect charge hose.
Start additional refrigerant charge mode.
(Setting Mode 2 : Refer operation procedure
detail on next page.)
Is all refrigerant charged?
YES
Open LIQUID Stop valve.
NO
STOP refrigerant charge model
142
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Caution
Refrigerant cannot be charged until field wiring has been completed.
Refrigerant may only be charged after performing the leak test and the vacuum drying.
When charging a system, care shall be taken that its maximum permissible charge is never
exceeded, in view of the danger of liquid hammer.
Charging with an unsuitable substance may cause explosions and accidents, so always ensure
that the appropriate refrigerant (R-410A) is charged.
Refrigerant containers shall be opened slowly.
Always use protective gloves and protect your eyes when charging refrigerant.
„ This outside unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe sizes and pipe
lengths some systems require additional charging of refrigerant.
„ Determine the amount of refrigerant to be added by referring to the table, write it down on
the included “Added Refrigerant” plate and attach it to the rear side of the front cover.
Note: refer to the example of connection for the amount to be added.
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (1)-normally
„ Charge the refrigerant to the liquid pipe in its liquid state. Since R-410A is a mixed
refrigerant, its composition changes if charged in a state of gas and normal system operation
would no longer be assured.
„ Make sure to use installation tools you exclusively use on R-410A installations to withstand
the pressure and to prevent foreign materials from mixing into the system.
1. Before charging, check whether the tank has a siphon attached or not.
How to charge with a siphon attached tank.
Charge with the tank upright.
There is a siphon tube
inside, so there is no need
to turn the tank upside-down.
How to charge with other tank.
Charge with the tank upside-down.
2. After the vacuum drying is finished, charge the additional refrigerant in its liquid state
through the liquid shutoff valve service port.
Taking into account following instructions:
„ Check that gas and liquid shutoff valves are closed.
„ Stop the compressor and charge the specified weight of refrigerant.
(If the outside unit is not in operation and the total amount cannot be charged, follow the
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (2) shown next page.)
Test Operation
143
Field Setting
Si30-813
„ Procedures for charging additional refrigerant.
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (2)-by Additional refrigerant charge operation
About the system settings for additional refrigerant charge operation, refer to the [Service
Precaution] label attached on the electric box cover in the outside unit.
1. Fully open all shutoff valves (valve A and valve B must be left fully closed).
2. After ten minutes, fully close liquid line shutoff valve and then, open the valve by turning 180°.
Start the additional refrigerant charge operation.
See [Service precautions] Label for detail.
If it is difficult to charge the refrigerant additionally, decrease the water temperature or warm
the refrigerant tank.
(Warm the refrigerant tank with a stupe or a warm hot water of 40 degrees or less.)
3. After the system is charged with a specified amount of refrigerant, press the RETURN button
(BS3) on the PC board (A1P) in the outside unit to stop the additional refrigerant charge
operation.
4. Immediately open both liquid-side and gas-side shutoff valve.
(If do not open the shutoff valve immediately, liquid seal may cause the pipe to burst.)
Shutoff valve operation procedure
Caution
Do not open the shutoff valve until checking of device and installation conditions are completed.
If the shutoff valve is left open without turning on power, it may cause refrigerant to buildup in
the compressor, leading to insulation degradation.
Opening shutoff valve
1. Remove the cap and turn the valve counterclockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Turn it until the shaft stops.
Do not apply excessive force to the shutoff valve. Doing so may break the valve body, as the
valve is not a backseat type. Always use the hexagon wrench.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
Closing shutoff valve
1. Remove the cap and turn the valve clockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Securely tighten the valve until the shaft contacts the main body seal.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
* For the tightening torque, refer to the table on the next page.
144
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Tightening torque
Tightening torque N-m (Turn clockwise to close)
Shutoff valve
size
Shaft (valve body)
Cap
(valve lid)
Service port
Flare nut
Gas side
accessory
pipe (1)
Liquid side
5.4-6.6
Hexagonal
wrench 4 mm
13.5-16.5
11.5-13.9
32.7-39.9
—
Gas side
27-33
Hexagonal
wrench 10 mm
36-44
11.5-13.9
—
22-28
(Refer to figure below)
Caution
„
„
„
„
„
Do not damage the cap sealing.
Always use a charge hose for service port connection.
After tightening the cap, check that no refrigerant leaks are present.
After working, securely tighten the cover of service port without fail by specified torque.
When loosening a flare nut, always use two wrenches in combination. When connecting the
piping, always use a spanner and torque wrench in combination to tighten the flare nut.
„ When connecting a flare nut, coat the flare (inner and outer faces) with ether oil or ester oil
and hand-tighten the nut 3 to 4 turns as the initial tightening.
„ Do not forget to open the stop valve before starting operation.
[Operation state]
• Compressor frequency : Normal cooling PI control, upper limit 177Hz
Y1E, electronic expansion valve : Normal cooling control
• Y5S, Y7S, 4 way valve: OFF
Y3E: 0 pls
• Indoor unit expansion valve (All unit) : 1024 pulse
• Indoor unit fan : H tap
Test Operation
145
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.2.6 Setting of Refrigerant Recovery Mode
When carrying out the refrigerant collection on site, fully open the respective expansion valve of
indoor and outside units
[Operation procedure]
c In setting mode 2 with units in stop mode, set “B Refrigerant Recovery / Vacuuming mode”
to ON. The respective expansion valve of indoor and outside units are fully opened. (H2P
turns to display “TEST OPERATION” (blinks), “TEST OPERATION” and “IN CENTRALIZED
CONTROL” are displayed on the remote controller, and the operation is prohibited.
d Collect the refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery unit. (See the instruction attached to the
refrigerant recovery unit for more detal.)
e Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
3.2.7 Setting of Vacuuming Mode
In order to perform vacuuming operation at site, fully open the expansion valves of indoor and
outside units to turn on some solenoid valves.
[Operating procedure]
c With Setting Mode 2 while the unit stops, set (B) Refrigerant recovery / Vacuuming mode to
ON. The expansion valves of indoor and outside units fully open and some of solenoid
valves open.
(H2P blinks to indicate the test operation, and the remote controller displays "Test
Operation" and "In Centralized control", thus prohibiting operation.)
After setting, do not cancel “Setting Mode 2” until completion of Vacuuming operation.
d Use the vacuum pump to perform vacuuming operation.
e Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
146
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
3.2.8 Check Operation
To prevent any trouble in the period of installation at site, the system is provided with a test
operation mode enabling check for incorrect wiring, stop valve left in closed, coming out (or
misplacing with suction pipe thermistor) of discharge pipe thermistor and judgment of piping
length, refrigerant overcharging, and learning for the minimum opening degree of motorized valve.
CHECK OPERATION FUNCTION
LED display (H1P~H7P) (k:ON
Unit stopping
l:BLINKING h:OFF)
Press the TEST button for 5 seconds.
Step 1
Pressure equalizing
10 sec to 10 minutes
Step 2
Cooling start control
Step 3
Stability waiting operation
3~5 minutes
10 minutes
Step4~6
Step 7
Judgment function
• Stop valve close check
• Wrong wiring check
• Refrigerant over change check
• Piping length check
3 minutes
Pump down residual operation
10 sec. ~ 5 minutes
Step 8
Standby for restarting
5 minutes
Completion
: Normal completion
: Abnormal completion
Test Operation
147
Field Setting
Si30-813
3.2.9 Power Transistor Check Operation
When the inverter system malfunctions (malfunction of inverter, INV compressor), to locate
where the malfunction occurs, switching to the power transistor check mode of inverter in the
service mode setting enables not to judge the position detection signal malfunction but to output
waveform only during inverter operation. (The waveform can be checked by disconnecting the
wiring of compressor.)
After the completion of checks, return the system to the previous mode and wait for 30 seconds
or more until the discharge of capacitor is completed. Then, conduct a subsequent work.
Notes:
Be sure to disconnect the compressor wiring when conducting the check operation mentioned
above.
When the output voltage is approx. 100~200 V (10 Hz) and the voltage balance between
phases U-V, V-W, W-U is within ±5%, the inverter PC board is normal.
Refer the detail power transistor check to page 313.
3.2.10 Emergency Operation
If the compressor cannot operate, this control inhibits any applicable compressor or outside unit
from operating to perform emergency operation only with the operative compressor or outside
unit.
Caution
"For making a compressor unable to operate due to malfunction, etc., be sure to
conduct the work with emergency operation setting.
Never execute work such as disconnection of the power cable from magnet contactor.
(Otherwise, other normal compressors may malfunction.)
∗ Because the units will be operated in the combination with which oil pressure
equalization between compressors cannot be performed.
3.2.11 Restrictions for Emergency Operation
• If the emergency operation is set while the outside unit is in operation, the outside unit stops
once after pump-down residual operation (a maximum of 5 minutes elapsed).
3.2.12 In the Case of Multi-Outside-Unit System
Automatic backup operation
With multi-outside-unit system, if a certain outside unit system malfunctions (i.e., the system
stops and indoor unit remote controller displays the malfunction), by resetting the system with
the indoor unit remote controller, the applicable outdoor unit is inhibited from operating for 8
hours, thus making it possible to perform emergency operation automatically.
However, in the event any of the following malfunctions occurs, automatic backup operation
can be performed.
Malfunctions under which automatic backup operation can be performed:
• E3, E4, E5, E7
• F3
• J3, J5, J6, J7, J9, JA, JC
• L4, L5, L8, L9, LC
• U2, UJ
148
Test Operation
Si30-813
Field Setting
Emergency operation with settings in service mode
∗ “Inhibition of operation” is set with each outside unit.
Make the following settings with the master unit. (Setting with the slave unit becomes disabled.)
∗ Discriminate the operating status of the master unit/slave units through the following LED
display.
LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P---H7P H8P
Master:
Slave 1:
Slave 2:
(Factory set)
• To inhibit the master unit from operating → Set
setting mode 2 from No. 38 to No. 2.
LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for 5 sec. or
more.
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 38 times.
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once.
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once.
(5) Press the RETURN button (BS3) twice.
(6) Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
• To inhibit the slave unit 1 from operating → Set
setting mode 2 from No. 39 to No. 2.
(Factory set)
LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for 5 sec. or
more.
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 39 times.
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once.
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once.
(5) Press the RETURN button (BS3) twice.
(6) Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
• To inhibit the slave unit 2 from operating → Set
setting mode 2 from No. 40 to No. 2.
(Factory set)
LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for 5 sec. or
more.
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 40 times.
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once.
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once.
(5) Press the RETURN button (BS3) twice.
(6) Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
(Factory set)
• In the case of multi-outside-unit system, when the
above “Inhibition of operation” is set, outside unit rotation is not functional.
Notes :
Test Operation
Reset the power supply during the outside unit is stopping to cancel the
automatic backup operation forcibly.
149
Field Setting
150
Si30-813
Test Operation
Si30-813
Part 6
Troubleshooting
1. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................154
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................154
Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller .........................................155
Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller .....................................156
Operation of the Remote Controller’s Inspection /
Test Operation Button ..........................................................................159
1.5 Remote Controller Service Mode .........................................................160
1.6 Remote Controller Self-Diagnosis Function .........................................162
2. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller ....................168
2.1 “A0” Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device............................168
2.2 “A1” Indoor Unit: PC Board Defect ........................................................169
2.3 “A3” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control System
(S1L).....................................................................................................170
2.4 “A6” Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload...............................172
2.5 “A7” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (MA).......................179
2.6 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................181
2.7 “A9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (20E) ........................................................182
2.8 “AF” Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit .............................................184
2.9 “AJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device ..........185
2.10 “C1” Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission
(Between Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)............................186
2.11 “C4” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger....................................................................................188
2.12 “C5” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas Pipes .........189
2.13 “C6” Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination
(Between Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)............................190
2.14 “C9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air.........191
2.15 “CC” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ....................192
2.16 “CJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in
Remote Controller ................................................................................193
2.17 “E1” Outside Unit: PC Board Defect......................................................194
2.18 “E3” Outside Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch ..........................195
2.19 “E4” Outside Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor ..........................197
2.20 “E5” Compressor Motor Lock ................................................................199
2.21 “E9” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y3E)...............................................201
2.22 “F3” Outside Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature ..................203
2.23 “F6” Refrigerant Overcharged ...............................................................204
2.24 “HJ” Malfunction of Water System.........................................................206
2.25 “J3” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor
(R3T) ....................................................................................................208
2.26 “J4” Malfunction of Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor (R4T) .........209
2.27 “J5” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Suction Pipe .........................................................................................210
Troubleshooting
151
Si30-813
2.28 “J7” Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T) .................................211
2.29 “J9” Malfunction of Sub Cooling Heat Exchanger Outlet Thermistor
(R5T) ....................................................................................................212
2.30 “JA” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Pressure Sensor .....213
2.31 “JC” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Suction Pipe Pressure Sensor .........214
2.32 “L4” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Rise (R1T) ......................................................................215
2.33 “L5” Outside Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal................................216
2.34 “L8” Outside Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal .......................................217
2.35 “L9” Outside Unit: Inverter Start Up Error .............................................218
2.36 “LC” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Transmission between
Inverter and Control PC Board .............................................................219
2.37 “P1” Outside Unit: Inverter Over-Ripple Protection ...............................221
2.38 “P4” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Sensor ............................................................................222
2.39 “U0” Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure......................................................223
2.40 “U1” Reverse Phase, Open Phase ........................................................225
2.41 “U2” Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure ......................226
2.42 “U3” Check Operation not Executed......................................................228
2.43 “U4” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units.......................229
2.44 “U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Remote
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................231
2.45 “U7” Malfunction of Transmission between Outside Units.....................232
2.46 “U8” Malfunction of Transmission between Master and
Slave Remote Controllers ....................................................................234
2.47 “U9” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and
Outside Units in the Same System.......................................................235
2.48 “UA” Indoor & Outside Units and Remote Controller
Combination Failure .............................................................................237
2.49 “UC” Address Duplication of Centralized Controller...............................238
2.50 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................239
2.51 “UF” Refrigerant System not Set, Incompatible Wiring/Piping...............241
2.52 “UH” Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System
Address Undefined...............................................................................242
3. Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller) ..............................243
3.1 “M1” PC Board Defect ...........................................................................243
3.2 “M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control .......................................................244
3.3 “MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control...............................................................................245
3.4 “MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........................................247
4. Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)...............................................248
4.1 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................248
4.2 “M1” PC Board Defect ...........................................................................250
4.3 “M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control .......................................................251
4.4 “MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control...............................................................................252
4.5 “MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........................................254
152
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
5. Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) .............................255
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................................................255
5.2 Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Single Blink)..........................................................................257
5.3 Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Double Blink) ........................................................................260
Troubleshooting
153
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
Si30-813
1. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
1.1
The INSPECTION / TEST Button
The following modes can be selected by using the [Inspection/Test Operation] button on the
remote control.
Indoor unit settings can be made
• Filter sign time
• Airflow direction
• Others
Depress Inspection/Test Operation button
for more than 4 seconds.
Local
setting
mode
Service
mode
Depress Inspection/Test Operation button
for more than 4 seconds.
Service data can be obtained.
• Malfunciton code history
• Temperature data of various sections
Service settings can be made.
• Forced fan ON
• Airflow direction/volume setting
Press Inspection/Test Operation button once.
Normal
mode
Press Inspection/Test Operation button once.
Or after 30 minutes
Press Inspection/Test Operation
button once.
After 10 seconds
Following codes can be checked.
• Malfunction codes
Inspection
• Indoor model code
mode
• Outdoor model code
Test
operation
mode
Thermostat is forcibly turned on.
Press Inspection/Test Operation
button once.
154
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
1.2
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller
Explanation
If operation stops due to malfunction, the remote controller’s operation LED blinks, and
malfunction code is displayed. (Even if stop operation is carried out, malfunction contents are
displayed when the inspection mode is entered.) The malfunction code enables you to tell what
kind of malfunction caused operation to stop. See page 163 for malfunction code and
malfunction contents.
Operation LED
ON/OFF button
Display of indoor unit for
which a malfunction has
been detected
Inspection display
Malfunction code
Inspection/Test button
Note:
1. Pressing the INSPECTION/TEST button will blink the check indication.
2. While in check mode, pressing and holding the ON/OFF button for a period of five seconds or
more will clear the failure history indication shown above. In this case, on the codes display,
the malfunction code will blink twice and then change to “00” (=Normal), the Unit No. will
change to “0”, and the operation mode will automatically switch from check mode to normal
mode (displaying the set temperature).
Troubleshooting
155
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
1.3
Si30-813
Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller
In the Case of
BRC7C ~ Type
If equipment stops due to a malfunction, the operation indicating LED on the light reception
section flashes.
The malfunction code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The
malfunction code is displayed when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the
malfunction code of the last problem is displayed.)
1. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to select “Inspection.”
The equipment enters the inspection mode. The “Unit” indication lights and the Unit No.
display shows flashing “0” indication.
2. Set the Unit No.
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the Unit No. display until the buzzer (*1) is
generated from the indoor unit.
*1 Number of beeps
3 short beeps : Conduct all of the following operations.
1 short beep : Conduct steps 3 and 4.
Continue the operation in step 4 until a buzzer remains ON. The continuous buzzer indicates
that the malfunction code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : No abnormality.
3. Press the MODE selector button.
The left “0” (upper digit) indication of the malfunction code flashes.
4. Malfunction code upper digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the malfunction code upper digit until the
malfunction code matching buzzer (*2) is generated.
„ The upper digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN buttons are
pressed.
*2 Number of beeps
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits matched. (Malfunction code confirmed)
2 short beeps : Upper digit matched.
1 short beep : Lower digit matched.
5. Press the MODE selector button.
The right “0” (lower digit) indication of the malfunction code flashes.
6. Malfunction code lower digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the malfunction code lower digit until the
continuous malfunction code matching buzzer (*2) is generated.
156
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
„ The lower digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN buttons are
pressed.
Troubleshooting
157
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
158
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
1.4
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
Operation of the Remote Controller’s Inspection / Test
Operation Button
Normal display (No display)
Inspection/test
operation
Push the button.
0
Unit
L0
Malfunction code
Inspection
Inspection mode
Inspection/test
operation
0
Unit
L0
Malfunction code
Inspection
Malfunction code blinks when a malfunction occurs.
Example of capacity code display
0 7 1... Capacity code
F... Indoor unit system code
C... Indoor unit type code
J... Progression code
Display
Example model
FXCQ25
028
FXFQ63
071
Push the button.
Indoor unit system code
Product classification
System classification
1
VRV system
(VAV indoor unit)
2
VRV system
Outdoor air processing unit
F
VRV system
Standard indoor unit
H
VRV system
New ceilling suspended cassette
Display
071
FCJ
Indoor unit model code display
Indoor unit type code
Inspection/test
operation
Push the button.
Display
–––
AA1
Outdoor or (outside) unit model code display
Inspection/test
operation
Push the button.
Test operation
Test operation mode
Troubleshooting
Push the button.
A
Wall mounted
FXAQ
C
Double flow
FXCQ
E
Corner
FXKQ
F
Multi flow
FXFQ
H
Ceiling suspended
FXHQ
J
Built-in
FXSQ
L
Floor standing
FXLQ
P
Concealed ceiling duct
FXMQ
L
Concealed floor standing type
FXNQ
3
Slim Ceilling mounted duct
FXDQ
Outdoor (or outside) unit model code
Display
Inspection/test
operation
Model
Type
Type
Model
AA1
VRV System Inverter K Series
RSXYP
AA3
R-407C VRV PLUS Series
RXYP
A92
VRV Heat Recovery Series
RSEYP
AA5
High COP type R-407C L Series
RSXYP-L
AAA
VRV II
RXYQ-M
A96
VRV II Heat Recovery
REYQ-M
AFC
VRV II Water cooled inverter series
RWEYQ-M
AFE
VRV III Water cooled inverter series
RWEYQ-P
159
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
1.5
Si30-813
Remote Controller Service Mode
How to Enter the
Service Mode
Service Mode
Operation
Method
160
1. Select the mode No.
Set the desired mode No. with the
button.
(For wireless remote controller, Mode 43 only can be set.)
2. Select the unit No. (For group control only)
Select the indoor unit No. to be set with the time mode
. (For wireless remote controller,
button.)
3. Make the settings required for each mode. (Modes 41, 44, 45)
In case of Mode 44, 45, push
button to be able to change setting before setting work.
(LCD “code” blinks.)
For details, refer to the table in next page.
4. Define the setting contents. (Modes 44, 45)
Define by pushing the timer
button.
After defining, LCD “code” changes blinking to ON.
5. Return to the normal operation mode.
Push the
button one time.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
Mode
No
40
Function
Malfunction
hysteresis display
Contents and operation method
Remote controller display example
Display malfunction hysteresis.
The history No. can be changed with the
button.
Unit 1
Malfunction code
2-U4
40
Malfunction code
Hystory No: 1 - 9
1: Latest
41
Display of sensor
and address data
Display various types of data.
Select the data to be displayed with the
button.
Sensor data
0: Thermostat sensor in remote controller.
1: Suction
2: Liquid pipe
3: Gas pipe
Sensor data display
Unit No.
Sensor type
1 1
41
27
Address data
4: Indoor unit address
5: Outside unit address
6: BS unit address
7: Zone control address
8: Cool/heat group address
9: Demand / low noise address
Temperature ºC
Address display
Unit No.
Address type
1 8
41
1
Address
43
44
Forced fan ON
Individual setting
Manually turn the fan ON by each unit. (When
you want to search for the unit No.)
By selecting the unit No. with the
button,
you can turn the fan of each indoor unit on
(forced ON) individually.
Unit 1
43
Set the fan speed and airflow direction by each
unit
Select the unit No. with the time mode
button.
Set the fan speed with the
button.
Set the airflow direction with the
Unit 1
Code
1 3
button.
Fan speed 1: low
3: High
45
Unit No. transfer
44
Airflow direction
P0 - P4
Transfer unit No.
Select the unit No. with the
button.
Set the unit No. after transfer with the
button.
Present unit No.
Unit
45
1
Code
02
Unit No. after
transfer
46
47
This function is not used by VRV lIl R-410A Heat Pump 50 / 60Hz.
Troubleshooting
161
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
1.6
Si30-813
Remote Controller Self-Diagnosis Function
The remote controller switches are equipped with a self diagnosis function so that more
appropriate maintenance can be carried out. If a malfunction occurs during operation, the
operation lamp, malfunction code and display of malfunctioning unit No. let you know the
contents and location of the malfunction.
When there is a stop due to malfunction, the contents of the malfunction given below can be
diagnosed by a combination of operation lamp, INSPECTION display of the liquid crystal display
and display of malfunction code. It also lets you know the unit No. during group control.
Operation lamp
ON/OFF button
Display of indoor unit for
which a malfunction has
been detected
Inspection display
162
Malfunction code
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Indoor Unit
Outside Unit
Outside Unit
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
Malfunction
code
Operation
lamp
A0
A1
l
l
Error of external protection device
PC board defect, E2 PROM defect
168
169
A3
A6
l
l
Malfunction of drain level control system (S1L)
Fan motor (M1F) lock, overload
Abnormal indoor fan motor
170
172
173
A7
A8
k
l
Malfunction of swing flap motor (MA)
Abnormal power supply voltage
179
181
A9
AF
l
k
Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve (20E)
Drain level above limit
182
184
AH
AJ
k
l
Malfunction of air filter maintenance
Malfunction of capacity determination device
—
185
C1
l
186
C4
l
Failure of transmission (between indoor unit PC board and fan PC
board)
Malfunction of thermistor (R2T) for heat exchanger (loose
connection, disconnection, short circuit, failure)
C5
l
189
C6
l
Malfunction of thermistor (R3T) for gas pipes (loose connection,
disconnection, short circuit, failure)
Failure of combination (between indoor unit PC board and fan PC
board)
C9
l
CC
Malfunction contents
Page
Referred
188
190
k
Malfunction of thermistor (R1T) for suction air (loose connection,
disconnection, short circuit, failure)
Malfunction of humidity sensor system
191
192
CJ
E1
k
l
Malfunction of thermostat sensor in remote controller
PC board defect
193
194
E3
E4
l
l
Actuation of high pressure switch
Actuation of low pressure sensor
195
197
E5
E9
l
l
Compressor motor lock
Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve (Y1E,
Y3E)
199
201
F3
F6
l
l
Abnormal discharge pipe temperature
Refrigerant overcharged
203
204
HJ
J3
l
l
Malfunction of water system
Malfunction of discharge pipe thermistor (R3T)
(loose connection, disconnection, short circuit, failure)
206
208
J4
J5
l
l
Malfunction of heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T)
Malfunction of thermistor (R2T) for suction pipe (loose connection,
disconnection, short circuit, failure)
209
210
J7
J9
l
l
Malfunction of liquid pipe thermistor (R6T)
Malfunction of subcooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor (R5T)
211
212
JA
JC
l
l
Malfunction of discharge pipe pressure sensor
Malfunction of suction pipe pressure sensor
213
214
L0
L4
l
l
Inverter system error
Malfunction of inverter radiating fin temperature rise
—
215
L5
L6
l
l
Inverter compressor abnormal
Compressor motor coil grounding or short circuit
216
—
L8
L9
l
l
Inverter current abnormal
Inverter start up error
217
218
LA
LC
l
l
Malfunction of power unit
Malfunction of transmission between inverter and control PC
board
—
219
P1
P4
l
l
Inverter over-ripple protection
Malfunction of inverter radiating fin temperature sensor
221
222
163
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
System
Centralized
Control and
Schedule
Timer
Heat Reclaim
Ventilation
Si30-813
Malfunction
code
Operation
lamp
Page
Referred
U0
k
Low pressure drop due to refrigerant shortage or electronic
expansion valve failure
223
U1
U2
l
l
Reverse phase, open phase
Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure
225
226
U3
U4
l
l
Check operation not executed
Malfunction of transmission between indoor units
228
229
U5
l
231
U5
h
Malfunction of transmission between remote controller and indoor
unit
Failure of remote controller PC board or setting during control by
remote controller
U7
U8
l
l
Malfunction of transmission between outside units
Malfunction of transmission between master and slave remote
controllers (malfunction of slave remote controller)
232
234
U9
l
Malfunction of transmission between indoor and outside units in
the same system
Indoor & outside units and remote controller combination failure
235
Malfunction contents
231
UA
l
UC
UE
k
l
Address duplication of centralized controller
Malfunction of transmission between centralized controller and
indoor unit
238
239
248
UF
UH
l
l
Refrigerant system not set, incompatible wiring / piping
Malfunction of system, refrigerant system address undefined
241
242
M1
k or h
PC board defect
M8
k or h
Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for
centralized control
243
250
244
251
MA
k or h
Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control
MC
k or h
Address duplication, improper setting
64
65
k
k
68
6A
237
245
252
247
254
Indoor unit’s air thermistor error
Outside air thermistor error
—
—
k
k
Damper system alarm
—
—
6A
6F
l
k
Damper system + thermistor error
Malfunction of simple remote controller
—
—
6H
94
k
l
Malfunction of door switch or connector
Internal transmission error
—
—
The system operates for malfunction codes indicated in black squares, however, be sure to check and repair.
164
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
165
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
Si30-813
Malfunction code indication by outdoor unit PC board
Contents of malfunction
To enter the monitor mode, push the
MODE button (BS1) when in
“Setting mode 1”.
Malfunction
code
* Refer to P.130 for Monitor mode.
Abnormal discharge pressure
HPS activated
E3
Abnormal suction pressure
Abnormal Pe
E4
Compressor lock
Detection of INV compressor lock
E5
Over load, over current,
Instantaneous over current of DC fan motor
E7
abnormal lock of outdoor unit fan motor
Detection of DC fan motor lock
Malfunction of electronic expansion valve
EV1
E9
EV3
<Selection of setting item>
Push the SET button (BS2) and set
the LED display to a setting item.
Abnormal position signal of outside unit fan motor
Abnormal position signal of DC fan motor
H7
Faulty sensor of outside air temperature
Faulty Ta sensor
H9
Abnormality in water system
* Refer to P.130 for Monitor mode.
<Confirmation of malfunction 1>
HJ
Abnormal discharge pipe temperature
Abnormal Td
F3
Abnormal heat exchanger temperature
Refrigerant over charge
F6
Faulty sensor of discharge pipe temperature
Faulty Tdi sensor
J3
Faulty sensor of heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor Faulty Tg sensor
J4
Faulty sensor of suction pipe temperature
Faulty Ts sensor
J5
Faulty sensor of receiver temperature
Faulty Tl sensor
J7
Faulty sensor of subcool heat exchanger temperature Faulty Tsh sensor
Push the RETURN button (BS3)
once to display "First digit" of
malfunction code.
J9
Faulty sensor of discharge pressure
Faulty Pc sensor
JA
Faulty sensor of suction pressure
Faulty Pe sensor
JC
Inverter radiation fin temperature rising
Over heating of inverter radiation fin temperature
L4
DC output over current
Inverter instantaneous over current
L5
Electronic thermal switch
Electronic thermal switch 1
L8
Electronic thermal switch 2
Out-of-step
Speed down after startup
<Confirmation of malfunction 2>
Lightening detection
Push the SET button (BS2) once to
display "Second digit" of malfunction
code.
Detail
description
on next
page.
Stall prevention (Limit time)
Stall prevention (Current increasing)
L9
Stall prevention (Faulty startup)
Abnormal wave form in startup
Out-of-step
Transmission error between inverter and outdoor unit Inverter transmission error
<Confirmation of malfunction 3>
Push the SET button (BS2) once to
display "master or slave1 or slave2"
and "malfunction location".
LC
Open phase/Power supply imbalance
Imbalance of inverter power supply voltage
P1
Faulty temperature sensor inside switch box
Faulty thermistor of inverter box
P3
Faulty temperature sensor of inverter radiation fin
Faulty thermistor of inverter fin
P4
Incorrect combination of inverter and fan driver
Incorrect combination of inverter and fan driver
PJ
Gas shortage
Gas shortage alarm
U0
Reverse phase
Reverse phase error
U1
Abnormal power supply voltage
Insufficient inverter voltage
U2
Inverter open phase (phase T)
Charging error of capacitor in inverter main circuit
U3
No implementation of test-run
Transmission error between indoor and outdoor unit I/O transmission error
Transmission error between outdoor units, transmission error
U4
O/O transmission error
U7
Indoor unit system malfunction in other system or
U9
between thermal storage units, duplication of IC address
Transmission error of other system
Push the RETURN button (BS3) and
switches to the initial status of
“Monitor mode”.
∗ Push the MODE button (BS1) and
returns to “Setting mode 1”.
166
other unit of own system
Erroneous on-site setting
Abnormal connection with excessive number of indoor units
UA
Conflict of refrigerant type in indoor units
UH
Faulty system function
Incorrect wiring (Auto address error)
Transmission error in accessory devices, conflict
Malfunction of multi level converter, abnormality in
UJ
in wiring and piping, no setting for system
conflict check
UF
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
1
Confirmation of malfunction 1
Malfunction
code
LED1 LED2 LED3
l
h
k
LED4 LED5
h
h
Confirmation of malfunction 2
Confirmation of malfunction 3
LED6 LED7 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7
l
l
E7
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
l
l
l
h
h
l
l
h
l
l
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
E9
l
k
h
l
h
h
l
L8
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
l
l
h
h
l
l
h
l
h
l
h
k
l
l
h
h
l
l
l
h
l
h
h
l
l
l
h
h
l
h
l
h
h
h
h
l
l
l
l
h
l
h
l
l
l
h
h
h
l
h
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
l
l
h
h
h
h
l
l
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
L9
l
k
h
l
h
h
l
l
k
k
h
h
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
h
h
h
l
h
h
h
l
h
h
l
l
h
h
h
h
h
l
h
h
h
h
l
h
l
l
h
l
h
l
h
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
U7
l
l
l
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
l
l
l
h
l
l
h
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
U9
l
k
h
l
h
h
l
l
k
k
h
h
UA
l
k
h
l
h
l
h
l
k
k
h
h
l
l
l
h
k
h
k
h
k
k : ON
l : Blink
h : OFF
l
l
l
h
l
l
l
h
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
h
h
h
h
h
h
E3
E4
E5
H7
l
h
k
h
l
h
h
l
h
k
h
l
h
l
l
h
k
h
l
l
h
H9
HJ
F3
F6
J3
J4
J5
J7
J9
JA
JC
L4
L5
LC
P1
l
h
k
l
h
h
h
l
h
k
l
h
h
l
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U3
U4
UH
UJ
UF
k : ON
l : Blink
h : OFF
Malfunction code 1st
digit display section
Malfunction code 2nd
digit display section
Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Troubleshooting
h h
h l
l h
Malfunction
location
167
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote
Controller
2.1
“A0” Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device
Remote
Controller
Display
A0
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When an open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set to
"external ON/OFF terminal".
Supposed
Causes
„ Actuation of external protection device
„ Improper field set
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1
and T2 of the indoor
unit terminal
block.
YES
Actuation of external protection
device.
NO
ON/OFF
input from
outside (mode No. 12,
first code No. 1) has been
set to external protection
device input (second
code No. 03)
by remote
controller.
NO
168
YES
Change the second code No. to
"01" or "02" .
Indoor unit PC board replacement.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
2.2
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
“A1” Indoor Unit: PC Board Defect
Remote
Controller
Display
A1
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Check data from E²PROM.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When data could not be correctly received from the E²PROM
E²PROM : Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned off.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Turn power supply OFF, then
power ON again.
Does
the system return
to normal?
NO
Troubleshooting
YES
External factor other than
malfunction (for example,
noise etc.).
Replace the indoor unit PC
board.
169
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.3
Si30-813
“A3” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control
System (S1L)
Remote
Controller
Display
A3
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXSQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXMQ, FXUQ, FXHQ (Option), FXMQ200·250M (Option),
FXAQ (Option)
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
By float switch OFF detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When rise of water level is not a condition and the float switch goes OFF.
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
„
170
220~240V power supply is not provided
Defect of float switch or short circuit connector
Defect of drain pump
Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
Defect of indoor unit PC board
Loose connection of connector
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is power supply
220~240V provided?
NO
Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
The float
switch is connected to
X8A of the indoor unit
PC board.
NO
YES
The float
switch contact is
forming a short circuit
(continuity check
with X8A or X15A
disconnected)
YES
Connect either a short circuit
connector or float switch and
turn on again.
Becomes
normal when X8A of
the indoor unit PC board
is short circuited
NO
Defect of indoor unit PC board.
YES
NO
The float switch
functions normally.
YES
YES
The drain
pump is connected
to X25A or terminals Y1
and Y2 of the
indoor unit PC
board.
NO
YES
NO
Water builds up
in the drain pan.
A short
circuit connector is
connected to
X8A.
Loose connection of connector.
NO
Replace float switch.
Modify the float switch's
connection and turn on again.
NO
Connect the drain pump and
turn on again.
YES
The drain
pump works when
the power supply is reset
for the indoor
unit.
YES
Check the drain piping for
clogging or upward slope, etc.
NO
The voltage
of terminals Y1
and Y2 or X25A is
220~240 V (within
5minutes of resetting
the power
supply).
YES
Troubleshooting
NO
Replace indoor unit PC board.
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
171
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.4
Si30-813
“A6” Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload
Remote
Controller
Display
A6
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXDQ, FXHQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detection by failure of signal for detecting number of turns to come from the fan motor
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When number of turns can’t be detected even when output voltage to the fan is maximum
Supposed
Causes
„ Fan motor lock
„ Disconnected or faulty contact between fan motor and PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the
wiring from the
fan motor securely connected
to connectors X4A and X27A on the
indoor unit PC
board?
NO
Connect the connector correctly.
Check the faulty contact of
connector or broken wire etc.
YES
Disconnect the connectors with
power supply and check the
voltage between 1 and 3 of
connector X4A.
Is there
APPROX. DC
12 Volt between 1 and 2
pins?
NO
172
YES
Check for wiring of indoor unit fan
motor and motor itself.
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
“A6” Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor
Remote
Controller
Display
A6
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXAQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect abnormal fan rotation with the signal from the fan motor
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When fan rotation does not increase
Supposed
Causes
„ Disconnected/short-circuited fan motor harnesses or disconnected connectors
„ Faulty fan motor
(Disconnection and insulation failure)
„ Abnormal signal from the fan motor
(Circuit breakdown)
„ Faulty PC board
„ Instantaneous disturbance of power supply voltage
„ Fan motor lock
(Caused by the motor or external factors)
„ Fan does not rotate because foreign particles are trapped in it.
„ Disconnected connector between PC board A1P and A2P
Troubleshooting
173
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Turn off the power supply.
Are there
foreign particles
around the fan?
YES
Remove the foreign particles.
NO
Are the
harness from the
fan motor and the harness
of A1P fan motor (fixed to
X20A) connected
properly?
NO
Connect properly.
YES
Can the
fan be removed
from the junction connector
between the fan motor and A1P
and rotated easily
with hands?
NO
Replace the fan motor.
YES
Check the fan motor
connector. ∗
Does the
resistance between pins
satisfy the judgment
criteria?
∗Refer to the figure in following
page.
NO
Replace the fan motor.
YES
Are
heavy current PC board
(A1P) and low current PC board
(A2P) connected
properly?
NO
Connect properly.
YES
Replace the indoor PC board.
174
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
[Check on connector of fan motor (Power supply cable)]
(1)Turn off the power supply.
Measure the resistance between phases of U,V,W at the motor side connectors (three-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector or
relay connector is disconnected.
Troubleshooting
Red
U
White
V
Black
W
Measure the resistance
values between phases
U,V,W.
175
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Remote
Controller
Display
Si30-813
A6
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXMQ50~125P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detection from the current flow on the fan PC board.
Detection from the RPM of the fan motor in operation.
Detection from the position signal of the fan motor.
Detection from the current flow on the fan PC board when the fan motor starting operation.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
„
„
„
„
Supposed
Causes
„ The clogging of a foreign matter.
„ The disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A).
„ The disconnection of the connectors between the indoor PC board (A1P) and fan PC board
An overcurrent flows.
The RPM is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
An overcurrent flows.
(A2P).
„ A failure in fan PC board (A2P).
„ A failure in the fan motor.
176
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Caution
Turn off the power and wait for
10 minutes.
There is a
foreign matter around
the fan.
YES
Remove the foreign matter.
NO
The fan
motor connectors (X1A
and X2A) of the fan PC board (A2P)
are disconnected.
YES
Connect correctly.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor
PC board (A1P) and the fan
PC board (A2P) are
disconnected.
YES
Connect correctly.
NO
The fuse
(F3U, white) on the fan
PC board (A2P) is not in a
conduction state.
NO
Replace the fan
PC board (A2P).
YES
The fan can be
moved lightly by hand after
the fan motor connector of the
fan PC board (A2P) is
removed.
NO
Replace the fan motor.
YES
The resistance
between the power wire
terminals of the fan motor and
motor frame (meal part) is
1 MΩ or below.
YES
Replace the fan motor.
NO
Remove the power wire
connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases (*1).
A
Troubleshooting
177
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
A
The resistors among
U, V, and W are unbalanced or
short-circuited.
NO
Replace the fan motor.
YES
Remove the signal connector
from the fan motor and check
the resistance (*2).
Between VCC and GND
terminals, and between GND
and HW, HV, or HU terminals
are short-circuited.
YES
Replace the fan motor.
NO
Turn on the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor PC
YES
board (A1P) blinks and the HAP
lamp of the fan PC board
(A2P) is off.
Replace the fan PC
board (A2P).
NO
Replace the fan motor.
*1. Measurement of power wire connector.
Remove the X1A connector from the fan PC board (A2P) and
measure the resistance between the U and V, V and W, and W
and U phases of the motor connector (with five conductors) and
check that each phase are balanced (within a permissible
dispersion range of ±20%).
*2. Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between
GND and VCC, HW, HV, or HU terminals of the motor connector
(with five conductors).
Connector power wire use (X1A)
5 Red
U
4
3 White
V
2
1 Black
178
W
Connector signal wire use (X2A)
5 Gray
GND
4 Pink
Vcc
3 Orange
Hw
2 Blue
HV
1 Yellow
HU
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
2.5
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
“A7” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (MA)
Remote
Controller
Display
A7
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXCQ, FXHQ, FXKQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Utilizes ON/OFF of the limit switch when the motor turns.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When ON/OFF of the microswitch for positioning cannot be reversed even though the swing flap
motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Defect of swing motor
Defect of connection cable (power supply and limit switch)
Defect of airflow direction adjusting flap-cam
Defect of indoor unit PC board
179
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is power supply
220~240V provided?
NO
Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
Indoor unit
is a model equipped
with a swing flap
function
NO
Replace indoor unit PC board.
YES
The swing
motor works when
the power supply is turned
off and then back
on.
YES
NO
The connector
is connected to X9A of
the indoor unit PC
board.
NO
Connect the connector to X9A
and turn on again.
YES
The limit switch
functions normally.
NO
Replace swing motor.
YES
After
turning
the swing-flap
ON and then
stopping with the
remote controller, the
voltage of X6A of the indoor
unit PC board is 220 ~ 240
VAC (60 Hz) / 220 VAC
(50 Hz) when turnedon
again (within 30
seconds of
turning on
again).
The connecting
cable is short-circuited
or disconnected.
YES
Replace the limit switch
connecting cable.
NO
NO
Replace indoor unit PC board.
YES
The connecting cable
has no continuity.
YES
Replace the power supply
connecting cable.
NO
When
the airflow
direction flap's cam
mechanism is disconnected
from the swing motor,
operation is normal
when turned
on again.
YES
180
NO
Replace swing motor.
Take the cam mechanism
apart, reassemble and turn on
again.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
2.6
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Abnormal Power Supply Voltage
Remote
Controller
Display
A8
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXMQ40~125P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect malfunction checking the input voltage of fan motor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the input voltage of fan motor is 150V and below, or 386V and above.
Supposed
Causes
The possible causes are:
Power-supply voltage malfunction.
Connection defect on signal line.
Wiring defect.
Instantaneous blackout, others.
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Check the condition of the
power source.
Check if power-supply
voltage is 220V - 240V
± 10%.
Check if there is power
open phase or faulty
wiring.
Check if power-supply
voltage side unbalance is
within 6V.
There are
problems on the condition
of power source described
above.
YES
Correct any fault.
NO
"A8"
Reoccurrence of
malfunction.
YES
Check and correct each wiring.
NO
It is possible to have external
factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous blackout.
Troubleshooting
181
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.7
Si30-813
“A9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (20E)
Remote
Controller
Display
A9
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detection by failure of signal for detecting number of turns to come from the fan motor
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When number of turns can’t be detected even when output voltage to the fan is maximum
Supposed
Causes
„ Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
„ Defect of connecting cable
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The
electronic
expansion valve is
connected to X7A of the
indoor unit PC
board.
YES
Normal
when coil check
(∗1) of the moving part of
the electronic expansion
valve is
checked.
NO
NO
After connecting, turn the power
supply off and then back on.
Replace the moving part of the
electronic expansion valve.
YES
The connecting
cable is short-circuited or
disconnected.
NO
182
YES
Replace the connecting cable.
If you turn the power supply off
and turn on again, and it still does
not help, replace the indoor unit
PC board.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
∗1: Coil check method for the moving part of the electronic expansion valve
Discount the electronic expansion valve from the PC board and check the continuity between
the connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No.
1. White
2. Yellow
3. Orange
4. Blue
5. Red
6. Brown
×
{
Approx.
300Ω
×
×
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
×
1. White
2. Yellow
{
Approx.
300Ω
3. Orange
×
4. Blue
5. Red
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
6. Brown
{: Continuity
× : No continuity
(1) White
White (1)
Red (5)
Orange (3)
(2) Yellow
φ1
M
φ3
φ2
φ4
(3) Orange
(4) Blue
Yellow Brown Blue (5) Red
(2)
(6)
(4)
(6) Brown
Troubleshooting
183
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.8
Si30-813
“AF” Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit
Remote
Controller
Display
AF
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXSQ, FXKQ, FXMQ, FXDQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Water leakage is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation while the compressor is in
non-operation.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is in non-operation.
Supposed
Causes
„ Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking
„ Defect of drain pipe (upward slope, etc.)
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Field drain
piping has a defect such as
upward sloping.
YES
Modify the drain piping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional accessory)
is installed on the
indoor unit.
YES
Check if the humidifier unit is
leaking.
NO
Defect of indoor unit PC board.
184
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
2.9
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
“AJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination
Device
Remote
Controller
Display
AJ
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PC board, and whether the value is normal or abnormal
is determined.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Operation and:
1. When the capacity code is not contained in the PC board’s memory, and the capacity setting
adaptor is not connected.
2. When a capacity that doesn’t exist for that unit is set.
Supposed
Causes
„ You have forgotten to install the capacity setting adaptor.
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The indoor
unit PC board was replaced
with a replacement
PC board.
NO
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
YES
The indoor
unit is a model that
requires installation of a
capacity setting adaptor
when replacing the
PC board.
YES
Troubleshooting
NO
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
Install a capacity setting adaptor.
185
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.10 “C1” Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission (Between
Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)
Remote
Controller
Display
C1
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXMQ50~125P
Method of
Malfunction
Detecion
Check the condition of transmission between indoor PC board (A1P) and PC board for fan
(A2P) using computer.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When normal transmission is not conducted for certain duration.
Supposed
Causes
„ Connection defect of the connecter between indoor PC board (A1P) and PC board for fan
186
(A2P).
„ Malfunction of indoor PC board (A1P).
„ Malfunction of PC board for fan (A2P).
„ External factor, such as instantaneous blackout.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the connector
between indoor PC board (A1P) and
PC board for fan (A2P) accurately
connected? (*1)
NO
Connect the connector accurately.
YES
Confirm the condition of
transmission on indoor PC
board using local installation
mode. (*2)
Under
above local installation
mode, installation position is
"01".
NO
Replace indoor PC board (A1P).
YES
Connect the connecter X70A
and turn on the power again.
"C1"
Malfunction breaks out
again.
YES
Replace PC board for fan (A2P).
NO
Connect it and operate (It is
possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous blackout)
∗1. Pull out and insert the connecter once and check it is absolutely connected.
∗2. Method to check transmission part of indoor PC board.
Turn off the power and remove the connecter X70A of indoor PC board (A1P).
Short-circuit X70A.
After turning on the power, check below numbers under local setting remote control.
(Confirmation: Setting position NO. at the condition of setting switch No. 21 on mode No.
41)
↓
Determination
01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission defect on indoor PC board
★ After confirmation, turn off the power, take off the short-circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.
Troubleshooting
187
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.11 “C4” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger
Remote
Controller
Display
C4
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by heat exchanger thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the heat exchanger thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of thermistor (R2T) for liquid pipe
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Connector
is connected to X12A or X18A
of the indoor unit PC
board.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor
(R2T) from the indoor
unit PC board
(3.5kΩ~
360kΩ)
∗1
YES
NO
NO
Connect the connector and turn
on again.
Replace the thermistor (R2T).
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P309.
188
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.12 “C5” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas
Pipes
Remote
Controller
Display
C5
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by gas pipe thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the gas pipe thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of indoor unit thermistor (R3T) for gas pipe
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Connector is
connected to X11A or X14A of
the indoor unit PC
board.
NO
Connect the connector and turn on
again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor
(R3T) from the indoor
unit PC board.
(0.6kΩ~
360kΩ)
∗1
YES
NO
Replace the thermistor (R3T).
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P309.
Troubleshooting
189
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.13 “C6” Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination (Between Indoor
unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)
Remote
Controller
Display
C6
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXMQ40~125P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Conduct open line detection with PC board for fan (A2P) using indoor PC board (A1P).
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the communication data of PC board for fan (A2P) is determined as incorrect.
Supposed
Causes
The possible causes are:
„ Malfunction of PC board for fan (A2P).
„ Connection defect of capacity setting adaptor.
„ Setting mistake on site.
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the type of PC
board for fan (A2P)
correct?
NO
Replace it with correct PC
board for fan (A2P).
YES
NO
Was
indoor PC board
(A1P) replaced with spare
parts PC board?
YES
Was
correct
capacity setting
adaptor installed when
replacing it with spare
parts PC board?
NO
Install correct capacity
setting adaptor.
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.
190
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.14 “C9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for
Suction Air
Remote
Controller
Display
C9
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by suction air temperature
thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the suction air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
running.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of indoor unit thermistor (R1T) for air inlet
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Connector
is connected to X13A or X19A
of the indoor unit PC
board.
YES
NO
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor NO
(R1T) from the indoor
unit PC board.
(7.2kΩ~
112kΩ)
∗1
YES
Connect the connector and turn on
again.
Replace the thermistor R1T.
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P309.
Troubleshooting
191
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.15 “CC” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System
Remote
Controller
Display
CC
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Even if a malfunction occurs, operation still continues.
Malfunction is detected according to the moisture (output voltage) detected by the moisture
sensor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the moisture sensor is disconnected or short-circuited
Supposed
Causes
„ Faulty sensor
„ Disconnection
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Remove the humidity sensor
from the indoor PC board and
insert it again.
Does it
function normally?
YES
It is normal.
(Poor connector contact)
NO
Delete the malfunction code
record from the remote
controller. (*1)
Is "CC"
displayed on
the remote
controller? (*2)
YES
Replace the humidity sensor
PC board ASS'Y (A2P).
*3
NO
It is believed that external factors
(noise or else) other than failure
caused the malfunction.
*1: To delete the record, the ON/OFF button of the remote controller must be pushed and
held for 5 seconds in the check mode.
*2: To display the code, the Inspection/Test Operation button of the remote controller must be
pushed and held in the normal mode.
*3: If "CC" is displayed even after replacing the humidity sensor PC board ASS'Y (A2P) and
taking the steps *1 and 2, replace the indoor PC board ASS'Y (A1P).
192
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.16 “CJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in
Remote Controller
CJ
Remote
Controller
Display
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by remote controller air
temperature thermistor. (Note1)
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the remote controller air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while
the unit is running.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of remote controller thermistor
„ Defect of remote controller PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Turn power supply OFF, then
power ON again.
Is "CJ"
displayed on the remote
controller?
NO
Note:
Troubleshooting
YES
Replace remote controller.
External factor other than
equipment malfunction.
(for example, noise etc.)
In case of remote controller thermistor malfunction, unit is still operable by suction air thermistor
on indoor unit.
193
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.17 “E1” Outside Unit: PC Board Defect
Remote
Controller
Display
E1
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect abnormalities by checking communication status of the hard part between the indoor unit
and outside unit.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When communication status of the hard part between the indoor unit and heat source unit is
abnormal
Supposed
Causes
„ Faulty main PC board
„ Faulty communication part (photo coupler) on the main PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Turn off the power supply once
and then turn it on again.
Does it return normally?
YES
NO
Foreign
particles (electrically
conductive) are attached on
the terminal (X1M) of
the main PC
board.
NO
194
YES
Check the following parts and
continue operation
• Check noise, etc.
• Check whether foreign
particles (electrically
conductive) attach to the terminal
of the main PC board (X1M).
Remove the foreign particles
(electrically conductive) and
restart operation.
Replace the heat source
main PC board.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.18 “E3” Outside Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch
Remote
Controller
Display
E3
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect conductive property of the high pressure switch with the protector circuit.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the protector circuit is partially opened
(For reference) Working pressure for the high pressure switch
Working pressure: 4.0 MPa
Return pressure: 2.85 MPa
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
High pressure switch operation
Faulty high pressure switch
Faulty main PC board
Temporal power failure
Faulty high pressure sensor
Insufficient heat source water
Dirty water heat exchanger
195
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Check the following items:
Is the stop valve open?
Is the connector for HPS properly connected
to the main PC board?
Is the high pressure switch electrically
conductive?
Are all of
the above conditions
satisfied?
NO
Improve defects.
YES
• Set up a pressure gauge in the high pressure service port.
• Connect the Service Checker.
• Restart operation after resetting operation with a remote
controller.
Can the
Is HPS
YES
emergency stop (E3) be
working value (4.0 MPa)
repeated?
normal?
Replace the HPS.
YES
NO
Are high
pressure sensor
characteristics
normal?
(∗1)(∗3)
NO
NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
YES
Is PC board
detector pressure normal?
(∗2)
NO
Replace the main PC board.
YES
• The high pressure sensor is normal and the main PC board pressure detection is
also normal.
• In fact, high pressure is rising.
CHECK 1 : Refer to page 261 to eliminate the causes of high pressure rise.
∗1 : Compare the pressure sensor voltage measurements with pressure gauge readings.
(For the pressure sensor, voltage is measured at the connector and converted to
pressure in accordance with page 311.)
∗2 : Compare “high pressure” checked with the Service Checker with pressure sensor
voltage measurements (refer to ∗1).
∗3 : Measure the voltage of the pressure sensor.
(4)
Red
(3)
Black
(2)
Microcomputer
A/D input
(1)
White
HP pressure sensor
+5V Connector for high
pressure sensor (red)
Measure the voltage (DC) between
these two points.
196
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.19 “E4” Outside Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor
Remote
Controller
Display
E4
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Judge the pressure detected by a low pressure sensor with the main PC board.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When low pressure drops while the compressor is in operation
Working pressure: 0.07 MPa
(Retry: 3 times)
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Abnormal low pressure drop
Faulty low pressure sensor
Faulty main PC board
The stop valve left closed
Insufficient heat source water
Dirty water heat exchanger
197
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the stop
valve opened?
NO
Open the stop valve.
YES
Set up a pressure gauge in the low pressure
service port.
Connect the Service Checker.
Restart operation after resetting operation.
Are
low pressure
sensor characteristics
normal?
(∗1)(∗3)
NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
YES
Is PC board
detector pressure
normal?
(∗2)
NO
Replace the main PC board.
YES
• The low pressure sensor is normal and the main PC board pressure
detection is also normal.
• In fact, low pressure is dropping.
CHECK 2 : Refer to page 262 to eliminate the causes of low pressure drop.
∗1 : Compare the pressure sensor voltage measurements with pressure gauge readings.
(For the pressure sensor, voltage is measured at the connector and converted to
pressure in accordance with page 311.)
∗2 : Compare “low pressure” measured with the Service Checker with pressure sensor
voltage measurements (refer to ∗1).
∗3 : Measure the voltage of the pressure sensor.
Microcomputer
A/D input
(4)
Red
(3)
Black
(2)
White
(1)
LP pressure sensor
+5V Connector for low
pressure sensor (Blue)
Measure the voltage (DC) between
these two points.
198
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.20 “E5” Compressor Motor Lock
Remote
Controller
Display
E5
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Pick up the location signal using the inverter PC board from the UVWN line connected between
the inverter and the compressor and detect location signal pattern.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
In normal operation, location signal for a triple cycle of frequency applied, while in locked
operation, it is a double cycle, and they are detected.
(Retry twice/60 minutes)
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Inverter compressor lock
High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
Incorrect UVWN wire connection
Faulty inverter PC board
Stop valve left closed
199
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the stop
valve opened?
NO
Open the stop valve.
YES
Is the
UVWN wire connection
proper?
NO
Connect properly.
YES
Is it a
high differential
pressure at the time of
start-up (0.5 MPa or
more) ?
(∗1)
YES
Eliminate the causes.
The hot gas bypass valve
may not be opened.
Check it.
NO
Restart operation after
resetting operation.
The inverter
compressor operates
normally.
NO
Replace the compressor.
YES
Disconnect the connection
between the compressor and
the inverter and turn on power
transistor check mode setting
using “Setting Mode 2” on the
outside unit PC board.
Measure inverter output
voltage.
Note: Take measurements
while frequency is stable.
Inverter
output voltage
among 3 phases is
NO
within ±5V for TL power supply
and ±10V for
Y1, YL power
supply.
YES
Replace the inverter PC board.
Replace the inverter compressor.
∗1 : Difference in pressure between high and low pressures before start-up
∗2 : The quality of the power transistor diode module can be assessed also by means of
measurement of resistance between terminals (page 312, 313).
200
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.21 “E9” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y3E)
Remote
Controller
Display
E9
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Check disconnection of connector
Check continuity of expansion valve coil
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Error is generated under no common power supply when the power is on.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of moving part of electronic expansion valve
„ Defect of outside unit PC board (A1P)
„ Defect of connecting cable
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Turn power supply off, and
turn power supply on again.
Return to normal?
YES
NO
Electronic
expansion valve is
connected to X26A and
X28A of outside unit
PC board
(A1P).
NO
External factor other than
malfunction (for example, noise
etc.).
After connecting, turn the power
off and then back on again.
YES
Normal
when coil
check (∗1) of the moving
part of the electronic
expansion valve is
checked.
NO
Replace the moving part of the
electronic expansion valve.
YES
The connecting
cable is short-circuited or
disconnected.
NO
Troubleshooting
YES
Replace the connecting cable.
Replace outside unit PC board
A1P.
201
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
∗1: Coil check method for the moving part of the electronic expansion valve
Discount the electronic expansion valve from the PC board and check the continuity between
the connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No.
1. White
2. Yellow
3. Orange
4. Blue
5. Red
6. Brown
×
{
Approx.
300Ω
×
×
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
×
1. White
2. Yellow
{
Approx.
300Ω
3. Orange
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
×
4. Blue
5. Red
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
{
Approx.
150Ω
×
6. Brown
{: Continuity
× : No continuity
X26A or
X28A
(1) White
White (1)
Red (5)
Orange (3)
(2) Yellow
φ1
M
φ3
φ2
φ4
(3) Orange
(4) Blue
Yellow Brown Blue (5) Red
(2)
(6)
(4)
(6) Brown
202
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.22 “F3” Outside Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe
Temperature
Remote
Controller
Display
F3
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Abnormality is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe
temperature sensor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
„ When the discharge pipe temperature rises to an abnormally high level (over 135°C)
„ When the discharge pipe temperature rises suddenly (over 120°C continues 10 min.)
Supposed
Causes
„ Faulty discharge pipe temperature sensor
„ Faulty connection of discharge pipe temperature sensor
„ Faulty outside unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Connect the Service Checker.
Restart operation after resetting
operation.
Are
discharge pipe
thermistor characteristics
normal?
(∗1)
NO
Replace the discharge pipe
thermistor.
YES
Is
PC board detection
temperature normal?
(∗2)
NO
Replace the main PC board.
YES
• The discharge pipe thermistor is normal and the main PC
board temperature detection is also normal.
• In fact, discharge pipe temperature is rising.
CHECK 3 : Refer to page 263 to eliminate the causes of
overheat operation.
∗1: Compare the resistance values of the discharge pipe thermistor with
measurements of a surface thermometer.
(For temperature and resistance characteristics of a thermistor, refer to
page 309, 310.)
∗2: Compare the discharge pipe temperature checked by the Service
Checker with the resistance of the thermistor (refer to ∗1).
Troubleshooting
203
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.23 “F6” Refrigerant Overcharged
Remote
Controller
Display
F6
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect excessive charging of refrigerant using suction pipe temperature and subcooling heat
exchanger outlet temperature during check operation.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the suction pipe temperature and the subcooling heat exchanger outlet temperature
during check operation drop and become below the evaporation temperature
Supposed
Causes
„ Excessive refrigerant charging
„ Suction pipe thermistor removed
„ Subcooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor removed
204
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Check the mounting condition
of the suction pipe thermistor
and the subcooling heat
exchanger outlet thermistor
temperature sensor mounted
to piping.
Is the
thermistor mounted
properly?
NO
Mount the thermistor properly
before operation.
YES
Remove the suction pipe
thermistor and the subcooling
heat exchanger outlet
thermistor from the outside
unit PC board and measure
the resistance with a tester.
Does
it function normally?
(∗1)
NO
Replace the thermistor if it
functions abnormally before
operation.
YES
Carry out check operation again.
Does the
abnormal code (F6)
repeat?
NO
Continue operation.
YES
• There is a possibility that there are other causes of
refrigerant overfilling.
CHECK 4 : Refer to page 264 to eliminate the causes
of wet operation.
∗1: For thermistor temperature and resistance characteristics,
refer to page 309, 310.
Troubleshooting
205
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.24 “HJ” Malfunction of Water System
Remote
Controller
Display
HJ
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
„ Detect abnormalities using the thermistor on the side of the heat exchanger gas.
„ Detect turned off interlock circuit.
(When interlock setting is provided.)
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
„ When temperature on the heat exchanger gas side (R4T) drops remarkably with the
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
„
206
smallest operation step (52 Hz) of the compressor
„ With interlock setting provided, when interlock circuit is turned off.
Clogged water piping system
Insufficient heat exchanger water
Dirty heat exchanger
Disconnected connector
Faulty thermistor on the heat exchanger gas side
Faulty low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Clogged
water piping
system (mixing in
of foreign particles,
solenoid valve
for water
use)
YES
Remove the clog.
NO
Is the
amount of water
of heat exchanger
50 l/minute
or more?
NO
Secure enough water.
YES
Is
the heat exchanger
dirty?
YES
Clean the heat exchanger.
NO
Is the
connection
between the thermistor
on the heat exchanger gas side
(R4T) and the low pressure
sensor (S1NPL)
proper?
NO
Connect the connector properly.
YES
Are
characteristics of
the thermistor on the heat
exchanger gas side (R4T) and
the low pressure sensor
(S1NPL) normal?
(∗1)
NO
Replace the thermistor/sensor if
any of its characteristics are
abnormal.
YES
Disconnect the connection between
the compressor and the inverter and
turn on the power transistor check
mode setting using “Setting Mode 2”
on the outside PC board.
Measure the output voltage of
the inverter.
(*2)
Note: Take measurements
while frequency is stable.
The
output voltage
among three phases is
within ±5V for TL power supply
and ±10V for Y1, YL power
supply.
YES
NO
Replace the inverter PC board.
Replace the main PC board.
∗1 : For thermistor/sensor characteristics, refer to page 309, 310.
∗2 : The quality of the power transistor diode module can be assessed by means of
measurement of resistance between terminals (page 312, 313).
Troubleshooting
207
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.25 “J3” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe
Thermistor (R3T)
Remote
Controller
Display
J3
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by discharge pipe temperature
thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When a short circuit or an open circuit in the discharge pipe temperature thermistor is detected.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of thermistor (R3T) for outside unit discharge pipe
„ Defect of outside unit PC board (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Connector
is connected to X34A
of outside unit
PC board
(A1P).
NO
Connect the connector and turn on
again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor
R3T from the outside
unit PC board.
(3.5kΩ~
400kΩ)
∗1
YES
NO
Replace the thermistor (R3T)
Replace outside unit PC board
A1P.
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.310.
208
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.26 “J4” Malfunction of Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor
(R4T)
Remote
Controller
Display
J4
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected according to the temperature detected by heat exchanger gas pipe
thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor is short circuited or open.
Supposed
Causes
„ Faulty heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T)
„ Faulty outside unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is
the connector
for heat exchanger
gas pipe thermistor
connected to X37A on
outside unit PC
board (A1P)?
NO
Connect the connector and
operate unit again.
YES
Is the
resistance
measured after
removing the thermistor
(R4T) from outside unit PC
board normal?
(3.5 kΩ to
360 kΩ)
∗1
YES
NO
Replace thermistor (R4T).
Replace outside unit PC board
(A1P).
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.309.
Troubleshooting
209
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.27 “J5” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Suction Pipe
Remote
Controller
Display
J5
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the suction pipe temperature
thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When a short circuit or an open circuit in the suction pipe temperature thermistor is detected.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of thermistor (R2T) for outside unit suction pipe
„ Defect of outside unit PC board (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Connector
is connected to
X37A, of outside unit
PC board.
(A1P)
NO
Connect the connector and turn on
again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
NO
disconnecting the thermistor
(R2T) from the outside
unit PC board.
(3.5kΩ ~
360kΩ)
∗1
YES
Replace the thermistor R2T.
Replace outside unit PC board
(A1P).
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.309.
210
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.28 “J7” Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T)
Remote
Controller
Display
J7
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected according to the temperature detected by receiver outlet liquid pipe
thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the liquid pipe thermistor is short circuited or open.
Supposed
Causes
„ Faulty liquid pipe thermistor (R6T)
„ Faulty outside unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is
the connector
for receiver
outlet liquid pipe thermistor
connected to X37A on
outside unit PC
board (A1P)?
NO
Connect the connector and operate
unit again.
YES
Is the
resistance
measured after
removing the thermistor
(R6T) from outside unit PC
board normal?
(3.5 kΩ to
360 kΩ)
∗1
YES
NO
Replace thermistor (R6T).
Replace outside unit PC board
(A1P).
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.309.
Troubleshooting
211
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.29 “J9” Malfunction of Sub Cooling Heat Exchanger Outlet
Thermistor (R5T)
Remote
Controller
Display
J9
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected according to the temperature detected by sub cooling heat exchanger
outlet thermistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the sub cooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor is short circuited or open.
Supposed
Causes
„ Faulty receiver gas pipe thermistor (R5T)
„ Faulty outside unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is
the connector
for oil equalizing
pipe thermistor
connected to X37A on
outside unit PC
board (A1P)?
NO
Connect the connector and operate
unit again.
YES
Is the
resistance
measured after
removing the thermistor
(R5T) from outside unit PC
board normal?
(3.5 kΩ to
360 kΩ)
∗1
YES
NO
Replace thermistor (R5T).
Replace outside unit PC board
(A1P).
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.309.
212
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.30 “JA” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Pressure
Sensor
Remote
Controller
Display
JA
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected from the pressure detected by the high pressure sensor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the discharge pipe pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of high pressure sensor system
„ Connection of low pressure sensor with wrong connection.
„ Defect of outside unit PC board.
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The high
pressure sensor is
connected to X46A of
outside unit PC
board (A1P).
NO
Connect the high pressure sensor
and turn on again.
YES
The
relationship
between the ∗1
VH and high pressure
is normal (see ∗2) when
YES
voltage is measured between
X46A pins (1) and (3) of
outside unit PC
board (A1P)
(see ∗1).
NO
Replace outside unit PC board
A1P.
Replace the high pressure sensor.
∗1: Voltage measurement point
∗2: Refer to pressure sensor, pressure / voltage characteristics table on P.311.
Troubleshooting
213
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.31 “JC” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Suction Pipe Pressure
Sensor
Remote
Controller
Display
JC
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected from pressure detected by low pressure sensor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the suction pipe pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of low pressure sensor system
„ Connection of high pressure sensor with wrong connection.
„ Defect of outside unit PC board.
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The low
pressure sensor is
connected to X45A (blue) of
outside unit PC board
(A1P).
YES
The
relationship
between the ∗1
VH and low pressure is
normal (see ∗2) when voltage
is measured between X45A pins
(2) and (3) of outside unit
PC board (A1P)
(see ∗1).
NO
Connect low pressure sensor
property and restart system.
YES
NO
Replace outside unit PC board
A1P.
Replace the low pressure sensor.
∗1: Voltage measurement point
∗2: Refer to pressure sensor, pressure/voltage characteristics table on P.311.
214
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.32 “L4” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Rise (R1T)
Remote
Controller
Display
L4
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Fin temperature is detected by the thermistor of the radiation fin.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the temperature of the inverter radiation fin increases above 98°C.
Supposed
Causes
„ Actuation of fin thermal (Actuates above 98°C)
„ Defect of inverter PC board
„ Defect of fin thermistor
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Temperature
of the radiator fin rises.
Actuates at min.
98 ˚C
NO
Resistance
check of the radiator fin
thermistor
∗1
YES
Abnormal
Defect of power unit radiation.
• Intake port is clogged
• Radiator fin is dirty
• Outdoor temperature is high
Replace the thermistor.
Normal
Is reset possible?
NO
Replace the inverter PC board
YES
Reset and operate.
∗1: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.309.
Troubleshooting
215
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.33 “L5” Outside Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal
Remote
Controller
Display
L5
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected from current flowing in the power transistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When an excessive current flows in the power transistor.
(Instantaneous overcurrent also causes activation.)
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of compressor coil (disconnected, defective insulation)
„ Compressor start-up malfunction (mechanical lock)
„ Defect of inverter PC board
Troubleshooting
Compressor inspection
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The compressor's
coil is disconnected or the
insulation is
defective.
YES
Replace the compressor.
NO
Disconnect the connection
between the compressor and
inverter. Make the power
transistor check mode setting
ON by service mode.
Inverter
output voltage
check Inverter output
voltage is not balanced.
(Normal if within ±10V for Y1,
YL power supply and ±5V for TL
power supply ) Must be
measured when
frequency
is stable.
YES
Replace the inverter unit.
NO
There is
instantenious power
drop.
NO
YES
Correct power supply.
Compressor inspection
Inspect according to the diagnosis
procedure for odd noises, vibration
and operating status of the
compressor.
Higher voltage than actual is displayed when the inverter output voltage is checked by tester.
216
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.34 “L8” Outside Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal
Remote
Controller
Display
L8
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected by current flowing in the power transistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When overload in the compressor is detected.
Supposed
Causes
„ Compressor overload
„ Compressor coil disconnected
„ Defect of inverter PC board
Troubleshooting
Output current check
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The
secondary
current of the inverter is
higher than 16.5A (Y1, YL power
supply) and 25.1 A (TL
power supply) for
each phase.
YES
Compressor overload
Inspection of the compressor and
refrigerant system is required.
NO
Compressor
inspection The
compressor's coil is
disconnected.
YES
Replace the compressor.
NO
Disconnect the the connection
between the compressor and
inverter. Make the power
transistor check mode setting
ON by service mode.
Inverter
output voltage
check Inverter output
voltage is not balanced.
(Normal if within ±10V for Y1,
YL power supply and ±5V for TL
power supply ) Must be
measured when
frequency
is stable.
NO
Replace the inverter PC board.
YES
After turning
on again, "L8" blinks
again.
YES
NO
Reset and restart.
Compressor inspection
Inspect according to the diagnosis
procedure for odd noises, vibration
and operating status of the
compressor.
Higher voltage than actual is displayed when the inverter output voltage is checked by tester.
Troubleshooting
217
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.35 “L9” Outside Unit: Inverter Start Up Error
Remote
Controller
Display
L9
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction is detected from current flowing in the power transistor.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When overload in the compressor is detected during startup
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of compressor
„ Pressure differential start
„ Defect of inverter PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
The difference
between high and low
pressure when starting
is above
0.2MPa.
NO
Unsatisfactory pressure
equalization
Check refrigerant system.
YES
Disconnect the connection
between the compressor and
inverter. Make the power
transistor check mode ON by
service mode.
Inverter
output voltage
check Inverter output
voltage is not balanced.
(Normal if within ±10V for Y1,
YL power supply and ±5V for TL
power supply ) Must be
measured when
frequency
is stable.
NO
Replace the inverter PC board
YES
After turning
on again, "L9" blinks
again.
YES
NO
Reset and restart.
Compressor inspection
Inspect according to the diagnosis
procedure for odd noises, vibration
and operating status of the
compressor.
Higher voltage than actual is displayed when the inverter output voltage is checked by tester.
218
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.36 “LC” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Transmission between
Inverter and Control PC Board
Remote
Controller
Display
LC
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Check the communication state between inverter PC board and control PC board by microcomputer.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the correct communication is not conducted in certain period.
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Malfunction of connection between the inverter PC board and outside unit control PC board
Defect of outside unit control PC board (transmission section)
Defect of inverter PC board
Defect of noise filter
External factor (Noise etc.)
219
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Are the
connectors
between the main
PC board (A1P),
and inverter PC board
(A2P) connected
securely?
NO
Connect transmission wiring and
turn on again.
YES
The
transmission
wiring between the
outside unit PC board
inverter unit is
disconnected.
YES
Fix the disconnection and turn on
again.
NO
The
microcomputer
monitor (green) on
the inverter PC board
is blinking.
YES
Defect of outside unit main PC
board or defect of inverter PC
board.
NO
The voltage
between two pins
of X1A on the inverter
unit is 220 ~ 240 V.
NO
YES
Replace inverter PC board.
When the LC malfunction occur
again, replace control PC board.
Check the noise filter (Z1F) for
disconnection, and check the
power supply wiring of the inverter
PC board.
220
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.37 “P1” Outside Unit: Inverter Over-Ripple Protection
Remote
Controller
Display
P1
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Imbalance in supply voltage is detected in PC board.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the resistance value of thermistor becomes a value equivalent to open or short circuited
status.
„ Malfunction is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
"P1" will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
„
Open phase
Voltage imbalance between phases
Defect of main circuit capacitor
Defect of inverter PC board
Defect of K1M
Improper main circuit wiring
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Imbalance
in supplied voltage
is in excess of 14 V
(Y1, YL) and 10V
(TL). ∗1
YES
Open phase?
NO
NO
Is
the voltage
imbalance applied to
YES
the inverter in excess of
14 V (Y1, YL) and
10V (TL)?
∗2
NO <When voltage monitoring is possible:>
Using a device capable of
constant recording of power
supply voltage record
power supply voltage
between 3 phases (L1 ~ L2,
L2 ~ L3, L3~L1) for about
one continuous week.
YES
Open phase
Normalize field cause.
Fix power supply voltage
imbalance.
Part or wiring defect
After turning the power supply
OFF, check and repair the
main circuit wiring or parts.
(1) Loose or disconnected
wiring between power
supply and inverter
(2) K1M contact disposition,
fusion or contact is poor.
(3) Loose or disconnected
noise filter
∗1. Measure voltage at the X1M power supply
terminal block.
∗2. Measure voltage at terminals L1, L2 and L3 of
the diode module inside the inverter while the
compressor is running.
Power supply voltage imbalance
measure
Explanation for users ∗In accordance with "notification of inspection results" accompanying spare parts.
Give the user a copy of "notification of inspection results"and leave Be sure to explain to the user that
there is a "power supply imbalance"
it up to him to improve the imbalance.
for which DAIKIN is not responsible.
Troubleshooting
221
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.38 “P4” Outside Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Sensor
Remote
Controller
Display
P4
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Resistance of radiation fin thermistor is detected when the compressor is not operating.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the resistance value of thermistor becomes a value equivalent to open or short circuited
status.
„ Malfunction is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
"P4" will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of radiator fin temperature sensor
„ Defect of inverter PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Measure the resistance of
radiation fin thermistor.
Is the
resistance of thermistor
correct?
NO
YES
Is the resetting possible?
NO
Replace inverter PC board.
(Thermistor can not be removed
from inverter PC board)
Replace inverter PC board.
YES
After resetting, restart.
∗2: Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P.309.
222
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.39 “U0” Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure
Remote
Controller
Display
U0
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect insufficient gas using low pressure or difference in temperature between the suction pipe
and the heat exchanger.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed
Causes
Troubleshooting
In cooling
„ Low pressure of 0.25 MPa or less continues for 30 minutes
In heating
„ Suction gas superheated degree of 20°C or more continues for 60 minutes.
∗ Abnormality is not confirmed and operation is continued.
„
„
„
„
Insufficient gas or clogged refrigerant (wrong piping)
Faulty thermistor (R2T, R4T)
Faulty low pressure sensor
Faulty main PC board (A1P)
223
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
In cooling
Set up a pressure gauge in the service port on the low pressure side.
Connect the Service Checker.
Reset operation with a remote controller and restart operation.
Are the
low pressure
sensor characteristics
normal?
(∗1)
Is the
PC board detector
pressure normal?
(∗2)
NO
NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
Replace the main PC board.
CHECK 2 : Refer to page 262 to eliminate
the causes of low pressure drop.
∗1 : Compare pressure sensor measurements with pressure gauge readings.
(For measurements by a pressure sensor, measure voltage between connectors (2)
and (3) and convert it to pressure in accordance with page 311.)
∗2 : Compare low pressure measured by the Service Checker with pressure sensor
measurements (refer to ∗1).
In heating
Connect the Service Checker.
After resetting operation with a remote
controller, restart operation.
Are
characteristics
of the suction pipe thermistor
(R2T) and the heat exchanger
thermistor (R4T)
normal?
(∗3)
Is
PC board detection
temperature normal?
(∗4)
NO
NO
Replace the thermistor.
Replace the main PC board.
CHECK 3 : Refer to page 263 to eliminate
the causes of overheat operation.
∗3 : Compare the thermistor resistance with surface thermostat measurements.
∗4 : Compare the suction pipe temperature checked by the Service Checker with
measurements obtained in ∗3 above.
224
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.40 “U1” Reverse Phase, Open Phase
Remote
Controller
Display
U1
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
The phase of each phase are detected by reverse phase detection circuit and right phase or
reverse phase are judged.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When a significant phase difference is made between phases.
Supposed
Causes
„ Power supply reverse phase
„ Power supply open phase
„ Defect of outside PC board A1P
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
There
is an open phase
at the power supply
terminal section (X1M)
of the outside
unit.
YES
Fix the open phase. Requires
inspection of field power supply
section.
NO
Operation
is normal if one
place of power supply
line phase is
replaced.
NO
Troubleshooting
YES
Reverse phase
Counter measure of the problem is
completed by phase replacement.
Replace outside unit PC board
A1P.
225
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.41 “U2” Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure
Remote
Controller
Display
U2
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detection of voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter and power supply voltage.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the capacitor above only has a voltage of 360 V or less (YL) and 210V or less (TL).
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
226
Power supply insufficient
Instantaneous failure
Open phase
Defect of inverter PC board
Defect of outside control PC board
Defect of K1M.
Main circuit wiring defect
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is
connection
wire connected
between the connector
X21A and X6A?
NO
Repair wiring.
YES
Turn on again.
Turn K1M ON.
NO
Is
220 ~ 240 V of
power reaching the
K1M coil?
YES
Replace K1M.
NO
Does
the voltage
between terminals
P2(or P3) and N3 gradually
rise to 556 VDC (Y1, YL) or
283 VDC (TL)
after turning
on?
YES
Replace the inverter PC
board.
NO
Is
220 ~ 240 V
at the connector X1A of
inverter PC
board.
NO
Is
220 ~ 240 V
at the connector X1A of
outside PC board
side?
YES
YES
The voltage
between the P2
(or P3) and N3 terminals
is 320 VDC (Y1, YL) or more
and 190 VDC (TL) or less
when the compressor
is running.
NO
YES
NO
Replace the inverter PC
board.
Replace the outside unit
PC board (A1P).
Check the transmission
wiring between the
outside unit PC board
and inverter unit.
Replace the inverter
PC board.
YES
Monitor field power
supply.
Troubleshooting
227
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.42 “U3” Check Operation not Executed
Remote
Controller
Display
U3
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Check operation is executed or not
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Malfunction is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Supposed
Causes
„ Check operation is not executed.
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Has the
check operation
performed on Outside
unit PC board?
YES
NO
Press the BS4 on PC board on the
master outside unit for 5 seconds
or more to execute check
operation.
Replace the main PC board on the
outside unit.
228
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.43 “U4” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units
Remote
Controller
Display
U4
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outside units is normal.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Supposed
Causes
„ Indoor to outdoor, outside to outside unit transmission wiring F1, F2 disconnection, short
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
circuit or wrong wiring
Outside unit power supply is OFF
System address doesn’t match
Defect of indoor unit PC board
Defect of outside unit PC board
229
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Has
the indoor
or outside unit PC
board been replaced,
or has the indoor - outside
or outside - outside unit
transmission wiring
been
modified?
YES
Push and hold the RESET
button on the master outside
unit PC Board for 5 seconds.
∗ The unit will not operate for
up to 12 minutes.
NO
All
indoor unit
remote controllers of the
same refrigerant system
display
"U4."
YES
NO
Is indoor
- outdoor and outside outside unit transmission
wiring normal?
YES
NO
Replace the indoor unit PC
Board.
Fix the indoor/outside unit
transmission wiring.
Reset the power supply.
Outside
unit PC board
microcomputer monitor
(HAP) blinks.
NO
YES
The
voltage between
terminals L1 and N of the
outside unit PC board
is 220~240 V.
Supply 220~240 V.
YES
The fuse on
the outside unit's PC
board is burnt.
NO
The
secondary voltage
of the transformer is
about 22 V.
YES
NO
NO
Operation
ready lamp (H2P) is
blinking.
YES
NO
Replace the fuse.
Replace the transformer.
replacement
Replace outside unit PC
board. (A1P)
YES
Lamp does
not go off for 12 minutes
or more.
YES
NO
Is
indoor - outside unit
and outside unit - outside unit
transmission wiring
normal?
YES
230
NO
Push and hold the RESET
button on the outside unit PC
board for 5 seconds.
Fix the indoor/outside unit
transmission wiring.
Replace the outside unit PC
Board (A1P).
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.44 “U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Remote
Controller and Indoor Unit
Remote
Controller
Display
U5
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
In case of controlling with 2-remote controller, check the system using microcomputer is signal
transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
Malfunction of indoor unit remote controller transmission
Connection of two main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
Defect of indoor unit PC board
Defect of remote controller PC board
Malfunction of transmission caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Using
2-remote controllers
control.
YES
NO
All indoor
PC board microcomputer
monitors blink.
NO
Troubleshooting
YES
NO
NO
Operation
returns to normal when
the power is turned off
momentarily.
YES
YES
Multi-core cable
is used for the indoor
unit remote controller
transmission
wiring.
SS1 of
both remote controllers
is set to "MASTER."
YES
NO
Set one remote controller to
"SLAVE"; turn the power
supply off once and then back
on.
Replace indoor unit PC
board.
There is possibility of
malfunction caused by noise.
Check the surrounding area
and turn on again.
Switch to double-core
independent cable.
replacement
Defect of remote controller PC
board or indoor unit PC board.
Replace whichever is
defective.
231
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.45 “U7” Malfunction of Transmission between Outside Units
Remote
Controller
Display
U7
Applicable
Models
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Supposed
Causes
„ Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside unit and external control
„
„
„
„
„
232
adaptor for outdoor unit.
Improper cool/heat selection
Improper cool/heat unified address (outside unit, external control adaptor for outdoor unit)
Defect of outside unit PC board (A1P)
Defect of external control adaptor for outdoor unit
Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside units of multi outside unit
connection.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the
outside units multi
connection transmission
wiring normal?
NO
Fix the outside units multi
connection transmission
wiring and reset power.
YES
Is the
indoor / outside unit
transmission wiring
normal?
NO
Fix the indior / outside unit
transmission wiring.
YES
C/H SELECT is set to "IND".
YES
Replace the outside unit PC
Board (A1P).
NO
Cool / heat selection is
unified.
NO
Set C/H SELECT to "IND."
YES
C/H SELECT
is set to "MASTER."
YES
NO
C/H SELECT
is set to "SLAVE."
YES
The cool / heat unified
address for outside units in
outside - outside unit
transmission is duplicated.
Set the address correctly.
Check
NO
and see if the following items
Fix the problem.
are normal.
NO
External control adaptor for outdoor unit
•Is there continuity?
•Does the cool/heat unified address match?
Outside unit (unified master unit)
•Is there continuity?
•Does the cool/heat unified address match?
YES
Does a
malfunction occur when
the cool / heat selector is
set to "IND?"
NO
Replace the outside unit
outside control adaptor.
replacement
YES
Replace the outside unit PC
board (A1P).
Troubleshooting
233
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.46 “U8” Malfunction of Transmission between Master and
Slave Remote Controllers
Remote
Controller
Display
U8
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
In case of controlling with 2-remote controller, check the system using microcomputer if signal
transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.
Supposed
Causes
„ Malfunction of transmission between main and sub remote controller
„ Connection between sub remote controllers
„ Defect of remote controller PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Using 2-remote
controllers control.
NO
YES
SS1
of both remote controllers is
set to "SUB."
YES
234
SS1
of remote controller PC boards
is set to "MAIN."
NO
Set SS1 to "MAIN"; the
power supply off once and
then back on.
YES
NO
Turn the power off and then
back on. If a malfunction
occurs, replace the remote
controller PC board.
Set one remote controller to
"MAIN"; the power supply
off once and then back on.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.47 “U9” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and
Outside Units in the Same System
Remote
Controller
Display
U9
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction signal of any other indoor unit within the system concerned.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the malfunction decision is made on any other indoor unit within the system concerned.
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Malfunction of transmission within or outside of other system
Malfunction of electronic expansion valve in indoor unit of other system
Defect of PC board of indoor unit in other system
Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outside unit
235
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
"U9"
has been displayed for 2
minutes or more.
YES
Re-diagnose by display after
passage of 2 minutes or more.
NO
Turn on all indoor units.
The "UA"
display blinks on the
remote controllers of other
units within the same
refrigerant
system.
YES
Refer to failure diagnosis for "UA"
malfunction code.
YES
Refer to failure diagnosis for "A1"
malfunction code.
YES
Refer to failure diagnosis for "A9"
malfunction code.
YES
Refer to failure diagnosis for "U4"
malfunction code.
NO
The "A1"
display blinks on
the remote controllers of
other units within the same
refrigerant
system.
NO
The "A9"
display blinks on
the remote controllers of
other units within the same
refrigerant
system.
NO
The "U4"
display blinks on
the remote controllers of
other units within the same
refrigerant
system.
NO
236
Refer to failure diagnosis for "U5"
malfunction code.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.48 “UA” Indoor & Outside Units and Remote Controller
Combination Failure
Remote
Controller
Display
UA
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect abnormalities in combination of indoor and outside units and the remote controller using
the outside unit PC board.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed
Causes
When any of the followings is detected, failure is instantly confirmed.
„ When there is a problem in the combination of the indoor and outside units
„ When there is a problem in the combination of the indoor unit and the remote controller
„
„
„
„
Excess of connected indoor units
Defect of outside unit PC board (A1P)
Mismatching of the refrigerant type of indoor and outside unit.
Setting of outside PC board was not conducted after replacing to spare parts PC board.
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the outside
PC board replaced
to spare parts PC
board ?
YES
The refrigerant classification has
not been set yet.
NO
The total
of indoor units
displaying "UA" and
indoor units connected to the NO
same refrigerant system is
within connectable
number of
unit∗
There are too many indoor units
within the same refrigerant
system.
YES
Push and hold the RESET
button on the outside unit
PC board for 5 seconds.
Does a malfunction occur?
NO
Normal
YES
Does the
refrigerant type of indoor
and outside unit
match?
YES
NO
Matches the refrigerant type of
indoor and outside unit.
Replace outside unit PC board
(A1P).
∗ The number of indoor units that can be connected to a single outside unit system depends on
the type of outside unit.
Troubleshooting
237
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.49 “UC” Address Duplication of Centralized Controller
Remote
Controller
Display
UC
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Centralized controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
The malfunction decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Supposed
Causes
„ Address duplication of centralized remote controller
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Optional
controllers for
centralized control are
connected to the
indoor unit.
NO
YES
Address duplication of central
remote controller
The setting must be changed so
that the central remote control
address is not duplicated.
Replace indoor unit PC board.
238
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.50 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit
Remote
Controller
Display
UE
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Centralized controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Supposed
Causes
„ Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control and indoor
unit
„ Connector for setting master controller is disconnected.
„ Failure of PC board for central remote controller
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
239
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Si30-813
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Has
an indoor unit once
connected been remove
or its address
changed?
YES
Reset power supply
simultaneously for all optional
controllers for centralized
control.
NO
Is
the power supply
turned on for indoor units
displaying
malfunction?
NO
Turn indoor unit's power
supply.
YES
Is
transmission wiring
disconnected or
wired incorrectly?
YES
Fix the wiring correctly.
NO
Is
transmission with
all indoor units
malfunctioning?
NO
YES
YES
Is
the transmission
wiring with the master
controller disconnected
or wired
incorrectly?
Is the group
No. of malfunctioning
indoor units set?
YES
NO
Set the group No.
correctly.
Replace indoor unit PC
board.
Fix the wiring correctly.
NO
Is the
master controller's
connector for setting
master controller
disconnected?
NO
240
YES
Connect the connector
correctly.
Replace the central PC
board.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
2.51 “UF” Refrigerant System not Set, Incompatible Wiring/
Piping
UF
Remote
Controller
Display
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
The malfunction is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed
Causes
„ Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside unit and external control
adaptor for outdoor unit.
„ Failure to execute wiring check operation
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Are the stop
valves openned?
YES
Is the
test operation
(Wiring check operation)
carried out?
NO
NO
YES
Is
indoor - outside
and outside - outside unit
transmission wiring
normal?
YES
Open stop valve.
Is indoor
-outside and outsideoutside unit transmission
wiring normal?
YES
Replace indoor unit PC board.
NO
NO
After fixing incorrect wiring,
push and hold the RESET
button on the master outside
unit PC board for 5 seconds.
∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Test operation may not have
been carried out successfully.
Note:
Troubleshooting
Test operation may not be successful if carried out after the outside unit has been off for more
than 12 hours, or if it is not carried out after running all connected indoor units in the fan mode
for at least an hour.
241
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
Si30-813
2.52 “UH” Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address
Undefined
Remote
Controller
Display
UH
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Outside unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect an indoor unit with no auto address setting.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
The malfunction decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Supposed
Causes
„ Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside unit and outside unit outside
control adaptor
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
„ Defect of outside unit PC board (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is
electricity
being introduce for
the first time after
YES
installation or after an indoor
or outside unit PC
board has been
replaced?
NO
Is
indoor - outside and
outside - outside unit
transmission wiring
normal?
NO
Normal
YES
NO
YES
After fixing incorrect wiring,
push and hold the RESET
button on the outside unit
PC board for 5 seconds
Replace whichever is
defective.
Does a malfunction occur?
Does
a malfunction
occur even after 12
minutes elapses from the
time when electricity is
introduced to indoor
and outside
units?
NO
After fixing incorrect wiring,
push and hold the RESET
button on the master outside
unit PC board for 5 seconds.
∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Normal
YES
Does
a "UH" malfunction occur
for all indoor units in
the system?
YES
242
NO
Replace indoor unit PC board.
Replace outside unit PC board
(A1P).
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller)
3. Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller)
3.1
“M1” PC Board Defect
Remote
Controller
Display
M1
Applicable
Models
Central remote controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect an abnormality in the DIII-NET polarity circuit.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When + polarity and - polarity are detected at the same time.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of central remote controller PC board
Troubleshooting
Replace the central remote controller.
Troubleshooting
243
Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller)
3.2
Si30-813
“M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control
Remote
Controller
Display
M8
Applicable
Models
Central remote controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data. (The system will be
automatically reset.)
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When no master controller is present at the time of the startup of slave controller.
When the centralized controller, which was connected once, shows no response.
Supposed
Causes
„ Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control
„ Defect of PC board of optional controllers for centralized control
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Has a once
connected optional
controller for centralized
control been disconnected
or its address
changed?
YES
Reset power supply
simultaneously for all optional
controllers for centralized control.
NO
Is
the power supply
turned on for all optional
controllers for
centralized
control?
NO
Turn on power supply for all
optional controllers for centralized
control.
YES
Is
the reset switch
of all optional controllers
for centralized control set
to ''normal?''
NO
Set reset switch to "normal."
YES
Is
transmission wiring
disconnected or wired
incorrectly?
NO
244
YES
Fix the wiring correctly.
The PC board of one of the
optional controllers for centralized
control is defective. Try turning
on/off using each optional
controllers for centralized control,
and replace the PC board of the
one that is unable to control the
indoor unit.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
3.3
Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller)
“MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control
Remote
Controller
Display
MA
Applicable
Models
Central remote controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the schedule timer is set to individual use mode, other central component is present.
When multiple master controller are present.
When the remote control adaptor is present.
Supposed
Causes
„ Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control
„ More than one master controller is connected
„ Defect of PC board of optional controller for centralized control
Troubleshooting
245
Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller)
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is
the wiring adaptor for
electrical appendices
connected?
YES
Cannot be used in
combination with a wiring
adaptor for electrical
appendices. Remove the
wiring adaptor for electrical
appendices and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
NO
Is a schedule timer
connected?
YES
NO
Is a parallel interface
connected?
YES
NO
Is
the schedule timer's
individual/combined
connector
connected?
NO
Are
there two
or more optional
controllers for centralized
control connected with the
connector for setting
master
controller?
YES
NO
Reset the power supply for
all optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
246
If the malfunction is still not cleared:
YES
Schedule timer and parallel
interface cannot be used in
combination. Disconnect
either the schedule timer or
parallel interface and reset
the power supply for all
optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
Disconnect the schedule
timer's individual / combined
connector and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Arrange so that the
connector for setting master
controller is connected to one
controller for centralized
control and reset the power
supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Disconnect the connector for
setting master controller from
the master controller,
connect to another optional
controller for centralized
control and simultaneously
reset all optional controllers
for centralized control again.
The controller connected by
the connector for setting
master controller when the
malfunction is cleared is
defective and must be
replaced.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
3.4
Troubleshooting (OP: Central Remote Controller)
“MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting
Remote
Controller
Display
MC
Applicable
Models
Central remote controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Two units are both set to master controller mode or slave controller mode.
Supposed
Causes
„ Address duplication of centralized remote controller
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Are
two or more central
remote controllers
connected?
NO
YES
Disconnect all central remote
controllers except one and
reset the power supply of the
central remote controller.
Reset power supply of the
central remote controller.
Troubleshooting
247
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
Si30-813
4. Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
4.1
“UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit
Remote
Controller
Display
UE
Applicable
Models
Schedule timer
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Supposed
Causes
„ Malfunction of transmission between central remote controller and indoor unit
„ Disconnection of connector for setting master controller (or individual/combined switching
connector)
„ Defect of schedule timer PC board
„ Defect of indoor unit PC board
248
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Has
an indoor unit
once connected been
removed or its address
changed?
YES
Reset power supply
simultaneously for all optional
controllers for centralized
control.
NO
Is
the power supply
turned on for indoor
units displaying
malfunction?
NO
Turn indoor unit's power
supply.
YES
Is
transmission wiring
disconnected or wired
incorrectly?
YES
Fix the wiring correctly.
NO
Is
transmission with all
indoor units
malfunctioning?
NO
YES
YES
Is
the transmission
wiring with the master
controller disconnected or
wired incorrectly?
Is the group
No. of malfunctioning
indoor units set?
YES
NO
Set the group No. correctly.
Replace indoor unit PC board.
Fix the wiring correctly.
NO
Is
the master controller's
connector for setting
master controller
disconnected?
NO
Troubleshooting
YES
Connect the connector
correctly.
Replace the central PC board.
249
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
4.2
Si30-813
“M1” PC Board Defect
Remote
Controller
Display
M1
Applicable
Models
Schedule timer
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect an abnormality in the DIII-NET polarity circuit.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When + polarity and - polarity are detected at the same time.
Supposed
Causes
„ Defect of schedule timer PC board
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Reset power supply.
Does the
system return to normal?
NO
250
YES
External factor other
than equipment
malfunction (noise etc.)
Replace the indoor unit
PC board.
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
4.3
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
“M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control
Remote
Controller
Display
M8
Applicable
Models
Schedule timer
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data. (The system will be
automatically reset.)
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When no master controller is present at the time of the startup of slave controller.
When the optional controllers for centralized control which was connected once, shows no
response.
Supposed
Causes
„ Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control
„ Defect of PC board of optional controllers for centralized control
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Has a
once connected
optional controller for
centralized control been
disconnected or
its address
changed?
YES
Reset power supply
simultaneously for all optional
controllers for centralized control.
NO
Is
the power supply
turned on for all optional
controllers for
centralized
control?
NO
Turn on power supply for all
optional controllers for centralized
control.
YES
Is
the reset switch
of all optional controllers
for centralized control
set to "normal" ?
NO
Set reset switch to "normal."
YES
Is
transmission wiring
disconnected or wired
incorrectly?
YES
Troubleshooting
NO
Fix the wiring correctly.
The PC board of one of the
optional controllers for centralized
control is defective. Try turning
on/off using each optional
controllers for centralized control,
and replace the PC board of the
one that is unable to control the
indoor unit.
251
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
4.4
Si30-813
“MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control
Remote
Controller
Display
MA
Applicable
Models
Schedule timer
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the schedule timer is set to individual use mode, other central component is present.
When multiple master controller are present.
Supposed
Causes
„ Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control
„ More than one master controller is connected.
„ Defect of PC board of optional controller for centralized control
252
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the wiring
adaptor for electrical
appendices
connected?
YES
Cannot be used in
combination with a wiring
adaptor for electrical
appendices. Remove the
wiring adaptor for electrical
appendices and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
NO
Is the schedule
timer connected?
YES
NO
Is a parallel interface
connected?
YES
NO
Is the schedule
timer's individual/combined
connector connected?
NO
Are
there two or
more optional
controllers
for centralized control
connected with the
connector for setting
master
controller?
YES
NO
Reset the power supply
for all optional controllers
for centralized control
simultaneously.
If the malfunction is still not cleared:
Troubleshooting
YES
Schedule timer and parallel
interface cannot be used in
combination. Disconnect
either the schedule timer or
parallel interface and reset
the power supply for
simultaneously centralized
control.
Disconnect the schedule
timer's individual / combined
connector and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Arrange so that the connector
for setting master controller is
connected to one controller
for centralized control and
reset the power supply for all
optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
Disconnect the connector for
setting master controller from
the master controller, connect
to another optional controller
for centralized control and
simultaneously reset all
optional controllers for
centralized control again. The
controller connected by the
connector for setting master
controller when the malfunction
is cleared is defective and
must be replaced.
253
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer)
4.5
Si30-813
“MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting
Remote
Controller
Display
MC
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
schedule timer
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When two or more schedule timers are connected.
Supposed
Causes
„ Address duplication of optional controller for centralized control
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Are two or more
centralized controller
connected?
NO
YES
Disconnect all centralized
controller except one and reset
the centralized controller timer’s
power supply.
Reset the power supply for the
centralized controller.
254
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
5. Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
5.1
Operation Lamp Blinks
Remote
Controller
Display
Operation lamp blinks
Applicable
Models
Indoor unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXUQ
Unified ON/OFF controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed
Causes
Troubleshooting
„
„
„
„
„
Malfunction of transmission between optional controller and indoor unit
Connector for setting master controller is disconnected
Defect of unified ON/OFF controller
Defect of indoor unit PC board
Malfunction of air conditioner
255
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is a
malfunction
code displayed on the
remote controller?
YES
Diagnose the cause with the
air conditioner's failure
diagnosis manual.
NO
Has a
once connected
indoor unit been removed
or its address
changed?
YES
Reset power supply for all
optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
NO
Is the
power supply for
the indoor unit displaying
a malfunction
turned
on?
YES
Is
transmission wiring
disconnected or wired
incorrectly?
NO
Is
transmission
with all indoor units
malfunctioning?
NO
YES
NO
YES
Is the
transmission
wiring with the master
controller disconnected or
wired incorrectly?
Turn the power supply of the
indoor unit on.
Fix the wiring correctly.
Is
the group
No. of malfunctioning
indoor units
set?
YES
NO
Set the group No.
correctly.
Replace indoor unit PC board.
NO
Fix the wiring correctly.
YES
Is the
master
controller's connector for
setting master controller
disconnected.
YES
Connect the connector
correctly.
NO
Replace the central PC board.
256
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
5.2
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Single Blink)
Remote
Controller
Display
“under host computer integrated control” (Repeats single blink)
Applicable
Models
Unified ON/OFF controller
Central remote controller, Schedule timer
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When the centralized controller, which was connected once, shows no response.
The control ranges are overlapped.
When multiple master central controller are present.
When the schedule timer is set to individual use mode, other central controller is present.
When the wiring adaptor for electrical appendices is present.
Supposed
Causes
„
„
„
„
„
Troubleshooting
Address duplication of central remote controller
Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control
Connection of more than one master controller
Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control
Defect of PC board of optional controllers for centralized control
257
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Si30-813
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Caution
Has a once
connected optional
controller for centralized
control been disconnected
or its address
changed?
YES
Reset power supply
simultaneously for all optional
controllers for centralized
control.
NO
Is the
power supply
turned on for all
optional controllers for
centralized
control?
NO
Turn on power supply for
all optional controllers for
centralized control.
YES
Is the
reset switch
of all optional controllers
for centralized
control set to
"normal"?
NO
Set reset switch to
"normal."
YES
Is
transmission wiring
disconnected or wired
incorrectly?
YES
NO
Is
a central remote
controller or schedule timer
connected?
YES
NO
Are
two or more unified
ON / OFF controllers
connected?
NO
Fix the wiring correctly.
Is the
central remote
controller or schedule
timer displaying a
malfunction?
YES
Refer to failure diagnosis for
central remote controller or
schedule timer.
NO
YES
Is the setting
of the unified
ON / OFF controller's
switch for setting
each address
duplicated?
YES
NO
Correct the setting of the
unified ON / OFF controller's
switch for setting each
address and reset the power
supply of the unified ON /
OFF controller.
A
258
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
A
Is the
wiring adaptor for
electrical appendices
connected?
YES
NO
Is a schedule timer
connected?
YES
Is a data station
connected?
NO
YES
NO
Is a parallel interface
connected?
YES
NO
Is the
schedule timer's
individual/combined
connector
connected?
NO
Are
there two or
more optional
controllers for centralized
control connected with the
connector for setting
master
control?
YES
NO
Reset the power supply
for all optional controllers
for centralized control
simultaneously.
If the malfunction is still not cleared:
Troubleshooting
YES
Cannot be used in
combination with a wiring
adaptor for electrical
appendices. Remove the
wiring adaptor for electrical
appendices and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Schedule timer and data
station cannot be used in
combination. Disconnect
either the schedule timer or
data station and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Schedule timer and parallel
interface cannot be used in
combination. Disconnect
either the schedule timer or
parallel interface and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Disconnect the schedule
timer's individual / combined
connector and reset the power
supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Arrange so that the connector
for setting master control is
connected to one controller for
centralized control and reset
the power supply for all
optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
Disconnect the connector for
setting master control from
the master controller, connect
to another optional controller
for centralized control and
simultaneously reset all
optional controllers for
centralized control again. The
controller connected by the
connector for setting master
control when the malfunction
is cleared is defective and
must be replaced.
259
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
5.3
Si30-813
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Double Blink)
Remote
Controller
Display
“under host computer integrated control” (Repeats double blink)
Applicable
Models
Unified ON/OFF controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
When no central control addresses are set to indoor units.
When no indoor units are connected within the control range.
Supposed
Causes
„ Central control address (group No.) is not set for indoor unit.
„ Improper address setting
„ Improper wiring of transmission wiring
Troubleshooting
Caution
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
or parts damage may be occurred.
Is the central
control address (group No.) NO
set for the
indoor unit?
YES
Is the switch
for setting each address
set correctly?
NO
YES
Is
the transmission
wiring disconnected or
wired incorrectly?
YES
Set by remote controller the
central control address for all
indoor units connected to the
central control line.
Set the switch for setting each
address correctly and
simultaneously reset the power
supply for all optional controllers
Fix the wiring correctly.
NO
Replace the PC board of the
unified ON/OFF controller.
260
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
CHECK 1 Check for causes of rise in high pressure
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify the faulty points.
Local
pressure
rise
Rise in high
pressure
[In cooling]
If the outside unit
electronic
expansion valve
is throttled
(∗1)
High pipe
resistance
Stop valve closed
← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Bent and Crush of
pipe
← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Clogging of foreign
particles
← Is there any temperature difference around
the filter or the branch pipe?
Faulty valve coil
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty outside
unit electronic
expansion valve
A temperature difference in
excess of 10°C between the inlet and
the outlet is deemed to be abnormal.
Faulty
control
Faulty high
pressure
control
Faulty valve body
Faulty high pressure sensor ← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Faulty control PC board
Faulty valve coil
Faulty indoor
unit electronic
expansion valve
← Does the pressure value of the Service
Checker match the reading of the
pressure sensor?
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty valve body
Faulty high pressure sensor ← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
[In heating]
If the indoor unit
electronic
expansion valve
excessively throttled
(∗2)
Faulty
control
Faulty indoor unit
liquid pipe thermistor
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
normal?
Faulty control PC board
← Does the pressure value of the Service
Checker match the reading of the pressure
sensor?
Dirty water heat exchanger
← Is the heat exchanger clogged (in cooling)?
Mixing-in of non-condensable gas
← Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
[In cooling]
High water temperature at the water heat exchanger inlet
Degradation in
condensing
capacity
Decrease in water
of the water heat
exchanger
Clogged water piping system
← Is the strainer or the like clogged?
Faulty water pump
← Does the water pump function normally?
Mixing-in of non-condensable gas
[In heating]
High suction air
temperature of
indoor unit
← Is air or else mixed in
the refrigerant system?
Short circuit
High ambient temperature
Faulty suction air thermistor of indoor unit
Faulty fan motor
Decreased
fan airflow
rate
Decreased
fan output
High air
passage
resistance
Excessive refrigerant charging
Improper mode selection
[In heating]
← Is the water temperature at the inlet not
more than 45°C?
← Is the suction air temperature not more
than 27°C?
← Is the indoor temperature not more
than 27°C?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance
characteristics normal?
← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
Are the motor coil resistance and
insulation normal?
Faulty control PC
board (including
capacity setting)
← If a spare PC board is mounted, is the
capacity setting properly made?
Dirty filter
← Is the air filter clogged?
Obstacle
← Is there any obstacle in the air
passage?
← Refer to CHECK 5
← Is the indoor unit too small for the large-sized outside unit?
∗1 : In cooling, the outside unit electronic expansion valve (Y1E) is fully open in normal condition.
∗2 : In heating, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “subcooled degree control”.
(Refer to “Electronic Expansion Valve Control” on page 95)
Troubleshooting
261
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Si30-813
CHECK 2 Check for causes of drop in low pressure
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify the faulty points.
[In cooling]
(∗1)
Faulty low
pressure
control
[In both cooling
and heating]
(∗2)
Abnormally low
low-pressure (Low
evaporating
temperature)
[In cooling]
If the indoor unit
electronic
expansion valve
is excessively
throttled
(∗3)
Faulty
compressor
capacity
control
Faulty low
pressure
protection control
Faulty indoor unit
electronic
expansion valve
← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Faulty control PC board
← Does the pressure value of the Service
Checker match the reading of the pressure sensor?
Faulty low pressure sensor
← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Faulty hot gas solenoid valve
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty control PC board
← Does the pressure value of the Service
Checker match the reading of the pressure sensor?
Faulty valve coil
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty valve body
Faulty
control
Faulty electronic
expansion valve
control
Faulty gas pipe thermistor
of indoor unit
← Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
Faulty liquid pipe thermistor
of indoor unit
← Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
Faulty valve coil
Faulty valve body
Faulty
control
Faulty low pressure sensor
← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Faulty suction pipe thermistor
← Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
Faulty control PC board
Low suction air
temperature of
indoor unit
[In cooling]
Degradation in
evaporating
capacity
← Does the pressure value of the Service Checker
match the reading of the pressure sensor?
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty control PC board
Faulty outside
unit electronic
expansion valve
[In heating]
If the outside unit
electronic
expansion valve
is excessively
throttled
(∗4)
Faulty low pressure sensor
Short circuit
← Is the suction air temperature not less than 14°C?
Low ambient temperature
← Is the indoor temperature not more than 14°C?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
Faulty suction air thermistor of indoor unit
Decreased
fan output
Decreased
fan airflow
rate
High air
passage
resistance
Faulty control PC
board (including
capacity setting)
← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
Are the motor coil resistance and
insulation normal?
← If a spare PC board is mounted, is the
capacity setting properly made?
Dirty filter
← Is the air filter clogged?
Obstacle
← Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Faulty fan motor
Low water temperature at the water heat exchanger inlet ← Is the water temperature at the water heat
[In heating]
Dirty water heat exchanger
High pipe
resistance
exchanger inlet not less than 10°C?
← Is the water heat exchanger clogged?
Abnormal piping length
← Is the piping length in the permissible range?
Bent or Crush of pipe
← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Clogging of foreign particles
← Is there any temperature difference around
the filter or the branch pipe?
← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Stop valve closed
Less circulation
quantity of
refrigerant
Inadequate refrigerant quantity
← Refer to CHECK 6
Moisture choke
← Eliminate moisture by vacuum break.
∗1 : For details of the compressor capacity control while in cooling, refer to “Compressor Control” on page 71.
∗2 : The “low pressure protection control” includes low pressure drop control and hot gas bypass control. For
details, refer to page 77.
∗3 : In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheated degree control”. (For details,
refer to page 95.)
∗4 : In heating, the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (Y1E) is used for “superheated degree control of
outside unit heat exchanger”. (For details, refer to page 73.)
262
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
CHECK 3 Check for causes of overheat operation
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify the faulty points.
Clogged hot gas passage
Faulty hot
gas bypass
control
Faulty solenoid valve coil
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty solenoid valve body
(∗1)
Faulty control PC board
Faulty
discharge
pipe
temperature
control
[In cooling only]
Faulty subcooling
electronic
expansion valve
(Y3E) control
← Are the coil resistance and insulation
normal?
Faulty valve coil
Faulty
subcooling
electronic
expansion valve
Faulty valve body
Faulty
control
Faulty subcooling heat
← Is the connector properly connected?
exchanger outlet thermistor
Are the thermistor resistance
Faulty low pressure sensor ← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
characteristics normal?
(∗2)
Faulty control PC board ← Does the pressure value of the Service
Rise in
discharge
pipe
temperature
Faulty four-way
changeover
valve function
Superheated
compressor
[In cooling]
If the indoor unit
electronic
expansion valve
excessively
throttled
(∗3)
Four-way changeover valve is
located in an intermediate position
Leakage from hot gas bypass valve
Superheat caused by
axis damage
Superheat caused by
faulty compressor
Faulty indoor unit
electronic
expansion valve
Faulty valve coil
Faulty control
Faulty liquid pipe
thermistor of indoor unit
Faulty control PC board
Faulty outside
unit electronic
expansion valve
Faulty valve coil
Faulty suction pipe thermistor
Faulty control PC board
Inadequate refrigerant
quantity
High pipe resistance
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
normal?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
normal?
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty valve body
Faulty low pressure sensor
Faulty control
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty valve body
Faulty gas pipe
thermistor of indoor unit
Faulty
superheated
degree
control
[In heating]
If the outside unit
electronic
expansion valve
excessively
throttled
(∗4)
Checker match the reading of the
pressure sensor?
← Is the temperature of piping connected to the
four-way changeover valve normal?
← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
normal?
← Does the pressure value of the Service Checker
match the reading of the pressure sensor?
← Refer to CHECK 6
Abnormal pipe length
← Is the piping length in the permissible range?
Bent or Crush of pipe
← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
(Including moisture choke)
← Eliminate moisture by vacuum break.
Stop valve closed
← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
∗1 : For hot gas bypass control, refer to “Low Pressure Protection Control” on page 77.
∗2 : For subcooling electronic expansion valve, refer to page 73.
∗3 : In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheated degree control”. (Refer to page 95.)
∗4 : In heating, the outside unit electronic expansion valve (Y1E) is used for “superheated degree control.” (Refer to page
73.)
∗5 : Reference values for superheated degree to be used in the judgment of overheat operation
Suction gas superheated degree: 10°C or more Discharge gas superheated degree: 45°C or more, excluding
when it is immediately after startup, under drop control or other specific conditions.
(The values above must be used only for reference purposes. Even it is operated within the range above,operation
may be normal in other conditions.)
Troubleshooting
263
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Si30-813
CHECK 4 Check for causes of wet operation
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify the faulty points.
Faulty crankcase heater
Dwelled
refrigerant
Frequent starts and
stops of the compressor
Excessive refrigerant
charging
[In cooling]
If the indoor unit
electronic
expansion valve
excessively
opened
(∗1)
← Refer to CHECK 5
Faulty valve coil
Faulty indoor
unit electronic
expansion valve
Faulty valve body
Faulty gas pipe thermistor
of indoor unit
Faulty control
Faulty liquid pipe thermistor
of indoor unit
Faulty
superheated
degree control
Wet operation
[In heating]
If the outside unit
electronic
expansion valve
excessively
opened
(∗2)
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
normal?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance
characteristics normal?
Faulty control PC board
Faulty valve coil
Faulty outside
unit electronic
expansion valve
Faulty control
Faulty low pressure sensor
← Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Faulty suction pipe thermistor
← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
← Does the pressure value of the Service Checker
match the reading of the pressure sensor?
Faulty control PC board
← Is the heat exchanger clogged?
Decreased
fan output
[In cooling]
Decreased
fan airflow
rate
← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
Are the motor coil resistance and
insulation normal?
Faulty fan motor
Faulty control PC board
(including capacity setting)
High air
passage
resistance
Degradation in
evaporation
capacity
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Faulty valve body
Dirty evaporator
[In heating]
← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Dirty filter
← Is the air filter clogged?
Obstacle
← Is there any obstacle in the
air passage?
Dirty water heat exchanger
← Is the water heat exchanger clogged?
Decrease in
water of the
water heat
exchanger
Clogged water piping system
← Is the strainer or other parts clogged?
Faulty water pump
← Does the water pump function normally?
∗1 : In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheated degree control”. (Refer to page 95.)
∗2 : In heating, the outside unit electronic expansion valve (Y1E) is used for “superheated degree control”. (Refer to page
73.)
∗3 : Reference values for superheated degree to be used in the judgment of wet operation
Suction gas superheated degree: 3°C or less Discharge gas superheated degree: 15°C or less, excluding
when it is immediately after startup, under drop control or other specific conditions.
(The values above must be used only for reference purposes. Even it is operated within the range above,
operation may be normal in other conditions.)
264
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
CHECK 5 Check for excessive refrigerant charging
In case of the VRV, judgment must be made based on operation conditions in relation to pressure control and
electronic expansion valve control. Refer to the following criteria to make such decisions.
Diagnosis of excessive refrigerant charging
(1) Since high pressure rises, overload control is carried out and therefore capacity tends to be
insufficient.
(2) Since superheated degree of suction gas decreases (or it starts wet operation), the temperature of
the compressor discharge pipe drops too much for pressure applied.
(3) Since the subcooling degree of condensate liquid increases, the temperature of air blown through
subcooled part decreases in heating.
Cooling
“ªáº
No changes within the range where the receiver is capable of absorbing.
High pressure
step-down control
Gradually rises as the
frequency increases.
Reaches the
lowest frequency
Subcooling increases
(Liquid connecting pipe
temperature drops)
High pressure
Maintains a certain
level of low pressure
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to decreased
compressor output
Frequency
In order to maintain low
pressure, frequency rises
due to capacity control.
Heating
å~áº
High pressure
No changes within the
range where the receiver is
capable of absorbing.
Outside unit electronic expansion valve opens due
to overload control
Reaches the lowest frequency
Maintains a certain level
of high pressure
High pressure drops
immediately after overload
control, however high
pressure rises again.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises due
to decreased frequency
Low pressure drops because the outside
unit electronic expansion valve is closed.
Low pressure protection activates hot gas
bypass = In fact, low pressure hunting.
Frequency
In order to maintain high
pressure, frequency decreases
due to capacity control.
(Degree of excessive charging)
Adequate level
Troubleshooting
Increase in the degree of
excessive charging
265
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Si30-813
CHECK 6 Check for inadequate refrigerant quantity
In case of the VRV, judgment must be made based on operation conditions in relation to pressure control and
electronic expansion valve control. Refer to the following criteria to make such decisions.
Diagnosis of inadequate refrigerant
(1) The superheated degree of suction gas increases and temperature of compressor discharge gas
rises.
(2) The superheated degree of suction gas increases and the electronic expansion valve slightly
opens.
(3) With low pressure, cooling capacity (heating capacity) is unavailable.
Cooling
The open degree of the indoor unit
electronic expansion valve increases.
Any one of electronic
expansion valves opens fully.
With low outdoor air cooling
control, fan is controlled in
order to maintain high
pressure = Hunting in fact
Reaches the
lowest frequency
High pressure
Maintains a certain
level of low pressure
Low pressure
Frequency
High pressure drops as
compressor capacity
decreases.
Low pressure rises due to
large open degree of indoor
unit electronic expansion
valve. Frequency slightly
increases due to capacity
control.
When frequency reaches the
lowest level, low pressure cannot
be maintained.
In order to maintain low
pressure, frequency
decreases due to capacity
control.
The open degree of the outside unit
electronic expansion valve increases.
The outside unit electronic
expansion valve opens fully.
Frequency increases. Discharges pipe or low
pressure droop control
Reaches the lowest
frequency
High pressure
Maintains a certain
level of high
pressure
Heating
å~áº
Low pressure
Frequency
In order to maintain low pressure, Frequency decreases due
frequency decreases due to
to droop control.
capacity control.
(Degree of inadequate refrigerant)
Adequate level
266
Increase in the degree of
inadequate refrigerant
Troubleshooting
Si30-813
Part 7
Procedure for Mounting /
Dismounting of Switch Box
1. Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box.........................268
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting...................................................................268
1.2 Procedure for Mounting........................................................................268
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
267
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
Si30-813
1. Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch
Box
1.1
Procedure for Dismounting
1. Dismount the lid from the switch box.
2. Disconnect high voltage and low voltage wirings from the PC board and the terminal blocks,
referring to Figure on the right.
3. Unscrew mounting screws from the top plate, the stop valve mounting plate, and the bottom
frame in a total of 6 places.
4. With attention paid not to make the switch box support leg into contact with the side panel,
rotate the switch box to pull out it, while referring to Figure on the right.
In order to pull out the switch box, check to be sure no wirings get stuck with the switch box.
Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting of Switch Box
1.2
Procedure for Mounting
„ Mount the switch box, following the procedure for dismounting in reverse.
After the completion of mounting, check to be sure connectors are all properly connected.
268
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
Si30-813
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
269
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
270
Si30-813
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
Si30-813
Part 8
Appendix
1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................272
1.1 Outside Units........................................................................................272
1.2 BS Units ...............................................................................................273
1.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................274
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................277
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Outside Unit..........................................................................................277
Outside Unit Field Wiring......................................................................280
BS Unit .................................................................................................284
Indoor Unit............................................................................................286
3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts .................................................300
3.1 Outside Unit..........................................................................................300
3.2 Indoor Side ...........................................................................................301
4. Option List ...........................................................................................306
4.1 Optional Accessories............................................................................306
5.
6.
7.
8.
Appendix
Example of Connection .......................................................................307
Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics........................309
Pressure Sensor .................................................................................311
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power
Transistors and Diode Modules ..........................................................312
271
Piping Diagrams
Si30-813
1. Piping Diagrams
1.1
Outside Units
4D048290C
RWEYQ8P, 10P
272
Appendix
Si30-813
1.2
Piping Diagrams
BS Units
BSVQ100, 160, 250PV1
BSVQ36, 60PVJU
4D057985A
Appendix
273
Piping Diagrams
1.3
Si30-813
Indoor Unit
FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ
Gas piping connection port
Heat exchanger
Flare connection : φ15.9 or less
Attached piping : Above φ19.1
(4)
Fan
(2)
(3)
Liquid piping connection port
(Flare connection)
Filter
(1)
Electronic
Filter
expansion valve
DU220-602J
Code
Name
Code
Main function
Used for gas superheated degree control while in
cooling operation or subcooled degree control while
in heating operation.
(1)
Electronic expansion valve
Y1E
(2)
Suction air temperature
thermistor
R1T
Used for thermostat control.
(3)
Liquid pipe
R2T
Used for gas superheated degree control while in
cooling operation or subcooled degree control while
in heating operation.
(4)
Gas pipe
R3T
Used for gas superheated degree control while in
cooling operation.
(mm)
274
Capacity
20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50M(A)
Gas
φ12.7
Liquid
φ6.4
63 / 80 / 100 / 125M(A)
φ15.9
φ9.5
200M(A)
250M(A)
φ19.1
φ22.2
φ9.5
φ9.5
Appendix
Si30-813
Piping Diagrams
FXDQ
Gas side
Liquid side
Electronic expansion valve
Filter
Filter
Fan
Indoor heat exchanger
4D060927
„ Refrigerant pipe connection port diameters
Model
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB / 40NB /50NBVE(T)
FXDQ63NBVE(T)
Gas
φ12.7
φ15.9
(mm)
Liquid
φ6.4
φ9.5
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
4D034245C
„ Refrigerant pipe connection port diameters
Model
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50PVE
FXMQ63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
Appendix
Gas
φ12.7
φ15.9
(mm)
Liquid
φ6.4
φ9.5
275
Piping Diagrams
Si30-813
FXUQ + BEVQ
Indoor unit
4D037995H
Connection Unit
4D034127B
276
Appendix
NOTES)
Appendix
:TERMINAL STRIP
:FIELD WIRING.
:CONNECTOR
:TERMINAL
:PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
11. COLORS BLK:BLACK RED:RED BLU:BLUE WHT:WHITE PNK:PINK GRY:GRAY ORG:ORANGE.
10. COOL/HEAT SELECTOR CANNOT BE CONNECTED WHEN OPERATING HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM.
APPEARS ON THE INDOOR REMOTE CONTROLLER.)
(OPERATION POWER WILL OUTPUT FROM THE HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP WHEN THE OPERATION DISPLAY
WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X2M),
(MAKE SURE THAT THE AUXILIARY NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT CAN SWITCH A MINIMUM LOAD OF 1 MA AT 15 VDC.)
SWITCH FOR THE HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP) TO TERMINALS (3) AND (4) OF THE TERMINAL BLOCK (X3M).
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT THE INTERLOCK CIRCUIT (AN AUXILIARY NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT OF THE ELECTROMAGNETIC
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON’T SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH)
6. REFER TO “SERVICE PRECAUTION” LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH.
TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 · Q2.
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL, FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3.
2.
C: 3D061377B
2.1
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT.
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
2. Wiring Diagrams
Outside Unit
RWEYQ8PY1, 10PY1
277
278
NOTES)
:TERMINAL STRIP
:FIELD WIRING.
:CONNECTOR
:TERMINAL
:PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
11. COLORS BLK:BLACK RED:RED BLU:BLUE WHT:WHITE PNK:PINK GRY:GRAY ORG:ORANGE.
10. COOL/HEAT SELECTOR CANNOT BE CONNECTED WHEN OPERATING HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM.
APPEARS ON THE INDOOR REMOTE CONTROLLER.)
(OPERATION POWER WILL OUTPUT FROM THE HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP WHEN THE OPERATION DISPLAY
WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X2M),
(MAKE SURE THAT THE AUXILIARY NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT CAN SWITCH A MINIMUM LOAD OF 1 MA AT 15 VDC.)
SWITCH FOR THE HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP) TO TERMINALS (3) AND (4) OF THE TERMINAL BLOCK (X3M).
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT THE INTERLOCK CIRCUIT (AN AUXILIARY NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT OF THE ELECTROMAGNETIC
7. WHEN OPERATING, DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH)
6. REFER TO “SERVICE PRECAUTION” LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH.
TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 · Q2.
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL, FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3.
2.
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTSIDE UNIT.
C: 3D061378A
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
RWEYQ10PYL
Appendix
Appendix
NOTES)
:TERMINAL STRIP
:FIELD WIRING.
:CONNECTOR
:TERMINAL
:PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
11. COLORS BLK:BLACK RED:RED BLU:BLUE WHT:WHITE PNK:PINK GRY:GRAY ORG:ORANGE.
10. COOL/HEAT SELECTOR CANNOT BE CONNECTED WHEN OPERATING HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM.
APPEARS ON THE INDOOR REMOTE CONTROLLER.)
(OPERATION POWER WILL OUTPUT FROM THE HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP WHEN THE OPERATION DISPLAY
WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X2M),
(MAKE SURE THAT THE AUXILIARY NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT CAN SWITCH A MINIMUM LOAD OF 1 MA AT 15 VDC.)
SWITCH FOR THE HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP) TO TERMINALS (3) AND (4) OF THE TERMINAL BLOCK (X3M).
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT THE INTERLOCK CIRCUIT (AN AUXILIARY NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT OF THE ELECTROMAGNETIC
7. WHEN OPERATING, DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH)
6. REFER TO “SERVICE PRECAUTION” LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH.
TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 · Q2.
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL, FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3.
2.
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTSIDE UNIT.
3D061376A
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
RWEYQ10PTL
279
Wiring Diagrams
2.2
Si30-813
Outside Unit Field Wiring
3D048824D
RWEYQ8PY1 / RWEYQ10PY1 / RWEYQ16PY1 / RWEYQ18PY1 / RWEYQ20PY1 / RWEYQ24PY1
RWEYQ26PY1 / RWEYQ28PY1 / RWEYQ30PY1
RWEYQ10PYL / RWEYQ20PYL / RWEYQ30PYL
280
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
3D052075A
RWEYQ10PTL / RWEYQ20PTL / RWEYQ30PTL
Appendix
281
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
3D048823D
RWEYQ8PY1 / RWEYQ10PY1 / RWEYQ16PY1 / RWEYQ18PY1 / RWEYQ20PY1
RWEYQ24PY1 / RWEYQ26PY1 / RWEYQ28PY1 / RWEYQ30PY1
RWEYQ10PYL / RWEYQ20PYL / RWEYQ30PYL
282
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
3D052074A
RWEYQ10PTL / RWEYQ20PTL / RWEYQ30PTL
Appendix
283
Wiring Diagrams
2.3
Si30-813
BS Unit
3D055928C
BSVQ100P / 160P / 250PV1
284
Appendix
Appendix
ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN DISCHARGE)
ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN SUCTION)
NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
Y4E
Y5E
Z1C
FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V)
FLASHING LAMP
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN)
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P)
TERMINAL STRIP (POWER)
X2A
TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
TERMINAL STRIP (C/H SELECTOR)
ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
F1U
HAP
PS
X1M
X1M (A1P)
X2M
Y1E
ON
OFF
DS1
DS2
BSVQ60PVJU
1234 1234
ON
OFF
FOR USING DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2), REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL
OR "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER.
DS1
DS2
BSVQ36PVJU
1234 1234
NOTES) 1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM APPLIES TO THE BS UNIT ONLY.
2.
: TERMINAL STRIP,
: CONNECTOR,
: TERMINAL
: FIELD WIRING,
: PROTECTIVE EARTH
3. WHEN USING THE COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY),
CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS A, B AND C ON X2M.
4. AS FOR WIRING TO THE IN/D UNIT (F1) · (F2) AND OUT/D UNIT (F1) · (F2)
ON X1M (A1P), REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL.
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (BLU : BLUE RED : RED)
6. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
7. DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2) INITIAL SETTINGS ARE AS FOLLOWS.
OUTDOOR
UNIT
INDOOR
UNIT
Y5E M
Y4E M
Y3E M
Y2E M
Y1E M
6
6
6
6
6
HAP
X2A
X2M
A B C
F1 F2 F1 F2
X1A
F1U
PS
NOTE) 7.
DS2
X1M
DS1
TO IN/D TO OUT/D
UNIT
UNIT
X8A NOTE) 3.
X7A
X6A
X5A
X4A
A1P
CONNECTOR (WIRING EXTERNAL CONTROL
ADAPTOR FOR OUTDOOR UNIT)
ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB DISCHARGE)
ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB SUCTION)
Y2E
Y3E
A1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
DS1, DS2 DIP SWITCH
Z1C
N=2
RED
BLU
Y1E
Y5E
Y4E
Y3E
X1M
L1
L2
3D058235A
POWER SUPPLY
~208-230V
60Hz
BS UNIT TOP
Y2E
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
BSVQ36P / 60PVJU
285
X33A
A1P
X2M
A2P
CN1
KPR
R1T
X16A
X27A
F1U
X25A
Y1E
M
X7A
YLW
YLW
Z1F
C1
+
PS
X18A
MS
3~
100, 125-CLASS
M1F
Z1C
X20A
-
V1R +
M1P
M
~
K1R
t˚
R4T
N=1
X35A
NOTE) 3
HAP
X17A
t˚
R3T
M1S
MSW
X36A
X33A
NOTE) 3
X30A
X24A
NOTE) 3
X15A
S1L
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
PNK
X2A
A3P
X1A
X1A
A4P
H1P
H2P BS1
H3P
H4P
H5P
H6P
P1
X1M
P2
F1
MS
3~
25~80-CLASS
M1F
WHT
Z1C
N=1
TRANSMISSION WIRING
CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
NOTE) 2
P2
WIRED REMOTE
P1 R1T
CONTROLLER
SS1
F2
X20A
INPUT FROM
NOTE) 4
OUTSIDE
T1
T2
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
SS2
SS1
3D059890
: TERMINAL
,
: CONNECTOR
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR
: FIELD WIRING
ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY THE REMOTE
2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO
CONTROLLER. SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAILS.
THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION
5. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) BY
MANUAL.
INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
3. X24A, X33A AND X35A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS:
ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN
ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
CONTROL BOX
X35A
A2P
WHT
N
GRN/YLW
RED
L
X2M
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
POWER SUPPLY
~220-240V ~220V
50Hz
60Hz
A1P
t˚
R2T
RED
GRN
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
286
RED
2.4
NOTES)
1.
INDOOR UNIT
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(ON-RED)
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
C1 CAPACITOR
(TIMER-GREEN)
F1U FUSE (F, 5A, 250V) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(FILTER SIGN-RED)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB)
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID) X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROLLER)
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS)
R4T THERMISTOR PTC X33A CONNECTOR
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
S1L FLOAT SWITCH
V1R DIODE BRIDGE
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP
CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X1M TERMINAL STRIP
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
X2M TERMINAL STRIP
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
Y1E ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
Z1C FERRITE CORE
Z1F NOISE FILTER
PS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
(ATTACHED TO WIRELESS
X24A
REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
X1M
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
Indoor Unit
FXFQ25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
3D039556A
FXCQ20M / 25M / 32M / 63MVE
Appendix
287
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
3D039557A
FXCQ40M / 50M / 80M/ 125MVE
288
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
3D039564C
FXKQ25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 63MAVE
Appendix
289
TRANSFORMER (220V/22V)
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
TERMINAL BLOCK
TERMINAL BLOCK
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
T1R
V1TR
X1M
X2M
Y1E
SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
SS1
: CONNECTOR
: TERMINAL
Z2C
Z1C
X2M
X16A
CONTROL BOX
T1R
C1
A1P
X18A
~220-240V~220V
50Hz
60Hz
POWER
SUPPLY
Y1E
M
N
L
GRN
/YLW
BLU
RED
S1L
X2M
X8A
X7A
X31A
F1U
X13A
t˚
R1T
X25A
KPR
X1A
X12A
t˚
R2T
M
~
t˚
M1P
T1R
X11A
t˚
R3T
HAP
X3A
X4A
X27A
X18A
X30A
V1TR
X16A
A1P
BLK
RED
GRY
PRP
BLU
Z2C
N=3
Z1C
N=3
C1
X1M
PNK T2
WHT T1
YLW F2
ORG F1
BLU P2
BLK P1
M1F
M
~
Q1M
3D060547
NOTE) 5
INPUT FROM
OUTSIDE
TRANSMISSION
WIRING CENTRAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
NOTE) 3
P2 R1T
P1
SS1
WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
2.
: FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE PNK : PINK ORG : ORANGE GRN : GREEN
,
NOTES)
1.
X18A
L
N
X1M
CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
X16A
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
Z1C · Z2C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
FLOAT SWITCH
S1L
THERMISTOR (COIL-1)
R2T
R3T
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
M1F
MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
KPR
THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
HAP
Q1M
FUSE (F5A/250V)
F1U
M1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
CAPACITOR (M1F)
YLW
C1
WHT
290
A1P
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB
FXDQ40NB / 50NB / 63NBVE (with Drain Pump)
Appendix
CAPACITOR (M1F)
FUSE (F5A/250V)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED)
THERMISTOR (AIR)
THERMISTOR (COIL-1)
THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
TRANSFORMER (220V/22V)
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
TERMINAL BLOCK
TERMINAL BLOCK
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
F1U
HAP
M1F
Q1M
R1T
R2T
R3T
T1R
V1TR
X1M
X2M
Y1E
SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
SS1
: CONNECTOR
: TERMINAL
Z2C
Z1C
X2M
X16A
CONTROL BOX
T1R
C1
A1P
X18A
~220-240V~220V
50Hz
60Hz
POWER
SUPPLY
Y1E
M
N
L
X2M
GRN
/YLW
BLU
RED
X7A
X31A
F1U
X13A
t˚
R1T
X1A
X12A
t˚
R2T
T1R
t˚
X11A
t˚
R3T
X3A
HAP
X4A
X27A
X18A
X30A
V1TR
X16A
A1P
BLK
RED
GRY
PRP
BLU
Z2C
N=3
Z1C
N=3
C1
X1M
PNK T2
WHT T1
YLW F2
ORG F1
BLU P2
BLK P1
M1F
M
~
Q1M
3D060548
NOTE) 5
INPUT FROM
OUTSIDE
TRANSMISSION
WIRING CENTRAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
NOTE) 3
P2 R1T
P1
SS1
WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
2.
: FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE PNK : PINK ORG : ORANGE GRN : GREEN
,
NOTES)
1.
CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
X18A
L
N
X1M
CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X16A
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
Z1C · Z2C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
YLW
C1
WHT
Appendix
A1P
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB
FXDQ40NB / 50NB / 63NBVET (without Drain Pump)
291
292
INDOOR UNIT
POWER SUPPLY
NOTE-6
COMPRESSOR ADAPTOR FOR WIRING
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
220-240V 220V
OPERATION (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
TERMINAL BOARD
LOW E.S.P OPERATION NOTE-5 SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY
~
~
50Hz 60Hz
X1
CAPACITOR (M1F)
220-240V 220V
KCR
~
~
FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V)
X4A
X2
60Hz
50Hz
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
X3
KFR
A2P
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F)
S1H
X4
X3A X4A X5A
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
L
N X3M
FAN
L N X3M
Hu
KHuR
HIGH E.S.P OPERATION
%H2O
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
OPERATION
R1T R2T R3T S1L
Y2
K1M
X1M L N
K1M
MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
KHR
F1U
Y1
K1M
X4A
THERMO SWITCH (135˚C) OR
BLK
t˚
t˚
t˚
F1U
RED BLU GRN/YLW
YC
(145˚C NOTE9) (M1F EMBEDDED)
F2U
WHT
F3U A1P
A2P
L N
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
E1H
E1H
X3A X4A X5A
X13A X12A X11A
X8A
R2T · R3T THERMISTOR (COIL)
(20 · 25 · 32 · 40 · 50 · 63 TYPE)
F1U
HAP
FLOAT SWITCH
S1L
X16A
40 · 50 · 63 · 80
(20 · 25 · 32 TYPE)
X3A
X18A
100 · 125 TYPE
TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
T1R
HIGH E.S.P OPERATION
X30A
TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER)
X1M
PNK
FC FH FL FLL T1R
TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)
X2M
T2
T2
NOTE-4
X4A
X4A
WHT
t˚
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
Y1E
INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
KPR T1
T1
BRN
BLK
ORG
RED
X1A
YLW
OPTIONAL PARTS
A2P
NOTE-3
F2
F2
BLU
X3A X4A
ELECTRIC HEATER
E1H
ORG
TRANSMISSION WIRING
A2P
F1
F1
L
LL
C
K1R K2R K3R
F1U-F3U FUSE ( B , 15A, 250V)
(80 · 100 · 125 TYPE)
CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLU
X3A X4A
P2
P2
Hu
HUMIDIFIER
X7A
ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
BLK
P1
K1M
MAGNETIC RELAY (E1H)
P1
RED GRY BLK ORG BRN
X18A
X16A
FC FH FL FLL
X7A
S1H
HUMIDISTAT
Y2
Y1
WHT
M
X2M
X4A
~
Q1M
X3M
TERMINAL BLOCK (E1H)
C1
BLK
ORG BRN
A2P
A1P
RED
M1F (80 · 100 · 125 TYPE)
YLW
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLU
A2P C
R1T
THERMISTOR (AIR)
L LL
X1M
WHT
WHT
T1R C1
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
X3A X4A X5A X6A
R1T
M
M
X2M
X7A
ADAPTOR FOR WIRING
P1 P2
~
RED GRY BLK BLU
F1U · F2U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V)
SS1
M1P
Y1E
ORG BRN
KCR
MAGNETIC RELAY
M
WHT
~
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
KFR
MAGNETIC RELAY
C1
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
Q1M
KHR
MAGNETIC RELAY(E1H)
YLW
M1F (20 · 25 · 32 · 40 · 50 · 63 TYPE)
KHuR MAGNETIC RELAY(Hu)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR
FOR ELECTORICAL APPENDICES)
F1U
F2U
X1A
TERMINALS FOR
OPERATION
INDICATOR
3D039561B
NOTES)
1.
: TERMINAL BLOCK,
,
: CONNECTOR,
: TERMINAL
2.
: FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE. FDRCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE
INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
5. IN CASE INSTALLING THE ELECTRIC HEATER, EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR HEATER CIRCUIT (K1M, E1H). IN THIS CASE, THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY HAS TO BE SUPPLIED
INDEPENDENTLY.
6. IN CASE HIGH OR LOW E.S.P. OPERATION, CHANGE OVER THE WIRING CONNECTION FROM X4A (OF A2P) TO X3A OR X5A.
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRY : GRAY ORG : ORANGE BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED BRN : BROWN GRN : GREEN)
8. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
9. ONLY 80. 100. 125 TYPE.
X2A
A1P
A2P
C1
F1U
HAP
K1R-K3R
KPR
M1F
M1P
Q1M
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
FXSQ20M / 25M / 32M / 40M / 50M / 63M / 80M / 100M / 125MVE
Appendix
Appendix
X10A
F3U
K1R
HAP
Z1F
-t˚
X3A
R5T
A2P
TO X70A (A1P)
R2
X2A
V2R
X1A
X9A
-
YLW
BLU
ORG
PNK
GRY
RED
WHT
BLK
-
N
L
GRN
/YLW
5
MS
3~
M1F
R4
Z1C
N=1
GRN
BLU
RED
BLU
RED
F1U
X10A
F4U
BLK
PS
KPR
X25A
K1R
R1
A2P
HAP
Z1F
X3A
PS
R2
F2U
X8A
BLU
BRN
ORG
WHT
RED
X16A
t˚
R1T
t˚
R3T
M
X7A
MS
3~
M1F
Y1E
X35A
HAP
X18A X17A
t˚
R2T
X1M X2M
A
3
P
*
Z2C
A
1
P
*ONLY FXMQ50PVE • 63PVE • 80PVE • 100PVE • 125PVE
X33A
X35A
X28A
WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
SS1
P2
P1 R1T
CENTRAL REMOTE
CONTROLLER
NOTE) 2
TRANSMISSION
WIRING
INPUT FROM
OUTSIDE NOTE) 3
EL. COMPO. BOX (INDOOR)
Z
1
C
BLK
A2P
L1P
T2
T1
F2
F1
P2
P1
X2M
PNK
WHT
YLW
ORG
S1L
X15A
X30A
X33A
X28A
X13A
t˚
R4T
3D058783A
NOTES) 1.
: TERMINAL
: CONNECTOR
: FIELD WIRING
2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO
THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION
MANUAL.
3. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED
OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY
REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION
MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
4. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE
PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY GRN : GREEN
ORG : ORANGE.
V1R
-
+ C1
X6A
GRN
L1R
Z2C
YLW YLW
FOR FXMQ20PVE • 25PVE • 32PVE • 40PVE
BLK
X70A
X27A
A1P
TERMINAL STRIP
(CONTROL)
Y1E ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE
Z1C, Z2C NOISE FILTER
(FERRITE CORE)
Z1F NOISE FILTER
CONNECTOR OPTIONAL
ACCESSORY
X28A CONNECTOR
(POWER SUPPLY FOR WIRING)
X33A CONNECTOR
(FOR WIRING)
X35A CONNECTOR (ADAPTER)
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB)
X2M
R3
X1M
+ C2 + C3
~220V
60Hz
SWITCHING POWER
SUPPLY (A1P, A2P)
RESISTOR
(CURRENT LIMITING)
CURRENT SENSING
DEVICE
RESISTOR
(ELECTRIC DISCHARGE)
THERMISTOR (SUCTION AIR)
THERMISTOR (LIQUID)
THERMISTOR (GAS)
THERMISTOR
(DISCHARGE AIR)
THERMISTOR NTC
(CURRENT LIMITING)
FLOAT SWITCH
DIODE BRIDGE
POWER MODULE
TERMINAL STRIP
(POWER SUPPLY)
-
PS
A3P
+ C1
X6A
V1R
L1R
INDOOR UNIT
PS
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD
R1
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD (FAN)
R2
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD (CAPACITOR) R3, R4
C1, C2, C3 CAPACITOR
F1U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) R1T
R2T
F2U FUSE (T, 5A, 250V)
R3T
F3U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V)
F4U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V)
R4T
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
R5T
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN)
(A1P, A2P)
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY
S1L
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY
V1R
L1R REACTOR
V2R
M1F MOTOR (FAN)
X1M
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
A1P
BLU
RED
TO X1M
~220-240V
50Hz
FOR FXMQ50PVE • 63PVE • 80PVE • 100PVE • 125PVE
N
L
POWER
SUPPLY
M
~
BLU
M1P
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
293
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
3D039621B
FXMQ200MA / 250MAVE
294
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
3D039801D
FXHQ32MA / 63MA / 100MAVE
Appendix
295
POWER CIRCUIT
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(FILTER SIGN-RED)
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(TIMER-GREEN)
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED)
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED
PC
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER)
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS PIPE)
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID PIPE)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP)
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
F1U FUSE( B , 3A, 250V)
SIDE
FRONT
X1M
X2M
X27A
X20A
F1U
: CONNECTOR
: CONNECTOR
: FIELD WIRING
M1F
MS
3~
PC
: TERMINAL
A1P
HAP
N WHT
L RED
A1P
X2M GRN/YLW
PC
M1S
MSW
X36A
NE
GRN
HAP
Y1E
M
X7A
X35A
X19A
X18A
X14A
WHT
X15A
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
X35A
X15A
CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
SHOWS SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR.
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
4.
X1A
A3P
H1P
BS1
H2P
H3P
H4P
CONNECTING.
ENGINEERING DATA AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE
ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM
6. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES
INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE
OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
8. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS
3D034206D
ATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
AND WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER BY INSTALL-
SWITCH (SS1, SS2) OF WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BLK : BLACK ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN BLU : BLUE 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR
3. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED WHT : WHITE GRN : GREEN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
PNK
WHT
YLW
ORG
BLU
BLK
X1A
SS2
SS1
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
X2A
A2P
(WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
NOTE) 5
T2
INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
T1
TRANSMISSION WIRING
F2
F1
CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
P2
NOTE) 2
P1
SS1
P2
X1M
WIRED REMOTE
P1 R1T CONTROLLER
X24A
NOTE) 8
A1P
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM
X30A
NOTE) 8
X24A
t˚
t˚
t˚
R1T
R2T
R3T
2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN
1.
X1M
X2M
CONTROL BOX
(INDOOR UNIT)
HAP
A1P
NOTES)
L
N
220V
~
60Hz
POWER SUPPLY
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
INDOOR UNIT
RED
296
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
FXAQ20MA / 25MA / 32MAVE / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
3D039826D
FXLQ20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 / 63MAVE
FXNQ20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 / 63MAVE
Appendix
297
Wiring Diagrams
Si30-813
3D044973A
FXUQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAV1
298
Appendix
Si30-813
Wiring Diagrams
BEVQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAVE
3D044901B
Appendix
299
List of Electrical and Functional Parts
Si30-813
3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts
3.1
Outside Unit
3.1.1 RWEYQ8PY1, 10PY1, 10PYL
Item
Compressor
Name
Inverter
Type
OC protection
device
Electronic expansion valve (Main)
Electronic expansion valve (Subcool)
Pressure
protection
High pressure For M1C
switch
Low pressure sensor
Fusible plug
Temperature
protection
Discharge gas temperature
protection
(Discharge pipe thermistor)
Inverter fin temperature
protection
(Radiator fin thermistor)
Others
Fuse
Symbol
Model
RWEYQ8PY1, 10PY1, 10PYL
JT1G-VDKYR@T
M1C
13.5A
Y1E
Y2E
Fully closed: 0pls
Fully closed: 0pls
HPS
OFF: 4.0 −0.12 MPa
+0
Fully open: 2000pls
Fully open: 2000pls
ON: 3.0±0.15MPa
S1NPL
—
OFF: 0.07MPa
Open: 70~75°C
R3T
OFF: 135°C
R1T
OFF: 98°C
For main PC
board
F1U
F2U
250V AC 10A Class B
250V AC 10A Class B
For Noise filter
PC board
F1U
250V AC 5A Class B
3.1.2 RWEYQ10PTL
Item
Name
Symbol
Type
Compressor
OC protection
device
Electronic expansion valve (Main)
M1C
Y1E
Fully closed: 0pls
Fully open: 2000pls
Electronic expansion valve (Subcool)
High pressure For M1C
switch
Pressure
Low pressure sensor
protection
Fusible plug
Y2E
Fully closed: 0pls
Fully open: 2000pls
HPS
+0
OFF: 4.0 −0.12 MPa
Temperature
protection
Others
300
Inverter
Model
RWEYQ10PTL
JT100G-VDK@SB
ON: 3.0±0.15MPa
S1NPL
—
OFF: 0.07MPa
Open: 70~75°C
R3T
OFF: 135°C
R1T
OFF: 98°C
For main PC
board
F1U
F2U
250V AC 10A Class B
250V AC 10A Class B
For Noise filter
PC board
F1U
250V AC 5A Class B
Discharge gas temperature
protection
(Discharge pipe thermistor)
Inverter fin temperature
protection
(Radiator fin thermistor)
Fuse
24.0A
Appendix
Si30-813
3.2
List of Electrical and Functional Parts
Indoor Side
3.2.1 Indoor Unit
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXFQ25
PVE
FXFQ32
PVE
FXFQ40
PVE
FXFQ50
PVE
Wired Remote
Controller
FXFQ100 FXFQ125 Remark
PVE
PVE
FXFQ80
PVE
BRC1C62
Option
Wireless Remote
Controller
Fan Motor
FXFQ63
PVE
BRC7F634F
M1F
DC280V 56W 8P
DC 320V 120W 8P
Drain Pump
M1P
AC220-240V (50Hz) AC220V (60Hz)
PLD-12230DM
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Swing Motor
M1S
MP35HCA[3P080801-1]
Stepping Motor DC12V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
In PC board A2P or wired remote controller
Thermistor (for Heat
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-14 φ8 L1000
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-15 φ6 L1000
20kΩ (25°C)
Motors
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
Others
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211B
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Thermal Fuse
TFu
Transformer
T1R
—
—
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXCQ
20MVE
FXCQ
25MVE
FXCQ
32MVE
FXCQ
40MVE
FXCQ
50MVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC7C62
FXCQ
63MVE
FXCQ
80MVE
FXCQ Remark
125MVE
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor
M1F
1φ10W
1φ15W
Thermal Fuse 152°C
Motors
1φ20W
1φ30W
—
Drain Pump
M1P
AC220-240V (50Hz) AC220V (60Hz)
PLD-12230DM
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Swing Motor
M1S
MT8-L[3PA07509-1]
AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-6 φ4 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-6 φ8 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
R2T
ST8602A-5 φ6 L1000
20kΩ (25°C)
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211B
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
Others
Appendix
1φ50W
1φ85W
Thermal protector 135°C : OFF
87°C : ON
301
List of Electrical and Functional Parts
Si30-813
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXKQ
25MAVE
FXKQ
32MAVE
FXKQ
40MAVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC4C61
Remark
FXKQ
63MAVE
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor
1φ15W 4P
M1F
1φ20W 4P
Thermal Fuse 146°C
Motors
Drain Pump
M1P
AC 220-240V (50Hz)
PLD-12200DM
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Swing Motor
M1S
MP35HCA [3P080801-1]
AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-13 φ4 L630
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-7 φ8 L1600
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-7 φ6 L1600
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
Others
1φ45W 4P
Thermal protector 120°C : OFF
ON
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211B
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
105°C :
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXDQ
20PBVE(T)
FXDQ
25PBVE(T)
FXDQ
32PBVE(T)
FXDQ
40NBVE(T)
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC4C65
FXDQ
50NBVE(T)
FXDQ
63NBVE(T)
Remark
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor
M1F
1φ62W
1φ130W
Thermal protector
130°C: OFF, 83°C: ON
Motors
Drain Pump
M1P
AC220-240V (50Hz)
PLD-12230DM
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-1 φ4 L=250
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-4 φ8 L=800
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-4 φ6 L=800
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
Others
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211E
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
∗
∗
∗only for FXDQ20~63N(B)VE, FXDQ20~32PBVE (with Drain Pump Type)
302
Appendix
Si30-813
List of Electrical and Functional Parts
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
Model
Remark
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
FXSQ
20MVE 25MVE 32MVE 40MVE 50MVE 63MVE 80MVE 100MVE 125MVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC4C62
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor
1φ50W
M1F
1φ65W
1φ85W 1φ125W
Thermal Fuse 152°C
Motors
Drain Pump
M1P
AC220-240V (50Hz)
PLD-12230DM
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-4 φ4 L800
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-7 φ8 L1600
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-6 φ6 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
Others
1φ225W
Thermal protector
135°C : OFF 87°C : ON
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211B
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXMQ
40PVE
FXMQ
50PVE
FXMQ
63PVE
FXMQ
80PVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC4C65
Fan Motor
M1F
DC280V 140W 8P
Drain Pump
M1P
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-3 φ L630
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-14 φ8 L1000
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-6 φ8 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat
Exchanger)
Others
Appendix
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211B
Fuse (A1P)
F1U
250V 3.15A
Fuse (A2P, A3P)
F3U·
F4U
250V 6.3A
Fuse (A2P)
F2U
250V 5A
FXMQ
125PVE
Remark
DC373V 350W 8P
AC220-240V (50/60Hz)
PLD-12230DM
Thermal protector 145°C
Motors
FXMQ
100PVE
—
303
List of Electrical and Functional Parts
Si30-813
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXHQ
32MAVE
FXHQ
63MAVE
Wired Remote
Controller
Remark
FXHQ
100MAVE
BRC1C62
Wireless Controller
Option
BRC7E63W
AC 220~240V/220V 50Hz/60Hz
Fan Motor
1φ63W
M1F
1φ130W
Thermal protector 130°C : OFF
Motors
Capacitor for Fan Motor
3.0µF-400V
C1R
80°C : ON
9.0µF-400V
Swing Motor
M1S
MT8-L[3P058751-1]
AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601A-1 φ4 L250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-6 φ8 L = 1250
20kΩ (25°C)
ST8605-6 φ8 L = 1250
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-6 φ6 L = 1250
20kΩ (25°C)
ST8602A-6 φ6 L = 1250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
Others
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXAQ
20MAVE
FXAQ
25MAVE
FXAQ
32MAVE
FXAQ
40MAVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC7E618
FXAQ
50MAVE
FXAQ
63MAVE
Remark
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
M1F
1φ40W
Swing Motor
M1S
MP24 [3SB40333-1]
AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-2 φ4 L400
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-2 φ8 L400
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602-2 φ6 L400
20kΩ (25°C)
Fan Motor
Motors
Thermal protector 130°C : OFF
Thermistor (for Heat
Exchanger)
Others
304
1φ43W
80°C : ON
MSFBC20C21 [3SB40550-1]
AC200~240V
Float Switch
S1L
OPTION
Fuse
F1U
250V 5A φ5.2
Appendix
Si30-813
List of Electrical and Functional Parts
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXLQ
20MAVE
FXLQ
25MAVE
FXLQ
32MAVE
FXLQ
40MAVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC4C62
FXLQ
50MAVE
FXLQ
63MAVE
Remark
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Motors
Fan Motor
M1F
1φ15W
1φ25W
Thermal protector 135°C : OFF
Capacitor for Fan Motor
C1R
1.0µF-400V
0.5µF-400V
1.0µF-400V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-6 φ4 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-9 φ8 L2500
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-9 φ6 L2500
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat
Exchanger)
Others
1φ35W
120°C : ON
Fuse
F1U
AC250V 5A
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
1.5µF-400V
2.0µF-400V
FXNQ
50MAVE
FXNQ
63MAVE
Model
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
FXNQ
20MAVE
FXNQ
25MAVE
FXNQ
32MAVE
FXNQ
40MAVE
Wired Remote
Controller
BRC1C62
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC4C62
Remark
Option
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Motors
Fan Motor
M1F
1φ15W
1φ25W
Thermal protector 135°C : OFF
Capacitor for Fan Motor
C1R
1.0µF-400V
0.5µF-400V
1.0µF-400V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-6 φ4 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
(for Heat
Thermistors Thermistor
Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T
ST8605-9 φ8 L2500
20kΩ (25°C)
R2T
ST8602A-9 φ6 L2500
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat
Exchanger)
Others
Fuse
F1U
AC250V 5A
Transformer
T1R
TR22H21R8
Parts Name
Remote
Controller
Symbol
1φ35W
120°C : ON
1.5µF-400V
2.0µF-400V
Model
FXUQ71MAV1
FXUQ100MAV1
Wired Remote
Controller
FXUQ125MAV1
Remark
BRC1C62
Option
Wireless Remote
Controller
BRC7C528W
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor
M1F
1φ45W
1φ90W
Thermal protector 130°C
Motors
Thermistors
Others
Appendix
Thermal protector 130°C : OFF
Drain Pump
M1P
AC220-240V (50Hz) AC220V (60Hz)
PJV-1426
Swing Motor
M1S
MT8-L[3PA07572-1]
AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air)
R1T
ST8601-1 φ4 L=250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat
Exchanger)
R2T
ST8602A-4 φ6 L=800
20kΩ (25°C)
Float Switch
S1L
FS-0211B
83°C : ON
305
Option List
Si30-813
4. Option List
4.1
Optional Accessories
Note: 1. Refer to the latest drawing.
2. In the case of heat recovery system, COOL/HEAT Selector cannot be connected.
3. 1 Accessory exclusively for Y1 models.
Contained in the product package for TL and YL models.
3D062157
306
Appendix
Si30-813
Example of Connection
5. Example of Connection
* Below table is mentioned about the case of heat recovery system (3-piping: suction gas, HP/LP gas and liquid pipes).
In case of heat pump system (2-piping: gas and liquid pipes), select the pipe size from suction gas pipe for gas pipes and from liquid gas pipe for liquid pipes. And BS unit is not required.
Outside unit
side
a
(2-piping)
BS
unit
Suction gas piping
Liquid piping
Gas piping
Liquid piping
Indoor unit
side
Single outside
unit system
f
(Thin line): 2-piping
Example 4
Allowable
height
length
Allowable length after the branch
1
2
3
4
5
c
c
Outside unit
7 H2
d
8
g
i
B1
F
First outside h 1
branch
k
G
j
l
n
B2
m
2
D
Actual pipe length
Difference in height
Difference in height
Difference in height
Actual pipe length
B3
a
Example 5
Pipe size selection
Caution
The thickness of the pipes in the table shows the requirements of Japanese
High Pressure Gas Control low. (As of Jan. 2003)
The thickness and material shall be selected in accordance with local code.
B4
Piping between outside branches (part B)
Piping between outside branch and outside unit (part C)
r
3
4
5
u
g
e
B1
d
H1
l
B2
8
1
r
2
k
j
l
8 H2
7
3
4
t
REFNET joint (A·B)
s
5
6
Example 6
l
B5
B6
k
4
5
6
7
REFNET header
B1
d
B2
c
1
f B3 h B4
i
B5
4
5
2
3
m
6
8
Cooling only
( 7 · 8 )
BS units
( B1 - B6 )
Indoor units
( 1 - 8 )
l
B6
k
n
7 H2
o
8
Outside
unit
Cooling only
( 5 · 6 )
H3
j
g
e
o
n
m
H2
H1
Heat recovery system
( 1 - 6 )
3
a
b
Indoor units
( 1 - 8 )
Heat recovery system
( 1 - 4 , 7 · 8 )
H1
Outside unit
Cooling only
( 7 · 8 )
Cooling only
( 5 · 6 )
B4
i
BS units
( B1 - B5 )
p
o
2
j
h
B3
g
Outside unit
BS units Indoor units
( B1 - B6 ) ( 1 - 8 )
REFNET header
B4
f
B2
e
1
H2
7
6
B5 n
d
B1
Heat recovery system
( 1 - 4 , 7 · 8 )
i
B3
h
f
b
c
o
B
c
s
k
j
m
7 H2
8
C
, indoor units of 5 + 6 + 7 + 8
Piping between outside unit (∗) and refrigerant branch kit (part A)
Piping between outside branch and outside unit (part C)
• Match to the size of connection piping of outside unit
Capacity type
of outside unit
RWEYQ10
RWEYQ20
RWEYQ30
(Unit: mm)
Piping size (outer diameter × Min. thickness)
Suction gas pipe
HP/LP gas pipe
Liquid pipe
φ22.2 × 0.80
φ28.6 × 0.99
φ34.9 × 1.21
φ19.1 × 0.80
φ22.2 × 0.80
φ28.6 × 0.99
φ 9.5 × 0.80
φ15.9 × 0.99
φ19.1 × 0.80
Piping between outside branches (part B)
• Select the size from the following table based on the total capacity of the
(Unit: mm)
outside unit to be connected to upstream
RWEYQ20
R=
+
Piping size (outer diameter × Min. thickness)
Suction gas pipe
HP/LP gas pipe
Liquid pipe
φ28.6 × 0.99
φ22.2 × 0.80
φ15.9 × 0.99
Total length (m) of liquid ×0.37
(kg/m) +
piping size at φ22.2
Total length (m) of liquid ×0.059
+
(kg/m)
piping size at φ9.5
KHRP26A22T
KHRP26A33T
KHRP26A72T
KHRP26A73T+KHRP26M73TP
KHRP25A22T
KHRP25A33T
KHRP25A72T+KHRP25M72TP
KHRP25A73T+KHRP25M73TP
(Example 1,4) In case of REFNET Joint
Total capacity
of outside unit
How to calculate the additional refrigerant
to be charged
B4
b
q
6
REFNET header
H1
H3
Heat recovery
system ( 1 - 6 )
Cooling only
( 7 · 8 )
Pipe length between outside (∗) and indoor units ≤ 120m
(Example 1,4) unit 8 : a + b + c + d + e + s ≤ 120m
(Example 3,6) unit 8 : a + o ≤ 120m
(Example 2,5) unit 6 : a + b + l ≤ 120m, 8 : a + m + n + p ≤ 120m
Equivalent pipe length between outside (∗) and indoor units ≤ 140m (Note 1) (assume equivalent pipe length of REFNET joint to be 0.5m, that of REFNET header to be 1m, BSVP100,160 is 4 m and BSVP250 is 6m.)
Total piping length from outside unit (∗) to all indoor units ≤ 300m
u
t
Piping length from outside branch to outside unit ≤ 10m Equivalent length: max 13m
r ≤ 10m (Equivalent length ≤ 13m)
s
r
Difference in height between outside and indoor units (H1) ≤ 50m (Max 40m if the outside unit is below)
u+s ≤ 10m (Equivalent length ≤ 13m)
Difference in height between indoor units (H2) ≤ 15m
u+t ≤ 10m (Equivalent length ≤ 13m)
Difference in height between outside unit (main) and outside unit (sub) (H3) ≤ 2m
Outside unit
Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit (either REFNET joint or REFNET header ) to indoor unit ≤ 40m (Note 2)
(Example 1,4) unit 8 : b + c + d + e + s ≤ 40m
(Example 2,5) unit 6 : b + l ≤ 40m, 8 :m + n + p ≤ 40m
(Example 3,6) unit 8 : o ≤ 40m
How to select REFNET joint:
How to select REFNET header
• When using REFNET joints at the first branch counted from the outside unit side.
• Select suitable one from the table below according to the total capacity of indoor units to be connected to the downstream of REFNET header.
Choose from the following table in accordance with the capacity of the outside unit.
• Be careful that 250 type cannot be connected to the downstream of REFNET header.
(Example 1,2,4,5 : REFNET joint A )
Refrigerant branch kit name
Refrigerant branch kit name
Indoor capacity index
In case of 3-tube piping
In case of 2-tube piping
Outside unit capacity type
Heat recovery system
Heat pump system
KHRP26M22H,
KHRP26M33H
<
200
KHRP25A33T
KHRP26A33T
RWEYQ10 type
KHRP25M33H
KHRP26M33H
200 ≤ x< 290
KHRP25A72T + KHRP25M72TP
KHRP26A72T
RWEYQ20 type
KHRP25M72H+KHRP25M72HP KHRP26M72H
290 ≤ x< 640
KHRP25A73T + KHRP25M73TP
KHRP26A73T + KHRP26M73TP
RWEYQ30 type
• For REFNET joints other than the first branch, select the proper branch kit model based on the total capacity index.
640 ≤
KHRP25M73H+KHRP25M73HP KHRP26M73H+KHRP26M73HP
Refrigerant branch kit name
How to select an outside branch kit (Needed when the outside unit type is RWEYQ20 or more.)
Indoor capacity index
• Select from the table below according to the number of outside units.
In case of 3-tube piping
In case of 2-tube piping
For a multi outside unit system, make the settings in accordance with
the following figure.
Piping between outside unit (∗) and refrigerant branch kit (part A)
B3
A
E
5
< 200
200 ≤ x< 290
290 ≤ x< 640
640 ≤
Example of downstream indoor units
2
p
B
h
f
1
H1
H3
Equivalent length
Total extension length
B2
B1
B5 n
i
p
o
3 4
b
g
e
Indoor units
BS units ( B1 - B5 ) ( 1 - 8 )
Cooling only
( 7 · 8 )
e
d
C
BS units Indoor units Heat recovery
( B1 - B4 ) ( 1 - 8 ) system ( 1 - 6 )
Refrigerant branch kits can only be
used with R-410A.
Appendix
s
Heat recovery system
( 1 - 6 )
B
m
REFNET header
r
6
Outside unit
Refrigerant branch kit selection
Additional referigerant to be charged R (kg)
(R should be rounded off in units of 0.1kg.)
B4
q
a
Example 3
A
H1
b
f
Multi outside
Actual pipe length
Between outside and indoor units
Between indoor and indoor units
Between outside and outside units
p
m
j
a
E
REFNET joint (A-G)
[∗]
Between outside branch and outside unit
(In case of multi system)
h
l B2 n B3
o
k
G
A
In case of multi outside unit system, re-read the
[outside unit] as [the first outside branch seen from the
indoor unit side].
Maximum
allowable
length
F
a
unit system
Between outside (∗)
and indoor units
i
B1
D
Branch with REFNET header
REFNET joint (A·B)
Example 2
e
C
Outside unit
BS units Indoor units
( B1 - B4 ) ( 1 - 8 )
• Piping between BS unit and indoor unit,
d
B
g
HP/LP gas piping
Suction gas piping
Liquid piping
Gas piping
Liquid piping
c
b
A
• Piping between outside unit and BS unit
(Thick line): 3-piping
REFNET joint (A-G)
Example 1
(Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system)
(3-piping)
HP/LP gas piping
Branch with REFNET joint and REFNET header
Branch with REFNET joint
Example of connection
Total length (m) of liquid ×0.26
+
piping size at φ19.1
(kg/m)
Corrected
Total length (m) of liquid ×0.022
(kg/m) + volume by
piping size at φ6.4
outside unit
Heat recovery system
BHFP26MA56
BHFP26MA84
Number of units of outside unit
2 unit
3 unit
(Example 2,5) In case of REFNET Joint B , indoor units of 7 + 8
(Example 2,5) In case of REFNET Header, indoor units of 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6
(Example 3,6) In case of REFNET Header,
indoor units of 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8
Piping between refrigerant branch kit and refrigerant branch kit/BS unit
Piping between BS unit and refrigerant branching kit
• Select one from the table below according to the total capacity of indoor units to be
connected to downstream.
• For the gas piping size in case of 2-tube piping between refrigerant branching kit/BS
unit and refrigerant branching kit, select the size of suction gas piping.
• The size of connection piping should not exceed the refrigerant piping size selected
under the generic term of the system.
(Unit: mm)
Piping size (outer diameter × minimum wall thickness)
Indoor capacity index
Suction gas pipe
HP/LP gas pipe
Liquid pipe
φ15.9 × 0.99
φ19.1 × 0.80
φ22.2 × 0.80
φ28.6 × 0.99
φ28.6 × 0.99
φ12.7 × 0.80
φ15.9 × 0.99
φ 9.5 × 0.80
φ34.9 × 1.21
φ41.3 × 1.43
φ28.6 × 0.99
< 150
150 ≤ x< 200
200 ≤ x< 290
290 ≤ x< 420
420 ≤ x< 640
640 ≤ x< 920
920 ≤
Total length (m) of liquid ×0.18 +
(kg/m)
piping size at φ15.9
φ19.1 × 0.80
Total length (m) of liquid ×0.12
(kg/m)
piping size at φ12.7
System name
Heat pump system
RWEYQ10
3 kg
Heat recovery system
4 kg
RWEYQ20
4.5 kg
6.5 kg
RWEYQ30
6 kg
9 kg
Heat pump system
BHFP22MA56
BHFP22MA84
Piping between BS unit (refrigerant branch kit) and indoor unit
• Match to the size of the connection piping on the indoor unit.
Indoor unit connection piping size
(Unit:mm)
Indoor capacity type
20, 25, 32, 40, 50 type
63, 80, 100, 125 type
200 type
250 type
Piping size (outer diameter × minimum
wall thickness)
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
φ12.7 × 0.80
φ15.9 × 0.99
φ19.1 × 0.80
φ22.2 × 0.80
φ6.4 × 0.80
φ9.5 × 0.80
φ9.5 × 0.80
φ12.7 × 0.80
φ15.9 × 0.99
φ19.1 × 0.80
Example for refrigerant branch using REFNET joint and REFNET header for RWEYQ30
(Heat recovery system)
a : φ19.1×30m e : φ 9.5×10m i : φ12.7×10m m: φ 6.4×10m
If the outside unit is
b : φ15.9×10m f : φ 9.5×10m j : φ 6.4×10m n : φ 6.4×10m
RWEYQ30 and the piping
lengths are as at right
c : φ09.5×10m g : φ06.4×10m k : φ 6.4×10m o : φ06.4×10m
d : φ 9.5×10m h : φ 6.4×20m l : φ 6.4×10m p : φ 6.4×10m
r : φ 9.5× 3m
s : φ09.5× 3m
t : φ09.5× 3m
u : φ15.9× 1m
R= 30 0.26 + 11 0.18 + 10 0.12 + 49 0.059 + 100 0.022 + 9 = 25.071
a
b+u
ic
+d+e+f+r+s+t g+h+j+k+l+m+n+o+p 25.1 (kg)
307
Example of Connection
Si30-813
Note 1.
When the equivalent pipe length between outside and indoor units is 80m or
more, the size of main pipes on the liquid side (refer to the figure below)
must be increased according to the right table.
(Never increase suction gas pipe and HP/LP gas pipe.)
System
RWEYQ10PYL/TL
RWEYQ20PYL/TL
RWEYQ30PYL/TL
Liquid pipe
φ9.5 → φ12.7
φ15.9 → φ19.1
φ19.1 → φ22.2
First refrigerant branch kit
Outside
unit
Main pipes
Indoor unit
Increase only liquid pipe size
Note 2. Allowable length after the first refrigerant branch kit to indoor units is 40m or less, however it can be extended up to 90m if all the following conditions are satisfied. (In case of “Branch with REFNET joint”)
Required Conditions
Example Drawings
1. It is necessary to increase the gas pipe size (*1)
between the first branch kit and the final branch kit. (Reducers must
be procured on site)
However, the pipes that are same pipe size with main pipe must not
be increased.
8 b + c + d + e + f + g + p ≤ 90 m
increase the gas pipe size (*1) of b, c, d, e, f, g
2. For calculation of Total extension length, the actual length of
above pipes must be doubled. (except main pipe and the pipes
that are not increased)
a+b×2+c×2+d×2+e×2+f×2+g×2
+ h + i + j + k + l + m + n + p ≤ 300 m
3. Indoor unit to the nearest branch kit ≤ 40 m
h, i, j....... p ≤ 40 m
4. The difference between
[Outside unit to the farthest indoor unit] and [Outside unit to
the nearest indoor unit]
≤ 40 m
The farthest indoor unit 8
The nearest indoor unit 1
( a + b + c + d + e + f + g + p ) - ( a + h ) ≤ 40 m
Increase the gas pipe size (*1) as follows
φ 9.5 → φ12.7
φ12.7 → φ15.9
φ15.9 → φ19.1
φ19.1→ φ 22.2
φ22.2 → φ25.4*2
φ28.6 → φ31.8*2
φ34.9 →φ 38.1*2
REFNET joint (A-G)
a
b
A
h
1
Outside unit
c
d
B
C
i
j
2
e
D
k
3
F
l
4
g
f
E
G
m
5
p
n
6
Indoor units ( 1 - 8 )
7
8
*1 In case of heat pump system, the liquid pipe and gas pipe.
In case of heat recovery system, the liquid pipe and suction gas pipe.
*2 If available on the site, use this size. Otherwise it can not be increased.
308
Appendix
Si30-813
Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics
6. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature
Characteristics
Indoor unit
For air suction
For liquid pipe
R1T
R2T
For gas pipe
R3T
Outdoor unit For outdoor air
For coil
R1T
R2T
For suction pipe
For Receiver gas pipe
T°C
-20
-19
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Appendix
R4T
R5T
0.0
197.81
186.53
175.97
166.07
156.80
148.10
139.94
132.28
125.09
118.34
111.99
106.03
100.41
95.14
90.17
85.49
81.08
76.93
73.01
69.32
65.84
62.54
59.43
56.49
53.71
51.09
48.61
46.26
44.05
41.95
39.96
38.08
36.30
34.62
33.02
31.50
30.06
28.70
27.41
26.18
25.01
23.91
22.85
21.85
20.90
20.00
19.14
18.32
17.54
16.80
16.10
0.5
192.08
181.16
170.94
161.36
152.38
143.96
136.05
128.63
121.66
115.12
108.96
103.18
97.73
92.61
87.79
83.25
78.97
74.94
71.14
67.56
64.17
60.96
57.94
55.08
52.38
49.83
47.42
45.14
42.98
40.94
39.01
37.18
35.45
33.81
32.25
30.77
29.37
28.05
26.78
25.59
24.45
23.37
22.35
21.37
20.45
19.56
18.73
17.93
17.17
16.45
15.76
T°C
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
0.0
16.10
15.43
14.79
14.18
13.59
13.04
12.51
12.01
11.52
11.06
10.63
10.21
9.81
9.42
9.06
8.71
8.37
8.05
7.75
7.46
7.18
6.91
6.65
6.41
6.65
6.41
6.18
5.95
5.74
5.14
4.96
4.79
4.62
4.46
4.30
4.16
4.01
3.88
3.75
3.62
3.50
3.38
3.27
3.16
3.06
2.96
2.86
2.77
2.68
2.60
2.51
(kΩ)
0.5
15.76
15.10
14.48
13.88
13.31
12.77
12.25
11.76
11.29
10.84
10.41
10.00
9.61
9.24
8.88
8.54
8.21
7.90
7.60
7.31
7.04
6.78
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.06
5.84
5.43
5.05
4.87
4.70
4.54
4.38
4.23
4.08
3.94
3.81
3.68
3.56
3.44
3.32
3.21
3.11
3.01
2.91
2.82
2.72
2.64
2.55
2.47
309
Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics
Si30-813
Outside Unit
Thermistors for
Discharge Pipe
(R3T)
T°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
310
0.0
640.44
609.31
579.96
552.00
525.63
500.66
477.01
454.60
433.37
413.24
394.16
376.05
358.88
342.58
327.10
312.41
298.45
285.18
272.58
260.60
249.00
238.36
228.05
218.24
208.90
200.00
191.53
183.46
175.77
168.44
161.45
154.79
148.43
142.37
136.59
131.06
125.79
120.76
115.95
111.35
106.96
102.76
98.75
94.92
91.25
87.74
84.38
81.16
78.09
75.14
72.32
0.5
624.65
594.43
565.78
538.63
512.97
488.67
465.65
443.84
423.17
403.57
384.98
367.35
350.62
334.74
319.66
305.33
291.73
278.80
266.51
254.72
243.61
233.14
223.08
213.51
204.39
195.71
187.44
179.57
172.06
164.90
158.08
151.57
145.37
139.44
133.79
128.39
123.24
118.32
113.62
109.13
104.84
100.73
96.81
93.06
89.47
86.04
82.75
79.61
76.60
73.71
70.96
T°C
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
0.0
72.32
69.64
67.06
64.60
62.24
59.97
57.80
55.72
53.72
51.98
49.96
48.19
46.49
44.86
43.30
41.79
40.35
38.96
37.63
36.34
35.11
33.92
32.78
31.69
30.63
29.61
28.64
27.69
26.79
25.91
25.07
24.26
23.48
22.73
22.01
21.31
20.63
19.98
19.36
18.75
18.17
17.61
17.07
16.54
16.04
15.55
15.08
14.62
14.18
13.76
13.35
0.5
70.96
68.34
65.82
63.41
61.09
58.87
56.75
54.70
52.84
50.96
49.06
47.33
45.67
44.07
42.54
41.06
39.65
38.29
36.98
35.72
34.51
33.35
32.23
31.15
30.12
29.12
28.16
27.24
26.35
25.49
24.66
23.87
23.10
22.36
21.65
20.97
20.31
19.67
19.05
18.46
17.89
17.34
16.80
16.29
15.79
15.31
14.85
14.40
13.97
13.55
13.15
T°C
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
0.0
13.35
12.95
12.57
12.20
11.84
11.49
11.15
10.83
10.52
10.21
9.92
9.64
9.36
9.10
8.84
8.59
8.35
8.12
7.89
7.68
7.47
7.26
7.06
6.87
6.69
6.51
6.33
6.16
6.00
5.84
5.69
5.54
5.39
5.25
5.12
4.98
4.86
4.73
4.61
4.49
4.38
4.27
4.16
4.06
3.96
3.86
3.76
3.67
3.58
3.49
3.41
(kΩ)
0.5
13.15
12.76
12.38
12.01
11.66
11.32
10.99
10.67
10.36
10.06
9.78
9.50
9.23
8.97
8.71
8.47
8.23
8.01
7.78
7.57
7.36
7.16
6.97
6.78
6.59
6.42
6.25
6.08
5.92
5.76
5.61
5.46
5.32
5.18
5.05
4.92
4.79
4.67
4.55
4.44
4.32
4.22
4.11
4.01
3.91
3.81
3.72
3.62
3.54
3.45
3.37
Appendix
Si30-813
Pressure Sensor
7. Pressure Sensor
Detected Pressure
PH = 1.38V-0.69
PL = 0.57V-0.28
PH : High pressure (MPa)
VL : Low pressure (MPa)
V : Voltage (V)
PH : Detected Pressure [High Side] MPa
PL : Detected Pressure [Low Side] MPa
VH : Output Voltage [High Side] VDC
VL : Output Voltage [Low Side] VDC
High Pressure (PH)
Low Pressure (PL)
Output Voltage (VH, VL)
(V3053)
Appendix
311
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power Transistors and Diode Modules
Si30-813
8. Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power
Transistors and Diode Modules
[In case of YL (3ph, 380V, 60Hz) power supply]
Please conduct followings before checking
(1) Make the outside unit power off.
(2) Disconnect the electric wiring connected to the power transistor and diode module.
Inverter PC Board
Inverter PC board (A2P)
J1
J2
J3
Fasten Tab
K2
PC0409
Pin
X11A
P3 P2 P1 N3
U
V
W
Electronic Circuit
DM
P1
P2 P3
IGBT
X10A K2
L1
L2
L3
J1
J2
J3
N3
U
V
W
X11A
312
Appendix
Si30-813
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power Transistors and Diode Modules
Power Transistor
IGBT (On Inverter
PC Board)
(Decision)
If other than given above, the power unit is defective and must be replaced.
Note:
Above figures are measured by analogue tester. Make sure to set “Tester Range” to “x 1k”.
Diode Module
(Decision)
If other than given above, the diode module is defective and must be replaced.
Note:
Above figures are measured by analogue tester. Make sure to set “Tester Range” to “x 1k”.
[In case of TL (3ph, 220V, 60Hz) power supply]
Please conduct following before checking
(1) Make the outside unit power off.
(2) Disconnect the electric wiring connected to the power transistor and diode module.
Appendix
313
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power Transistors and Diode Modules
Si30-813
[In case of TL (3ph, 220V, 60Hz) power supply]
Please conduct followings before checking.
(1) Make the outside unit power off.
(2) Disconnect the electric wiring connected to the power transistor and diode module.
[Checking procedure]
{Power transistor
[Judgment criteria]
Values for each phase in ∗1 and ∗2 in the following table must be the
same.
<The conditions that must be judged as the same value>
The difference in resistance among each phase in ∗1 is 10Ω or less.
The difference in resistance among each phase in ∗2 is 200Ω or less.
Tester electrode + Tester electrode –
P3
P3
P3
U
V
W
N3
N3
N3
U
V
W
U
V
W
P3
P3
P3
U
V
W
N3
N3
N3
Resistance Ω
Tester range
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
100~300k→∞ (∗2)
100~300k→∞ (∗2)
100~300k→∞ (∗2)
100~300k→∞ (∗2)
100~300k→∞ (∗2)
100~300k→∞ (∗2)
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1M
×1M
×1M
×1M
×1M
×1M
×1K
×1K
×1K
{Diode module
[Judgment criteria]
Values for each phase in ∗1 and ∗2 in the following table must be the
same.
<The conditions that must be judged as the same value>
The difference in resistance among each phase in ∗1 is 10Ω or less.
All of the resistances of each phase in ∗2 is ∞Ω.
Tester electrode + Tester electrode –
P1
P1
P1
HSRB
HSSB
HSTB
N3
N3
N3
HSRB
HSSB
HSTB
HSRB
HSSB
HSTB
P1
P1
P1
HSRB
HSSB
HSTB
N3
N3
N3
Resistance Ω
Tester range
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
∞ (∗2)
∞ (∗2)
∞ (∗2)
∞ (∗2)
∞ (∗2)
∞ (∗2)
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
10~20(∗1)
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
×1K
∗ When a digital tester is used, “∞” and “continuity” may be switched.
Circuit Diagram
Printed Circuit Board
P1
DM
L1
L2
L3
P2 P3
IGBT
HSRB
HSSB
HSTB
N3
U
314
V
W
Appendix
Si30-813
Part 9
Precautions for New
Refrigerant (R-410A)
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................316
1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................316
1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................318
1.3 Service Tools........................................................................................319
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
315
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
1.1
Outline
1.1.1 About Refrigerant R-410A
„ Characteristics of new refrigerant, R-410A
1. Performance
Almost the same performance as R-22 and R-407C
2. Pressure
Working pressure is approx. 1.4 times more than R-22 and R-407C.
3. Refrigerant composition
Few problems in composition control, since it is a Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant.
HFC units (Units using new refrigerants)
R-407C
R-410A
Refrigerant name
Composing
substances
Design pressure
Non-azeotropic mixture
of HFC32, HFC125 and
HFC134a (*1)
3.2 MPa (gauge pressure)
= 32.6 kgf/cm2
Quasi-azeotropic mixture
of HFC32 and JFC125
(*1)
4.0 MPa (gauge pressure) =
40.78 kgf/cm2
HCFC units
R-22
Single-component
refrigerant
2.75MPa (gauge pressure)
= 28.0 kgf/cm2
Refrigerant oil
Ozone destruction
factor (ODP)
Synthetic oil (Ether)
Mineral oil (Suniso)
0
0
0.05
Combustibility
Toxicity
None
None
None
None
None
None
★1. Non-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having different
boiling points.
★2. Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having similar
boiling points.
★3. The design pressure is different at each product. Please refer to the installation manual for
each product.
(Reference) 1 MPa
10.19716 kgf / cm2
Pressure-Enthalpy curves of HFC-32/125 (50/50wt%)
316
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
„ Thermodynamic characteristic of R-410A
Temperature
( )
Steam pressure
(kPa)
Liquid
Vapor
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Density
(kg/m3 )
Liquid
Vapor
Specific heat at constant
pressure (kJ/kgK)
Liquid
Vapor
Specific enthalpy
(kJ/kg)
Liquid
Vapor
Specific entropy
(kJ/KgK)
Liquid
Vapor
317
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
1.2
Si30-813
Refrigerant Cylinders
„ Cylinder specifications
• The cylinder is painted refrigerant color (pink).
• The cylinder valve is equipped with a siphon tube.
Siphon tube
Cylinder
Refrigerant can be charged in liquid state with cylinder in
upright position.
Caution: Do not lay cylinder on its side during charging, since
it cause refrigerant in gas state to enter the system.
„ Handling of cylinders
(1) Laws and regulations
R-410A is liquefied gas, and the High-Pressure Gas Safety Law must be observed in
handling them. Before using, refer to the High-Pressure Gas Safety Law.
The Law stipulates standards and regulations that must be followed to prevent accidents
with high-pressure gases. Be sure to follow the regulations.
(2) Handing of vessels
Since R-410A is high-pressure gas, it is contained in high-pressure vessels.
Although those vessels are durable and strong, careless handling can cause damage that
can lead to unexpected accidents. Do not drop vessels, let them fall, apply impact or roll
them on the ground.
(3) Storage
Although R-410A is not flammable, it must be stored in a well-ventilated, cool, and dark
place in the same way as any other high-pressure gases.
It should also be noted that high-pressure vessels are equipped with safety devices that
releases gas when the ambient temperature reaches more than a certain level (fusible plug
melts) and when the pressure exceeds a certain level (spring-type safety valve operates).
318
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
1.3
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Service Tools
R-410A is used under higher working pressure, compared to previous refrigerants (R-22,
R-407C). Furthermore, the refrigerating machine oil has been changed from Suniso oil to Ether
oil, and if oil mixing is occurred, sludge results in the refrigerants and causes other problems.
Therefore, gauge manifolds and charge hoses that are used with a previous refrigerant (R-22,
R-407C) can not be used for products that use new refrigerants.
Be sure to use dedicated tools and devices.
„ Tool compatibility
Compatibility
HFC
HCFC
Tool
R-410A
R-407C
Gauge manifold
Charge hose
• Do not use the same tools for R-22 and
R-410A.
• Thread specification differs for R-410A
and R-407C.
✕
✕
{
Charging cylinder
Gas detector
{
✕
Vacuum pump
(pump with reverse flow
preventive function)
Weighting instrument
{
• Weighting instrument used for HFCs.
• The same tool can be used for HFCs.
• To use existing pump for HFCs,
vacuum pump adaptor must be
installed.
{
Charge mouthpiece
✕
Flaring tool (Clutch type)
{
Torque wrench
Pipe cutter
{
{
Pipe expander
Pipe bender
{
{
Pipe assembling oil
✕
Refrigerant recovery
device
Check your recovery device.
Refrigerant piping
Reasons for change
R-22
See the chart below.
• Seal material is different between R-22
and HFCs.
• Thread specification is different
between R-410A and others.
• For R-410A, flare gauge is necessary.
• Torque-up for 1/2 and 5/8
• Due to refrigerating machine oil
change. (No Suniso oil can be used.)
• Only φ19.1 is changed to 1/2H material
while the previous material is "O".
As for the charge mouthpiece and packing, 1/2UNF20 is necessary for mouthpiece size of
charge hose.
„ Copper tube material and thickness
Pipe size
φ6.4
φ9.5
φ12.7
φ15.9
φ19.1
φ22.2
φ25.4
φ28.6
φ31.8
φ38.1
φ44.5
Material
O
O
O
O
O
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
Ve-up
R-407C
Thickness
t (mm)
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
Material
O
O
O
O
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
1/2H
Ve-upII
R-410A
Thickness
t (mm)
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.4
1.6
* O: Soft (Annealed)
H: Hard (Drawn)
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
319
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
1. Flaring tool
Flare gauge
„ Specifications
• Dimension A
Unit:mm
Nominal size
A
Tube O.D.
Do
Class-2 (R-410A)
+0
-0.4
Class-1 (Conventional)
1/4
6.35
9.1
9.0
3/8
9.52
13.2
13.0
1/2
12.70
16.6
16.2
5/8
15.88
19.7
19.4
3/4
19.05
24.0
23.3
„ Differences
• Change of dimension A
Dimension A
For class-1: R-407C
For class-2: R-410A
Conventional flaring tools can be used when the work process is changed.
(change of work process)
Previously, a pipe extension margin of 0 to 0.5mm was provided for flaring. For R-410A air
conditioners, perform pipe flaring with a pipe extension margin of 1.0 to 1.5mm.
(For clutch type only)
Conventional tool with pipe extension margin adjustment can be used.
320
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
2. Torque wrench
„ Specifications
• Dimension B
Unit:mm
Nominal size
Class-1
Class-2
Previous
1/2
5/8
24
27
26
29
24
27
No change in tightening torque
No change in pipes of other sizes
„ Differences
• Change of dimension B
Only 1/2", 5/8" are extended
For class-1: R-407C
For class-2: R-410A
Dimension B
3. Vacuum pump with check valve
Vacuum pump adaptor
Reverse flow preventive
vacuum adaptor
„ Specifications
• Discharge speed
50 l/min (50Hz)
60 l/min (60Hz)
• Suction port UNF7/16-20(1/4 Flare)
UNF1/2-20(5/16 Flare) with adaptor
z Maximum degree of vacuum
Select a vacuum pump which is able to keep
the vacuum degree of the system in excess of
–100.7 kPa (5 torr – 755 mmHg).
„ Differences
• Equipped with function to prevent reverse oil flow
• Previous vacuum pump can be used by installing adaptor.
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
321
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
4. Leak tester
„ Specifications
• Hydrogen detecting type, etc.
• Applicable refrigerants
R-410A, R-407C, R-404A, R-507A, R-134a, etc.
„ Differences
• Previous testers detected chlorine. Since HFCs do not contain chlorine, new tester detects
hydrogen.
5. Refrigerant oil (Air compal)
„ Specifications
• Contains synthetic oil, therefore it can be used for piping work of every refrigerant cycle.
• Offers high rust resistance and stability over long period of time.
„ Differences
• Can be used for R-410A and R-22 units.
6. Gauge manifold for R-410A
„ Specifications
• High pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 5.3 MPa (-76 cmHg to 53 kg/cm2)
• Low pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 3.8 MPa (-76 cmHg to 38 kg/cm2)
• 1/4" → 5/16" (2min → 2.5min)
• No oil is used in pressure test of gauges.
→ For prevention of contamination
322
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
• Temperature scale indicates the relationship between pressure and temperature in gas
saturated state.
„ Differences
• Change in pressure
• Change in service port diameter
7. Charge hose for R-410A
(Hose with ball valve)
„
•
•
•
Specifications
Working pressure 5.08 MPa (51.8 kg/cm2)
Rupture pressure 25.4 MPa (259 kg/cm2)
Available with and without hand-operate valve that prevents refrigerant from outflow.
„
•
•
•
Differences
Pressure proof hose
Change in service port diameter
Use of nylon coated material for HFC resistance
8. Charging cylinder
Can not be used
„ Specifications
• Use weigher for refrigerant charge listed below to charge directly from refrigerant cylinder.
„ Differences
• The cylinder can not be used for mixed refrigerant since mixing ratio is changed during
charging.
When R-410A is charged in liquid state using charging cylinder, foaming phenomenon is
generated inside charging cylinder.
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
323
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
324
Si30-813
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Si30-813
Index
A
D
A0 .........................................................................168
A1 .........................................................................169
A3 .........................................................................170
A6 .........................................................172, 173, 176
A7 .........................................................................179
A8 .........................................................................181
A9 .........................................................................182
Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature ...............203
Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor .................................173
Abnormal Power Supply Voltage .........................181
Actuation of High Pressure Switch .......................195
Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................197
Address Duplication of Centralized Controller .....238
Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........247, 254
AF .........................................................................184
Airflow Adjustment (AUTO) ..................................112
Airflow Direction Setting .......................................115
Airflow Setting When Heating
Thermostat is OFF ........................................113
Airflow When Cooling Thermostat is OFF ............113
AJ .........................................................................185
Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset ...............113
Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes ............... 111
Discharge Pipe Protection Control ........................ 79
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control”
Blinks (Repeats Double Blink) ...................... 260
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control”
Blinks (Repeats Single Blink) ....................... 257
Drain Level above Limit ....................................... 184
Drain Pump Control ............................................... 89
C
F
C1 .........................................................................186
C4 .........................................................................188
C5 .........................................................................189
C6 .........................................................................190
C9 .........................................................................191
CC ........................................................................192
Centralized Control Group No. Setting .................118
CHECK 1 ..............................................................261
CHECK 2 ..............................................................262
CHECK 3 ..............................................................263
CHECK 4 ..............................................................264
CHECK 5 ..............................................................265
CHECK 6 ..............................................................266
Check for causes of drop in low pressure ............262
Check for causes of overheat operation ..............263
Check for causes of rise in high pressure ............261
Check for causes of wet operation .......................264
Check for excessive refrigerant charging .............265
Check for inadequate refrigerant quantity ............266
Check Operation ..................................................102
Check Operation not executed .............................228
CJ .........................................................................193
Compressor Motor Lock .......................................199
Contents of Control Modes ..................................120
Cool / Heat Mode Switching (In case of heat pump
connection) ...................................................133
Cool / Heat Mode Switching (In case of heating and
simultaneous cooling / heating) operation
connection .....................................................132
Cooling Fan Control ...............................................81
F3 ........................................................................ 203
F6 ........................................................................ 204
Failure of Combination (Between Indoor unit PC
Board and Fan PC Board) ............................ 190
Failure of Transmission (Between Indoor unit PC
Board and Fan PC Board) ............................ 186
Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload ........................ 172
Field Setting from Outside Unit ........................... 122
Setting by dip switches ................................. 122
Setting by push button switches ................... 124
“Filter Cleaning” Displayed or Not Displayed ...... 111
Filter Sign Setting ................................................ 111
Freeze Prevention ................................................. 98
Functional Parts Layout ........................................ 49
RWEYQ8P, 10P ............................................. 49
Index
E
E1 ........................................................................ 194
E3 ........................................................................ 195
E4 ........................................................................ 197
E5 ........................................................................ 199
E9 ........................................................................ 201
Error of External Protection Device ..................... 168
External Appearance ............................................. 11
Indoor Units .................................................... 11
Outside Units .................................................. 12
External ON/OFF Input ....................................... 112
External Static Pressure Settings
(for FXMQ-P model) ..................................... 116
H
High Pressure Protection Control .......................... 76
HJ ........................................................................ 206
Humidification When Heating
Thermostat is OFF ....................................... 116
I
Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control .............................. 245, 252
Individual Setting of Ventilation ........................... 117
Indoor & Outside Units and Remote Controller
Combination Failure ..................................... 237
Interlocked Operation between Humidifier and Drain
Pump ............................................................ 116
i
Si30-813
Inverter Compressor Abnormal ............................216
Inverter Current Abnormal ....................................217
Inverter Over-Ripple Protection ............................221
Inverter Protection Control .....................................80
Inverter Start Up Error ..........................................218
J
J3
J4
J5
J7
J9
JA
JC
.........................................................................208
.........................................................................209
.........................................................................210
.........................................................................211
.........................................................................212
.........................................................................213
.........................................................................214
L
L4 .........................................................................215
L5 .........................................................................216
L8 .........................................................................217
L9 .........................................................................218
LC .........................................................................219
List of Electrical and Functional Parts ..................300
Indoor Unit .....................................................301
Outside Unit ...................................................300
Local setting switch ..............................................105
Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt ..............91
Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure ..............223
Low Pressure Protection Control ...........................77
M
M1 ................................................................243, 250
M8 ................................................................244, 251
MA ................................................................245, 252
Malfunction code indication by outdoor unit
PC board .......................................................166
Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device ....185
Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Pressure
Sensor ...........................................................213
Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor
(R3T) .............................................................208
Malfunction of Drain Level Control System
(S1L) .............................................................170
Malfunction of Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor
(R4T) .............................................................209
Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ..............192
Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature
Rise (R1T) .....................................................215
Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature
Sensor ...........................................................222
Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T) ........211
Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic Expansion
Valve (20E) ...................................................182
Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic Expansion
Valve (Y1E, Y3E) ..........................................201
Malfunction of Sub Cooling Heat Exchanger Outlet
Thermistor (R5T) ...........................................212
Malfunction of Suction Pipe Pressure Sensor ......214
Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (MA) .................179
Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address
Undefined ......................................................242
ii
Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for
Suction Air .................................................... 191
Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger ........................................... 188
Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Suction Pipe ................................................. 210
Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for
Gas Pipes ..................................................... 189
Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in Remote
Controller ...................................................... 193
Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit .................... 239, 248
Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and
Outside Units in the Same System .............. 235
Malfunction of Transmission between
Indoor Units .................................................. 229
Malfunction of Transmission between Inverter and
Control PC Board ......................................... 219
Malfunction of Transmission between Master and
Slave Remote Controllers ............................ 234
Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control ....... 244, 251
Malfunction of Transmission between
Outside Units ................................................ 232
Malfunction of Transmission between Remote
Controller and Indoor Unit ............................ 231
Malfunction of Water System .............................. 206
MC ............................................................... 247, 254
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power
Transistors and Diode Modules ................... 312
Microcomputer normal monitor ............................ 105
Mode setting switch ............................................. 105
Monitor mode ...................................................... 130
N
Normal Control ...................................................... 71
Normal Operation .................................................. 64
O
Operation Lamp Blinks ........................................ 255
Operation Mode .................................................... 63
Operation of Downward Flow Flap: Yes/No ........ 115
Option List ........................................................... 306
Optional Output Switching ................................... 112
Outside Unit PC Board Layout ............................ 105
P
P1 ........................................................................ 221
P4 ........................................................................ 222
PC Board Defect ......................... 169, 194, 243, 250
Piping Diagrams .................................................. 272
BS Units ........................................................ 273
Indoor Unit .................................................... 274
Outside Units ................................................ 272
Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous
Failure .......................................................... 226
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .......... 316
Pressure Sensor ................................................. 311
Protection Control ................................................. 76
Index
Si30-813
R
Ultra-Long-Life Filter Sign Setting ....................... 111
Refrigerant Circuit ..................................................46
BS Unit Functional Parts .................................48
RWEYQ8P, 10P ..............................................46
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode ............51
In Case of Heat Pump Connection ..................51
In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(3 Outside Units Connection) ..............57
In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(One Outside Unit Installation) ............53
Refrigerant Overcharged ......................................204
Refrigerant System not Set, Incompatible Wiring/
Piping ............................................................241
Reverse Phase, Open Phase ...............................225
W
Wiring Diagrams .................................................. 277
BS Unit .......................................................... 284
Indoor Unit .................................................... 286
Outside Unit .................................................. 277
Outside Unit Field Wiring .............................. 280
S
Selection of Thermistor ........................................111
Set mode display (LED) .......................................105
Setting by dip switches .........................................122
Setting by push button switches ...........................124
Setting mode 1 .....................................................125
Setting mode 2 .....................................................126
Setting of Airflow Direction Adjustment Range ....115
Setting of Demand Operation ...............................138
Setting of Direct Duct Connection ........................116
Setting of Normal Airflow ......................................114
Setting of Operation Mode to "AUTO" ..................113
Setting of Refrigerant Additional
Charging Operation .......................................142
Setting of the Static Pressure Selection ...............115
Special Operation ...................................................82
Standby ..................................................................68
Startup Control .......................................................69
Stop ........................................................................65
T
Thermistor Resistance /
Temperature Characteristics .........................309
Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller ...............92
Thermostat Switching ...........................................113
Troubleshooting
(OP: Central Remote Controller) ...................243
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer) ................248
Troubleshooting
(OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) ..................255
U
U0 .........................................................................223
U1 .........................................................................225
U2 .........................................................................226
U3 .........................................................................228
U4 .........................................................................229
U5 .........................................................................231
U7 .........................................................................232
U8 .........................................................................234
U9 .........................................................................235
UA ........................................................................237
UC ........................................................................238
UE ................................................................239, 248
UF ........................................................................241
UH ........................................................................242
Index
iii
Si30-813
iv
Index
Si30-813
Drawings & Flow Charts
A
I
Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature ...............203
Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor .................................173
Abnormal Power Supply Voltage .........................181
Actuation of High Pressure Switch .......................195
Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................197
Address Duplication of Centralized Controller .....238
Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........247, 254
Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control .............................. 245, 252
Indoor & Outside Units and Remote Controller
Combination Failure ..................................... 237
Inverter Compressor Abnormal ........................... 216
Inverter Current Abnormal ................................... 217
Inverter Over-Ripple Protection ........................... 221
Inverter Start Up Error ......................................... 218
C
Centralized Control Group No. Setting .................118
BRC1C Type .................................................118
BRC7C Type .................................................119
Group No. Setting Example ...........................119
Check Operation not executed .............................228
Compressor Motor Lock .......................................199
D
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control”
Blinks (Repeats Double Blink) ......................260
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control”
Blinks (Repeats Single Blink) ........................257
Drain Level above Limit ........................................184
Drain Pump Control ................................................89
When the Float Switch is Tripped and “AF” is
Displayed on the Remote Controller ...90
When the Float Switch is Tripped During Cooling
OFF by Thermostat .............................89
When the Float Switch is Tripped During Heating
Operation ............................................90
When the Float Switch is Tripped While the
Cooling Thermostat is ON ..................89
E
Error of External Protection Device ......................168
Example of Connection ........................................307
Example of Transmission Line Connection...........132
External Appearance ..............................................11
Indoor Units .....................................................11
Outside Units ...................................................12
F
Failure of Combination (Between Indoor unit PC
Board and Fan PC Board) ............................190
Failure of Transmission (Between Indoor unit PC
Board and Fan PC Board) ............................186
Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload .........................172
Freeze Prevention ..................................................98
Functional Parts Layout .........................................49
RWEYQ8P, 10P ..............................................49
H
Heater Control ........................................................96
Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only) .......95
Drawings & Flow Charts
L
Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt ............. 91
Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure .............. 223
M
Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device .... 185
Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Pressure
Sensor .......................................................... 213
Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor
(R3T) ............................................................ 208
Malfunction of Drain Level Control System
(S1L) ............................................................ 170
Malfunction of Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor
(R4T) ............................................................ 209
Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System .............. 192
Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature
Rise (R1T) .................................................... 215
Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature
Sensor .......................................................... 222
Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T) ....... 211
Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic Expansion
Valve (20E) .................................................. 182
Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic Expansion
Valve (Y1E, Y3E) ......................................... 201
Malfunction of Sub Cooling Heat Exchanger Outlet
Thermistor (R5T) .......................................... 212
Malfunction of Suction Pipe Pressure Sensor ..... 214
Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (MA) ................ 179
Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address
Undefined ..................................................... 242
Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for
Suction Air .................................................... 191
Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger ........................................... 188
Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Suction Pipe ................................................. 210
Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for
Gas Pipes ..................................................... 189
Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in
Remote Controller ........................................ 193
Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit .................... 239, 248
Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and
Outside Units in the Same System .............. 235
v
Si30-813
Malfunction of Transmission between
Indoor Units ...................................................229
Malfunction of Transmission between Inverter and
Control PC Board ..........................................219
Malfunction of Transmission between Master and
Slave Remote Controllers .............................234
Malfunction of Transmission between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control ........244, 251
Malfunction of Transmission between
Outside Units ................................................232
Malfunction of Transmission between Remote
Controller and Indoor Unit .............................231
Malfunction of Water System ...............................206
Method of Checking the Inverter’s Power Transistors
and Diode Modules .......................................312
Mode changing procedure ...................................124
O
Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................255
Outside Unit PC Board Layout .............................105
Outside Unit Rotation .............................................88
P
PC Board Defect ..........................169, 194, 243, 250
Piping Diagrams ...................................................272
BS Units .........................................................273
Indoor Unit .....................................................274
Outside Units .................................................272
Power Supply Insufficient or
Instantaneous Failure ...................................226
Pressure Sensor ..................................................311
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of
Switch Box ....................................................268
Procedure for Dismounting ............................268
Procedure for Mounting .................................268
R
Refrigerant Circuit ..................................................46
BS Unit Functional Parts .................................48
RWEYQ8P, 10P ..............................................47
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode ............51
In Case of Heat Pump Connection ..................51
In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(3 Outside Units Connection) ..............57
In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(One Outside Unit Installation) ............53
Refrigerant Overcharged ......................................204
Refrigerant System not Set,
Incompatible Wiring/Piping ...........................241
Reverse Phase, Open Phase ...............................225
vi
S
Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller ........ 155
Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller .... 156
Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each BS Unit by
Cool/Heat Selector ....................................... 132
Setting by dip switches ........................................ 122
Setting by push button switches .......................... 124
Setting of Demand Operation .............................. 138
Image of operation in the case of A .............. 140
Image of operation in the case of
A and B ............................................ 140
Image of operation in the case of B .............. 140
Simplified Remote Controller ............................... 108
BRC2A51 ...................................................... 108
BRC2C51 ...................................................... 108
T
Thermostat Control in Dry Operation .................... 94
Thermostat Control While in Normal Operation .... 94
Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller .............. 92
Cooling ............................................................ 92
Heating ........................................................... 93
Troubleshooting
(OP: Central Remote Controller) .................. 243
Troubleshooting (OP: Schedule Timer) ............... 248
Troubleshooting
(OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) ................. 255
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ................ 154
W
Wired Remote Controller ..................................... 106
BRC1C61, 62 ................................................ 106
Wireless Remote Controller - Indoor Unit ............ 107
BRC4C type .................................................. 107
BRC7C type .................................................. 107
BRC7E type .................................................. 107
Wiring Diagrams .................................................. 277
BS Unit .......................................................... 284
Indoor Unit .................................................... 286
Outside Unit .................................................. 277
Outside Unit Field Wiring .............................. 280
Drawings & Flow Charts
Warning
Daikin Industries, Ltd.’s products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the
world. Daikin Industries, Ltd. does not have control over which products are exported to and used in a
particular country. Prior to purchase, please therefore confirm with your local authorised importer,
distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for
use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict
or modify the application of any local legislation.
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion
1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
JMI-0107
JQA-1452
About ISO 9001
ISO 9001 is a plant certification system
defined by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) relating to quality
assurance. ISO 9001 certification covers
quality assurance aspects related to the
“design, development, manufacture,
installation, and supplementary service” of
products manufactured at the plant.
About ISO 14001
ISO 14001 is the standard defined by the
International Organization for Standardization
(ISO) relating to environmental management
systems. Our group has been acknowledged by an
internationally accredited compliance organisation
as having an appropriate programme of
environmental protection procedures and
activities to meet the requirements of ISO 14001.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of December 2008 but subject to change without notice.
Si30-813
12/2008 AK
Download PDF